Fluke 5520A Service Service manual
Fluke 5520A Service is a multi-product calibrator that provides a wide range of capabilities for testing and calibrating various electronic devices. It is designed for use in a variety of applications, including manufacturing, maintenance, and repair. Some of the key features of the Fluke 5520A Service include the ability to source and measure voltage, current, resistance, and frequency. It also has the ability to generate waveforms, simulate thermocouples, and perform continuity tests. The Fluke 5520A Service is a versatile and powerful tool that can be used to troubleshoot and calibrate a wide range of electronic devices.
Advertisement
Advertisement
PN 802303
April 1999 Rev. 1, 12/02
© 1999, 2002 Fluke Corporation, All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A.
All product names are trademarks of their respective companies
5520A
Multi-Product Calibrator
Service Manual
®
LIMITED WARRANTY & LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
Each Fluke product is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. The warranty period is one year and begins on the date of shipment. Parts, product repairs, and services are warranted for 90 days. This warranty extends only to the original buyer or end-user customer of a Fluke authorized reseller, and does not apply to fuses, disposable batteries, or to any product which, in
Fluke’s opinion, has been misused, altered, neglected, contaminated, or damaged by accident or abnormal conditions of operation or handling. Fluke warrants that software will operate substantially in accordance with its functional specifications for 90 days and that it has been properly recorded on non-defective media.
Fluke does not warrant that software will be error free or operate without interruption.
Fluke authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to end-user customers only but have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty on behalf of Fluke. Warranty support is available only if product is purchased through a Fluke authorized sales outlet or Buyer has paid the applicable international price. Fluke reserves the right to invoice Buyer for importation costs of repair/replacement parts when product purchased in one country is submitted for repair in another country.
Fluke’s warranty obligation is limited, at Fluke’s option, to refund of the purchase price, free of charge repair, or replacement of a defective product which is returned to a Fluke authorized service center within the warranty period.
To obtain warranty service, contact your nearest Fluke authorized service center to obtain return authorization information, then send the product to that service center, with a description of the difficulty, postage and insurance prepaid (FOB Destination). Fluke assumes no risk for damage in transit. Following warranty repair, the product will be returned to Buyer, transportation prepaid (FOB Destination). If Fluke determines that failure was caused by neglect, misuse, contamination, alteration, accident, or abnormal condition of operation or handling, including overvoltage failures caused by use outside the product’s specified rating, or normal wear and tear of mechanical components, Fluke will provide an estimate of repair costs and obtain authorization before commencing the work. Following repair, the product will be returned to the Buyer transportation prepaid and the Buyer will be billed for the repair and return transportation charges
(FOB Shipping Point).
THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. FLUKE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES,
INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA, ARISING FROM ANY CAUSE OR THEORY.
Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty, or exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, the limitations and exclusions of this warranty may not apply to every buyer. If any provision of this Warranty is held invalid or unenforceable by a court or other decision-maker of competent jurisdiction, such holding will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision.
Fluke Corporation
P.O. Box 9090
Everett, WA 98206-9090
U.S.A.
Fluke Europe B.V.
P.O. Box 1186
5602 BD Eindhoven
The Netherlands
11/99
Safety Information
This Calibrator complies with IEC publication 1010-1 (1992-1), Safety Requirements for
Electrical Measuring, Control and Laboratory Equipment, and ANSI/ISA-S82.01-1994, and CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1-92. This manual contains information, warnings, and cautions that must be followed to ensure safe operation and to maintain the Calibrator in a safe condition. Use of this Calibrator in a manner not specified herein may impair the protection provided by the Calibrator.
This Calibrator is designed for IEC 1010-1 Installation Category II use. It is not designed for connection to circuits rated over 4800 VA.
Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in personal injury or
loss of life.
Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to
equipment.
SYMBOLS MARKED ON THE CALIBRATOR
WARNING
Risk of electric shock. Refer to the manual (see the Index for references).
GROUND Ground terminal to chassis (earth).
Attention Refer to the manual (see the Index for references). This
symbol indicates that information about usage of a feature is contained in the manual.
AC POWER SOURCE
The Calibrator is intended to operate from an ac power source that will not apply more than 264V ac rms between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor and ground. A protective ground connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power cord is required for safe operation.
USE THE PROPER FUSE
To avoid fire hazard, use only the specified replacement fuse:
•
For 100 V or 120 V operation, use a 5A/250V time delay fuse (Fluke PN 109215).
•
For 220 V or 240 V operation, use a 2.5A/250V time delay fuse (Fluke PN 851931).
GROUNDING THE CALIBRATOR
The Calibrator uses controlled overvoltage techniques that require the Calibrator to be grounded whenever normal mode or common mode ac voltages or transient voltages may occur. The enclosure must be grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord, or through the rear panel CHASSIS GROUND binding post.
USE THE PROPER POWER CORD
Use only the power cord and connector appropriate for the voltage and plug configuration in your country.
Use only a power cord that is in good condition.
Refer power cord and connector changes to qualified service personnel.
DO NOT OPERATE IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES
To avoid explosion, do not operate the Calibrator in an atmosphere of explosive gas.
CHECK INSULATION RATINGS
Verify that the voltage applied to the unit under test does not exceed the insulation rating of the UUT and the interconnecting cables.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER DURING OPERATION
To avoid personal injury or death, do not remove the Calibrator cover without first removing the power source connected to the rear panel. Do not operate the Calibrator without the cover properly installed. Normal calibration is accomplished with the cover closed. Access procedures and the warnings for such procedures are contained in the
Service Manual. Service procedures are for qualified service personnel only.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPERATE IF PROTECTION MAY BE IMPAIRED
If the Calibrator appears damaged or operates abnormally, protection may be impaired. Do not attempt to operate the Calibrator under these conditions. Refer all questions of proper
Calibrator operation to qualified service personnel.
Table of Contents
Chapter
1
Title Page
Introduction and Specifications ........................................................ 1-1
1-9.
1-10.
1-11.
1-12.
1-13.
1-14.
1-15.
1-16.
1-1.
1-2.
Operation Overview.............................................................................. 1-4
1-3.
1-4.
Local Operation ................................................................................ 1-4
Remote Operation (RS-232) ............................................................. 1-4
1-5.
Remote Operation (IEEE-488) ......................................................... 1-4
1-6.
1-7.
How to Contact Fluke ........................................................................... 1-5
1-8.
General Specifications...................................................................... 1-7
DC Voltage Specifications ............................................................... 1-8
DC Current Specifications................................................................ 1-9
Resistance Specifications ................................................................. 1-11
AC Voltage (Sinewave) Specifications ............................................ 1-12
AC Current (Sinewave) Specifications............................................. 1-14
Capacitance Specifications ............................................................... 1-16
Temperature Calibration (Thermocouple) Specifications ................ 1-17
1-25.
1-26.
1-27.
1-28.
1-29.
1-30.
1-31.
1-32.
1-33.
1-34.
1-17.
1-18.
1-19.
1-20.
Temperature Calibration (RTD) Specifications................................ 1-18
DC Power Specification Summary................................................... 1-19
AC Power (45 Hz to 65 Hz) Specification Summary, PF=1 ............ 1-19
Power and Dual Output Limit Specifications................................... 1-20
1-21.
1-22.
Phase Specifications ......................................................................... 1-21
Calculating Power Uncertainty......................................................... 1-22
1-23.
Additional Specifications...................................................................... 1-23
1-24.
Frequency Specifications.................................................................. 1-23
Harmonics (2nd to 50th) Specifications ........................................... 1-24
AC Voltage (Sinewave) Extended Bandwidth Specifications.......... 1-25
AC Voltage (Non-Sinewave) Specifications .................................... 1-26
AC Voltage, DC Offset Specifications............................................. 1-27
AC Voltage, Squarewave Characteristics......................................... 1-28
AC Voltage, Trianglewave Characteristics (typical)........................ 1-28
AC Current (Sinewave) Extended Bandwidth Specifications .......... 1-28
AC Current (Non-Sinewave) Specifications .................................... 1-29
AC Current, Squarewave Characteristics (typical)........................... 1-31
AC Current, Trianglewave Characteristics (typical) ........................ 1-31
i
5520A
Service Manual
2
3
4
Theory of Operation ........................................................................... 2-1
2-1.
2-2.
Encoder Assembly (A2)........................................................................ 2-4
2-3.
Synthesized Impedance Assembly (A5) ............................................... 2-4
2-4.
DDS Assembly (A6) ............................................................................. 2-5
2-5.
Current Assembly (A7)......................................................................... 2-6
2-6.
Voltage Assembly (A8) ........................................................................ 2-7
2-7.
Main CPU Assembly (A9).................................................................... 2-8
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
Outguard Supplies ............................................................................ 2-8
Inguard Supplies............................................................................... 2-8
Calibration and Verification ............................................................... 3-1
3-1.
3-2.
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification.......................... 3-3
3-3.
3-4.
Starting Calibration .......................................................................... 3-5
3-5.
3-6.
3-7.
3-8.
DC Volts Calibration (NORMAL Output) ....................................... 3-6
DC Volts Calibration (30 Vdc and Above) ...................................... 3-7
AC Volts Calibration (NORMAL Output) ....................................... 3-8
Thermocouple Function Calibration................................................. 3-10
3-9.
3-10.
3-11.
3-12.
DC Current Calibration .................................................................... 3-11
AC Current Calibration .................................................................... 3-14
DC Volts Calibration (AUX Output)................................................ 3-20
AC Volts Calibration (AUX Output)................................................ 3-20
3-13.
3-14.
Resistance Calibration ...................................................................... 3-21
Capacitance Calibration.................................................................... 3-24
3-15.
Calibration Remote Commands ............................................................ 3-27
3-16.
Generating a Calibration Report ........................................................... 3-33
3-25.
3-26.
3-27.
3-28.
3-29.
3-30.
3-31.
3-32.
3-33.
3-34.
3-17.
Performance Verification Tests ............................................................ 3-34
3-18.
Zeroing the Calibrator ...................................................................... 3-34
3-19.
3-20.
Verifying DC Volts (NORMAL Output) ......................................... 3-35
Verifying DC Volts (AUX Output) .................................................. 3-36
3-21.
3-22.
3-23.
3-24.
Verifying DC Current....................................................................... 3-36
Verifying Resistance ........................................................................ 3-38
Verifying AC Voltage (NORMAL Output) ..................................... 3-40
Verifying AC Voltage (AUX Output) .............................................. 3-42
Verifying AC Current....................................................................... 3-43
Verifying Capacitance ...................................................................... 3-46
200
µ
F to 110 mF Capacitance Verification .................................... 3-47
Capacitance Measurement ................................................................ 3-47
Measurement Uncertainty................................................................. 3-51
Verifying Thermocouple Simulation (Sourcing).............................. 3-52
Verifying Thermocouple Measurement............................................ 3-52
Verifying Phase Accuracy, Volts and AUX Volts ........................... 3-53
Verifying Phase Accuracy, Volts and Current ................................. 3-54
Verifying Frequency Accuracy ........................................................ 3-55
Maintenance........................................................................................ 4-1
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
Removing Analog Modules.............................................................. 4-3
Removing the Main CPU (A9)......................................................... 4-3
ii
5
6
Contents
(continued)
4-5.
4-6.
4-7.
4-8.
Removing Rear Panel Assemblies.................................................... 4-4
Removing the Filter PCA (A12)....................................................... 4-4
Removing the Encoder (A2) and Display PCAs .............................. 4-4
Removing the Keyboard and Accessing the Output Block .............. 4-4
4-9.
4-10.
Running Diagnostics ........................................................................ 4-7
4-11.
Testing the Front Panel..................................................................... 4-7
4-12.
Complete List of Error Messages ......................................................... 4-8
List of Replaceable Parts ................................................................... 5-1
5-1.
5-2.
Oscilloscope Calibration Options ..................................................... 6-1
SC600 Option...................................................................................... 6-3
6-9.
6-10.
6-11.
6-12.
6-13.
6-14.
6-15.
6-16.
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
Volt Specifications ........................................................................... 6-6
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
Edge Specifications .......................................................................... 6-7
Leveled Sine Wave Specifications ................................................... 6-8
Time Marker Specifications ............................................................. 6-9
Wave Generator Specifications ........................................................ 6-9
Pulse Generator Specifications......................................................... 6-10
Trigger Signal Specifications (Pulse Function)................................ 6-10
Trigger Signal Specifications (Time Marker Function) ................... 6-10
Trigger Signal Specifications (Edge Function) ................................ 6-11
Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function) ..... 6-11
Trigger Signal Specifications ........................................................... 6-11
Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications............ 6-11
Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications ......... 6-11
6-17.
Overload Measurement Specifications ............................................. 6-12
6-18.
6-19.
6-20.
6-21.
6-22.
6-23.
6-24.
Leveled Sine Wave Mode ................................................................ 6-12
Time Marker Mode........................................................................... 6-13
Wave Generator Mode ..................................................................... 6-13
Input Impedance Mode (Resistance) ................................................ 6-13
6-25.
6-26.
Input Impedance Mode (Capacitance).............................................. 6-13
Overload Mode................................................................................. 6-13
6-27.
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification.......................... 6-15
6-28.
SC600 Calibration Setup ...................................................................... 6-17
6-29.
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions ........ 6-18
6-30.
Overview of HP3458A Operation .................................................... 6-18
6-31.
6-32.
Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave Measurements ................... 6-18
Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Gen Square Wave Measurements 6-20
6-33.
6-34.
6-35.
6-36.
6-37.
DC Voltage Calibration .................................................................... 6-21
AC Voltage Calibration .................................................................... 6-21
Wave Generator Calibration............................................................. 6-22
Edge Amplitude Calibration............................................................. 6-22
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration...................................... 6-23
iii
5520A
Service Manual
6-38.
6-39.
6-40.
6-41.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration.......................................... 6-24
Low Frequency Calibration.......................................................... 6-24
High Frequency Calibration ......................................................... 6-25
Pulse Width Calibration ................................................................... 6-25
6-42.
MeasZ Calibration ............................................................................ 6-26
6-43.
6-44.
6-45.
6-46.
6-47.
6-48.
6-49.
6-50.
6-51.
6-52.
6-53.
6-54.
6-55.
6-56.
6-57.
6-58.
6-59.
6-60.
6-61.
6-62.
6-63.
6-64.
6-65.
DC Voltage Verification................................................................... 6-29
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-29
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-29
AC Voltage Amplitude Verification................................................. 6-31
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-31
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-33
AC Voltage Frequency Verification................................................. 6-34
Edge Amplitude Verification............................................................ 6-35
Edge Frequency Verification............................................................ 6-35
Edge Duty Cycle Verification .......................................................... 6-36
Edge Rise Time Verification ............................................................ 6-36
Edge Abberation Verification........................................................... 6-38
Tunnel Diode Pulser Drive Amplitude Verification......................... 6-39
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification .................................... 6-39
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification..................................... 6-41
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification .................................... 6-42
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification ........................................ 6-44
Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness ............................ 6-44
Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness............................ 6-44
Low Frequency Verification ........................................................ 6-46
High Frequency Verification........................................................ 6-46
6-66.
6-67.
6-68.
6-69.
Time Marker Verification................................................................. 6-48
Wave Generator Verification............................................................ 6-49
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-50
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-50
Pulse Width Verification .................................................................. 6-53
6-70.
6-71.
6-72.
6-73.
Pulse Period Verification.................................................................. 6-54
MeasZ Resistance Verification......................................................... 6-54
MeasZ Capacitance Verification ...................................................... 6-55
Overload Function Verification........................................................ 6-56
6-74.
SC600 Hardware Adjustments.............................................................. 6-57
6-75.
Equipment Required ......................................................................... 6-57
6-76.
6-77.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function ..................................... 6-57
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-57
6-78.
6-79.
6-80.
6-81.
6-82.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave VCO Balance......................... 6-58
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics ............................. 6-58
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function............................. 6-59
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-60
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations ................................................... 6-60
SC300 Option...................................................................................... 6-63
6-83.
6-84.
6-85.
6-86.
Voltage Function Specifications....................................................... 6-66
6-87.
6-88.
6-89.
Edge Function Specifications ........................................................... 6-67
Leveled Sine Wave Function Specifications .................................... 6-68
Time Marker Function Specifications .............................................. 6-69
iv
Contents
(continued)
Index
6-90.
6-91.
Wave Generator Specifications ........................................................ 6-69
Trigger Signal Specifications for the Time Marker Function .......... 6-70
6-92.
Trigger Signal Specifications for the Edge Function ....................... 6-70
6-93.
6-94.
6-95.
6-96.
6-97.
Leveled Sine Wave Mode ................................................................ 6-71
Time Marker Mode........................................................................... 6-72
6-98.
Wave Generator Mode ..................................................................... 6-72
6-99.
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification.......................... 6-74
6-101. Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions ...................... 6-77
6-102.
Overview of HP3458A Operation .................................................... 6-77
6-103.
Setup for Square Wave Measurements............................................. 6-77
6-104.
DC Voltage Calibration .................................................................... 6-78
6-105.
AC Square Wave Voltage Calibration.............................................. 6-79
6-106.
Edge Amplitude Calibration............................................................. 6-80
6-107.
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration...................................... 6-80
6-108.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration.......................................... 6-81
6-109.
Low Frequency Calibration.......................................................... 6-82
6-110.
High Frequency Calibration ......................................................... 6-82
6-112.
DC Voltage Verification................................................................... 6-83
6-113.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-83
6-114.
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-83
6-115.
AC Voltage Amplitude Verification................................................. 6-86
6-116.
6-117.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-86
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-88
6-118.
AC Voltage Frequency Verification................................................. 6-89
6-119.
Edge Amplitude Verification............................................................ 6-90
6-120.
Edge Frequency Verification............................................................ 6-91
6-121.
Edge Duty Cycle Verification .......................................................... 6-92
6-122.
Edge Rise Time Verification ............................................................ 6-92
6-123.
Edge Abberation Verification........................................................... 6-94
6-124.
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification .................................... 6-95
6-125.
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification..................................... 6-96
6-126.
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification .................................... 6-97
6-127.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification ........................................ 6-99
6-128.
6-129.
6-130.
6-131.
Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness ............................ 6-99
Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness............................ 6-99
Low Frequency Verification ........................................................ 6-101
High Frequency Verification........................................................ 6-101
6-132.
Time Marker Verification................................................................. 6-103
6-133.
Wave Generator Verification............................................................ 6-104
6-134.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-105
6-135.
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-105
6-137.
Equipment Required ......................................................................... 6-107
6-138.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function ..................................... 6-108
6-139.
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-108
6-140.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics ............................. 6-108
6-141.
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function............................. 6-109
6-142.
6-143.
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-109
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations ................................................... 6-109
v
5520A
Service Manual
vi
List of Tables
Table Title Page
3-1.
Consolidated List of Required Equipment for Calibration and Verification.......... 3-3
3-2.
Test Equipment Required for Calibrating DC Volts .............................................. 3-6
3-3.
3-4.
Test Equipment Required for Calibrating AC Volts .............................................. 3-8
3-5.
3-6.
Test Equipment Required for Calibrating the Thermocouple Function ................. 3-10
3-7.
Calibration Steps for Thermocouple Measurement................................................ 3-10
3-8.
Test Equipment Required for Calibrating DC Current........................................... 3-12
3-9.
3-29. Test Equipment Required for High-value Capacitance Measurement ................... 3-48
4-1.
vii
5520A
Service Manual
5-2.
5-3.
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Time Marker Function) ......................................... 6-10
6-9.
6-10. Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function) ........................... 6-11
6-13. Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications ............................... 6-11
6-19. DC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
.......................................................................... 6-30
6-20. DC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
........................................................................... 6-31
6-21. AC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
.......................................................................... 6-32
6-22. AC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
........................................................................... 6-33
6-35. Wave Generator Verification at 1 M
Ω
................................................................... 6-51
6-36. Wave Generator Verification at 50
Ω
.................................................................... 6-52
6-42. AC Square Wave Voltage and Edge Settings for the HP3458A ............................ 6-77
6-43. DC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
.......................................................................... 6-84
6-44. DC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
........................................................................... 6-85
6-45. AC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
.......................................................................... 6-87
6-46. AC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
........................................................................... 6-88
viii
Contents
(continued)
6-58. Wave Generator Verification at 1 M
Ω
................................................................... 6-106
6-59. Wave Generator Verification at 50
Ω
.................................................................... 6-107
ix
5520A
Service Manual
x
List of Figures
Figure Title Page
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
3-1.
3-2.
Connections for Calibrating DC Volts 30 V and Above........................................ 3-8
3-3.
3-4.
Connections for Calibrating Thermocouple Sourcing............................................ 3-11
3-5.
Connections for Calibrating Thermocouple Measuring ......................................... 3-11
3-6.
3-7.
Connections for Calibrating AC Current with a Fluke A40 Shunt ........................ 3-14
3-8.
Connections for Calibrating AC Current with a Fluke A40A Shunt...................... 3-17
3-9.
3-17. Connections for Verifying AC Current with a Metal Film Resistor
4-1.
4-2.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
xi
5520A
Service Manual
6-1.
6-2.
Equipment Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave Measurements ...................... 6-19
6-3.
Equipment Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Gen Square Wave Measurements .. 6-20
6-4.
Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard . 6-24
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
6-9.
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification Setup................................................ 6-42
6-10. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard . 6-44
6-11. Connecting the HP 437B Power Meter to the HP 8482A or 8481D Power Sensor 6-45
6-12. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the HP Power Meter and Power Sensor 6-45
6-19. Equipment Setup for SC300 Square Wave Measurements .................................... 6-78
6-20. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard . 6-81
6-25. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard . 6-99
6-26. Connecting the HP 437B Power Meter to the HP 8482A or 8481D Power Sensor 6-100
6-27. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the HP Power Meter and Power Sensor 6-100
xii
Chapter 1
Introduction and Specifications
Title Page
1-9.
1-10.
1-11.
1-12.
1-13.
1-14.
1-15.
1-16.
1-1.
1-2.
Operation Overview.............................................................................. 1-4
1-3.
1-4.
Local Operation ................................................................................ 1-4
Remote Operation (RS-232) ............................................................. 1-4
1-5.
Remote Operation (IEEE-488) ......................................................... 1-4
1-6.
1-7.
How to Contact Fluke ........................................................................... 1-5
1-8.
General Specifications...................................................................... 1-7
DC Voltage Specifications ............................................................... 1-8
DC Current Specifications................................................................ 1-9
Resistance Specifications ................................................................. 1-11
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications .......................................... 1-12
AC Current (Sine Wave) Specifications........................................... 1-14
Capacitance Specifications ............................................................... 1-16
Temperature Calibration (Thermocouple) Specifications ................ 1-17
1-25.
1-26.
1-27.
1-28.
1-29.
1-30.
1-31.
1-32.
1-33.
1-34.
1-17.
1-18.
1-19.
1-20.
Temperature Calibration (RTD) Specifications................................ 1-18
DC Power Specification Summary................................................... 1-19
AC Power (45 Hz to 65 Hz) Specification Summary, PF=1 ............ 1-19
Power and Dual Output Limit Specifications................................... 1-20
1-21.
1-22.
Phase Specifications ......................................................................... 1-21
Calculating Power Uncertainty......................................................... 1-22
1-23.
Additional Specifications...................................................................... 1-23
1-24.
Frequency Specifications.................................................................. 1-23
Harmonics (2nd to 50th) Specifications ........................................... 1-24
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Extended Bandwidth Specifications........ 1-25
AC Voltage (Non-Sine Wave) Specifications .................................. 1-26
AC Voltage, DC Offset Specifications............................................. 1-27
AC Voltage, Square Wave Characteristics....................................... 1-28
AC Voltage, Triangle Wave Characteristics (typical) ...................... 1-28
AC Current (Sine Wave) Extended Bandwidth Specifications ........ 1-28
AC Current (Non-Sine Wave) Specifications .................................. 1-29
AC Current, Square Wave Characteristics (typical)......................... 1-31
AC Current, Triangle Wave Characteristics (typical) ...................... 1-31
1-1
5520A
Service Manual
1-2
Introduction and Specifications
Introduction
1
1-1. Introduction
The Fluke Model 5520A Multi-Product Calibrator (Figure 1-1) is a precise instrument that calibrates a wide variety of electrical measuring instruments. With the 5520A
Calibrator, you can calibrate precision multimeters that measure ac or dc voltage, ac or dc current, ac or dc power, resistance, capacitance, and temperature. The 5520A can display pressure measurements when used with a Fluke 700 Series Pressure Module. With the
SC600 and SC300 Oscilloscope Calibration options, you can use the 5520A Calibrator to calibrate analog and digital oscilloscopes. Specifications are provided in this chapter
(specifications for the oscilloscope calibration options are provided in Chapter 6).
XW
Warning
If the 5520A Calibrator is operated in any way not specified by this manual or other documentation provided by Fluke, the protection provided by the Calibrator may be impaired.
5520A
CALIBRATOR
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
LO
TRIG
GUARD
20A
20V PK MAX
TC 20V PK MAX
+
STBY
/
7
4
1
OPR
8
EARTH
EXGRD
SCOPE
9
µ m dBm
V
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
2
5
6
3 n k p
M
W
A
¡F
¡C
F
0
•
SHIFT
ENTER
SETUP
RESET
NEW
REF
CE
MEAS
TC
MORE
MODES
MULT x
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
Figure 1-1. 5520A Multi-Product Calibrator
yg030f.eps
1-3
5520A
Service Manual
1-2. Operation Overview
The 5520A Calibrator may be operated at the front panel in the local mode, or remotely using RS-232 or IEEE-488 ports. For remote operations, several software options are available to integrate 5520A operation into a wide variety of calibration requirements.
Typical local operations include front panel connections to the Unit Under Test (UUT), and then manual keystroke entries at the front panel to place the calibrator in the desired output mode. The front panel layout facilitates hand movements from left to right, and multiply and divide keys make it easy to step up or down at the press of a single key. You can also review 5520A Calibrator specifications at the push of two keys.
1-4. Remote Operation (RS-232)
There are two rear-panel serial data RS-232 ports: SERIAL 1 FROM HOST, and
SERIAL 2 TO UUT (Figure 1-2). Each port is dedicated to serial data communications for operating and controlling the 5520A during calibration procedures. For complete information on remote operation, see Chapter 5 of the 5520A Operators Manual.
The SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial data port connects a host terminal or personal computer to the 5520A. You have several choices for sending commands to the 5520A: you can enter commands from a terminal (or a PC running a terminal program), you can write your own programs using BASIC, or you can run optional Windows-based software such as 5500/CAL or MET/CAL. The 5500/CAL software includes more than 200 example procedures covering a wide range of test tools the 5520A can calibrate.
The SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial data port connects a UUT to a PC or terminal via the
5520A (see Figure 1-3). This “pass-through” configuration eliminates the requirement for two COM ports at the PC or terminal. A set of four commands control the operation of the SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port. See Chapter 6 of the 5520A Operators Manual for a discussion of the UUT_* commands. The SERIAL 2 TO UUT port is also used to connect to the Fluke 700 series pressure modules.
1-5. Remote Operation (IEEE-488)
The 5520A rear panel IEEE-488 port is a fully programmable parallel interface bus meeting standard IEEE-488.1 and supplemental standard IEEE-488.2. Under the remote control of an instrument controller, the 5520A Calibrator operates exclusively as a
“talker/listener.” You can write your own programs using the IEEE-488 command set or run the optional Windows-based MET/CAL software. (See the 5520A Operators Manual for a discussion of the general commands available for IEEE-488 operation, and
Chapter 3 of this manual for remote commands used for 5520A calibration.)
1-4
SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port
Introduction and Specifications
Service Information
1
COM port
5520A
SERIAL 2
TO UUT port
RS-232 Remote Operation using the
SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port
SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port
COM port
PC or Terminal
PC or Terminal
5520A
Unit Under Test
RS-232 Remote Operation using the
SERIAL 1 FROM HOST and
SERIAL 2 TO UUT ports
nn031f.eps
Figure 1-2. RS-232 Remote Connections
1-6. Service Information
In case of difficulty within the 1-year Warranty period, return the Calibrator to a Fluke
Service Center for Warranty repair. For out of Warranty repair, contact a Fluke Service
Center for a cost estimate.
This service manual provides instructions for verification of performance, calibration, and maintenance. If you choose to repair a malfunction, information in this manual can help you to determine which module (printed circuit assembly) has a fault.
1-7. How to Contact Fluke
To contact Fluke, call one of the following telephone numbers:
•
1-888-99FLUKE (1-888-993-5853) in U.S.A.
•
1-800-36-FLUKE (1-800-363-5853) in Canada
•
+31-402-678-200 in Europe
•
+81-3-3434-0181 Japan
•
+65-738-5655 Singapore
•
+1-425-446-5500 from other countries
Or, visit Fluke’s Web site at www.fluke.com
.
1-5
5520A
Service Manual
1-8. Specifications
The following tables list the 5520A specifications. All specifications are valid after allowing a warm-up period of 30 minutes, or twice the time the 5520A has been turned off. (For example, if the 5520A has been turned off for 5 minutes, the warm-up period is
10 minutes.)
All specifications apply for the temperature and time period indicated. For temperatures outside of t cal
±
5
°
C (t cal
is the ambient temperature when the 5520A was calibrated), the temperature coefficient as stated in the General Specifications must be applied.
The specifications also assume the Calibrator is zeroed every seven days or whenever the ambient temperature changes more than 5
°
C. The tightest ohms specifications are maintained with a zero cal every 12 hours within
±
1
°
C of use.
Also see additional specifications later in this chapter for information on extended specifications for ac voltage and current. The dimensional outline for the 5520A
Calibrator is shown in Figure 1-3.
43.2 cm (17 in)
5520A CALIBRATOR
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
LO
TRIG
GUARD 20A
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX
STBY
7
4
1
OPR
8
EARTH EXGRD SCOPE
9
µ m dBm
V
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
5
2
6
3 n k p
M
W
A
¡F
¡C
F
+
/ 0 • SHIFT ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
CE
MEAS
TC
MORE
MODES
MULT x
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
17.8 cm
(7 in)
47.0 cm (18.5 in) 6.4 cm
(2.5 in)
For Cable
Access
Figure 1-3. 5520A Calibrator Dimensional Outline
nn032f.eps
1-6
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
1
Warmup Time
Settling Time
Standard Interfaces
Temperature Performance
Temperature Coefficient
Relative Humidity [1]
Altitude
Safety
Analog Low Isolation
EMC
Line Power [2]
Power Consumption
Dimensions
Weight (without options)
Absolute Uncertainty Definition
Twice the time since last warmed up, to a maximum of 30 minutes.
Less than 5 seconds for all functions and ranges except as noted.
IEEE-488 (GPIB), RS-232, 5725A Amplifier
•
Operating: 0 °C to 50 °C
•
Calibration (tcal): 15 °C to 35 °C
•
Storage: -20 °C to 70 °C [3]
Temperature Coefficient for temperatures outside tcal +
5
°C is 0.1X/°C of the 90-day specification (or 1-year, as applicable) per °C.
•
Operating: <80% to 30 °C, <70% to 40 °C, <40% to 50 °C
•
Storage: <95%, non-condensing
•
Operating: 3,050 m (10,000 ft) maximum
•
Non-operating: 12,200 m (40,000 ft) maximum
Complies with IEC 1010-1 (1992-1); ANSI/ISA-S82.01-1994;
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1-92
20 V
Designed to comply with FCC Rules Part 15; VFG 243/1991. If used in areas with Electromagnetic fields of 1 to 3 V/m, resistance outputs have a floor adder of 0.508 •. Performance not specified above 3 V/m. This instrument may be susceptible to electro-static discharge (ESD) from direct contact to the binding posts. Good static aware practices should be followed when handling this and other pieces of electronic equipment.
•
Line Voltage (selectable): 100 V, 120 V, 220 V, 240 V
•
Line Frequency: 47 Hz to 63 Hz
•
Line Voltage Variation: ±10% about line voltage setting
5500A Calibrator, 300 VA; 5725A Amplifier, 750 VA
5500A Calibrator:
•
Height: 17.8 cm (7 inches), standard rack increment, plus 1.5 cm (0.6
inch) for feet on bottom of unit;
•
Width: 43.2 cm (17 inches), standard rack width
•
Depth: 47.3 cm (18.6 inches) overall 5725A Amplifier:
•
Height, 13.3 cm (5.25 inches), standard rack increment, plus 1.5 cm (0.6
inch) for feet on bottom of unit;
•
Width, 43.2 cm (17 inches), standard rack width
•
Depth, 63.0 cm (24.8 inches) overall.
5500A Calibrator, 22 kg (49 lb); 5725A Amplifier 32 kg (70 pounds)
The 5500A specifications include stability, temperature coefficient, linearity, line and load regulation, and the traceability of the external standards used for calibration. You do not need to add anything to determine the total specification of the 5520A for the temperature range indicated.
99%
Specification Confidence
Interval
[1] After long periods of storage at high humidity, a drying out period (with the power on) of at least one week may be required.
[2] For optimal performance at full dual outputs (e.g. 1000 V, 20A) choose a line voltage setting that is
±
7.5% from nominal.
[3] The DC Current ranges 0 to 1.09999 A and 1.1 A to 2.99999 A are sensitive to storage temperatures above 50 °C.
If the 5520A is stored above 50 °C for greater than 30 minutes, these ranges must be re-calibrated. Otherwise, the
90 day and 1 year uncertainties of these ranges double.
1-7
5520A
Service Manual
1-10. DC Voltage Specifications
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
±
(ppm of output
+ µ
V)
Stability
Resolution
Max
Burden
Range 90 days
0 to 329.9999 mV
0 to 3.299999 V
15
+
1
9
+
2
0 to 32.99999 V 10
+
20
30 V to 329.9999 V 15
+
150
100 V to 1000.000 V 15
+
1500
1 year
20
+
1
11
+
2
12
+
20
18
+
150
18
+
1500
0.1
1
10
100
µ
1000
V
50
[1]
Ω
10 mA
10 mA
5 mA
5 mA
Auxiliary Output (dual output mode only) [2]
0 to 329.999 mV
0.33V to 3.29999V
3.3 V to 7 V
300
+
350
300
+
350
300
+
350
400
400
400
+
+
+
350
350
350
30
30
30
+
+
+
100
100
100
1
10
100
TC Simulate and Measure in Linear 10
µ
V/
°
C and 1 mV/
°
C modes [3]
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA
0 to 329.999 mV 40
+
3 50
+
3 5
+
2 0.1
10
Ω
[1] Remote sensing is not provided. Output resistance is
<
5 m
Ω
for outputs
≥
0.33 V. The AUX output has an output resistance of
<
1
Ω
. TC simulation has an output impedance of 10
Ω ±
1
Ω
.
[2] Two channels of dc voltage output are provided.
24 hours,
±
1
°
C
±
(ppm output
+ µ
V)
3
+
1
2
+
1.5
2
+
15
2.5
+
100
3
+
300
[3] TC simulating and measuring are not specified for operation in electromagnetic fields above 0.4 V/m.
Noise
Range
0 to 329.9999 mV
0 to 3.299999 V
0 to 32.99999 V
30 to 329.9999 V
100 to 1000.000 V
Bandwidth 0.1 Hz to
10 Hz p-p
±
(ppm output
+
floor)
0
+
1
µ
V
0
+
10
µ
V
0
+
100
µ
V
10
+
1 mV
10
+
5 mV
Bandwidth 10 Hz to 10 kHz
0 to 329.999 mV
0.33 V to
3.29.999 V
3.3 V to 7 V
Auxiliary Output (dual output mode only) [1]
0
0
+
+
5
µ
20
V
µ
V
0
+
100
µ
V
[1]
Two channels of dc voltage output are provided.
rms
6
µ
V
60
µ
V
600
µ
V
20 mV
20 mV
20
µ
200
V
µ
1000
V
µ
V
1-8
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
1
1-11. DC Current Specifications
Range
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
±
(ppm of output
+ µ
A)
90 days 1 year
Resolution
Max
Compliance
Voltage
V
Max
Inductive
Load mH
0 to 329.999 mA
0 to 3.29999 mA
0 to 32.9999 mA
0 to 329.999 mA
0 to 1.09999 A
120
+
0.02
80
+
0.05
80
+
0.25
80
+
2.5
160 + 40
150
+
0.02
100
+
0.05
100
+
0.25
100
+
2.5
200
+
40
380
+
40
1 nA
0.01 mA
0.1 mA
1 mA
10 mA
10
10
7
7
6
400
1.1 to 2.99999 A
0 to 10.9999 A
(20 A Range)
11 to 20.5 A [1]
300 + 40
380
800
+
+
500
750 [2]
500
+
500
1000
+
750
[2]
10 mA
100 mA
100 mA
6
4
4
[1] Duty Cycle: Currents
<
11 A may be provided continuously. For currents
>
11 A, see Figure 1-4. The current may be provided 60-T-
I
minutes any 60 minute period where T is the temperature in °C (room temperature is about 23
°
C) and
I
is the output current in amperes. For example, 17 A, at 23
°
C could be provided for 60-17-23 = 20 minutes each hour.
[2] Floor specification is 1500
µ
A within 30 seconds of selecting operate. For operating times
>
30 seconds, the floor specification is 750
µ
A.
Noise
Range
0 to 329.999
µ
A
0 to 3.29999 mA
0 to 32.9999 mA
0 to 329.999 mA
0 to 2.99999 A
0 to 20.5 A
Bandwidth
0.1 Hz to 10 Hz p-p
2 nA
20 nA
200 nA
2000 nA
20
µ
A
200
µ
A
Bandwidth
10 Hz to 10 kHz rms
20 nA
200 nA
2.0
µ
A
20
µ
A
1 mA
10 mA
1-9
5520A
Service Manual
DC Current Specifications (cont)
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
11 12
40
°
C
30
°
C
20
°
C
10
°
C
Ambient
0
°
C
13 14 15 16
Current (Amps)
17 18
Figure 1-4. Allowable Duration of Current > 11 A
19 20
40%
30%
20%
80%
70%
60%
50%
10%
0% nn326f.eps
1-10
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
1
Range
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
±
(ppm of output
+
floor) [2]
[1] ppm of output
Floor
Time & temp since ohms zero
90 days 1 year 12 hrs
±
1
°
C
0 to
10.9999
Ω
11
Ω
to
32.9999
Ω
33
Ω to
109.9999
Ω
110
Ω to
329.9999
Ω
330
Ω
to
1.099999 k
Ω
1.1 k
Ω
to
3.299999 k
Ω
3.3 k
Ω to
10.99999 k
Ω
11 k
Ω to
32.99999 k
Ω
33 k
Ω to
109.9999 k
Ω
110 k
Ω to
329.9999 k
Ω
330 k
Ω
to
1.099999 M
Ω
1.1 M
Ω to
3.299999 M
Ω
3.3 M
Ω to
10.99999 M
Ω
11 M
Ω to
32.99999 M
Ω
33 M
Ω to
109.9999 M
Ω
110 M
Ω to
329.9999 M
Ω
330 M
Ω to
1100 M
Ω
35
25
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
25
25
40
110
200
400
2500
12000
40
30
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
32
32
60
130
250
500
3000
15000
[1] Continuously variable from 0
Ω to 1.1 G
Ω
.
0.001
0.0015
0.0014
0.002
0.002
0.02
0.02
0.2
0.2
2
2
30
50
2500
3000
100000
500000
cal
7 days
0. 01
±
0.015
0.015
0.02
0.02
0.2
0.1
1
1
10
10
150
250
2500
3000
5
100000
500000
°
C
Resolution
0.0001
0.0001
0.0001
0.0001
0.001
0.001
0.01
0.01
0. 1
0.1
1
1
10
10
100
1000
Ω
10000
100
100
10
10
1
1
µ
µ
µ
µ
Allowable
Current [3]
1 mA to 125 mA
1 mA to 125 mA
1 mA to 70 mA
1 mA to 40 mA
1 mA to 18 mA
µ
µ
A to 5 mA
A to 1.8 mA
A to 0.5 mA
A to 0.18 mA
A to 0.05 mA
A to 0.018 mA
250 nA to 5
µ
250 nA to 1.8
1 nA to 13 nA
A
µ
2.5 nA to 50 nA
A
25 nA to 500 nA
25 nA to 180 nA
[2] Applies for a 4-WIRE compensation only. For 2-WIRE and 2-WIRE COMP, add 5 µV per Amp of stimulus current to the floor specification. For example, in 2-WIRE mode, at 1 k e
, the floor specification within 12 hours of an ohms zero cal for a measurement current of 1 mA is:
0.002 e
+ 5 µV/1 ma = (0.002 + 0.005) e
= 0.007 e
[3] For currents lower than shown, the floor adder increases by:
Floor (new) = Floor (old) XImin/Iactual.
For example, a 50 µA stimulus measuring 100 e
, has a floor specification of: 0.0014 e
X 1 mA/50 µA = 0.028 e
, assuming an ohms zero cal within 12 hours.
1-11
5520A
Service Manual
1-13. AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications
NORMAL (Normal Output)
Range Frequency
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
± 5 °C
± (ppm of output + µV)
Resolution
Max
Burden
Max Distortion and Noise
10 Hz to 5 MHz
Bandwidth
90 days 1 year
1.0 mV to
32.999 mV
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 10 kHz
10 kHz to 20 kHz
600
+ 6
120
+ 6
160
+ 6
20 kHz to 50 kHz 800
+ 6
50 kHz to 100 kHz 3000
+ 12
100 kHz to 6000
+ 50
500 kHz
33 mV to
329.999 mV
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 10 kHz
250
+ 8
140
+ 8
10 kHz to 20 kHz
20 kHz to 50 kHz
150
+ 8
300
+ 8
50 kHz to 100 kHz 600
+ 32
100 kHz to 1600
+ 70
500 kHz
0.33 V to
3.29999 V
3.3 V to
32.9999 V
33 V to
329.999 V
330 V to
1020 V
800
150
200
1000
+ 6
3500
+ 12
8000
300
145
+ 6
+ 6
+ 6
+ 50
+ 8
+ 8
160
+ 8
350
+ 8
800
+ 32
2000
+ 70
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 10 kHz
10 kHz to 20 kHz
20 kHz to 50 kHz
250
+ 50
140
+ 60
160
+ 60
250
+ 50
50 kHz to 100 kHz 550
+ 125
100 kHz to 2000
+ 600
500 kHz
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 10 kHz
10 kHz to 20 kHz
20 kHz to 50 kHz
250
+ 650
125
+ 600
220
+ 600
300
+ 600
50 kHz to 100 kHz 750
+ 1600
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 10 kHz
10 kHz to 20 kHz
20 kHz to 50 kHz
150
+ 2000
160
+ 6000
220
+ 6000
240
+ 6000
50 kHz to 100 kHz 1600
+
50000
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 5 kHz
5 kHz to 10 kHz
300
150
190
300
700
+ 50
+ 60
+ 60
+ 50
+ 125
2400
+ 600
300
+ 650
150
+ 600
240
+ 600
350
+ 600
900
+ 1600
190
+ 2000
200
+ 6000
250
+ 6000
300
+ 6000
2000
+
50000
250
+ 10000
300
+
10000
200
+ 10000
250
+
10000
250
+ 10000
300
+
10000
1
1
10
µV
µV
100
µV
µV
1 mV
10 mV
50
50
Ω
Ω
10 mA
10 mA
5 mA,
2 mA, except
6 mA for
45 Hz to
65 Hz
± (% output +
floor)
0.15
+ 90 µV
0.035
+ 90 µV
0.06
+ 90 µV
0.15
+ 90 µV
0.25
+ 90 µV
0.3
+ 90 µV [1]
0.15
+ 90 µV
0.035
+ 90 µV
0.06
+ 90 µV
0.15
+ 90 µV
0.20
+ 90 µV
0.20
+ 90 µV [1]
0.15
0.035
+ 200 µV
0.06
+ 200 µV
0.15
+ 200 µV
0.20
+ 200 µV
0.20
+ 200 µV [1]
0.15
+ 200 µV
+ 2 mV
0.035
+ 2 mV
0.08
+ 2 mV
0.2
+ 2 mV
0.5
+ 2 mV
0.15
+ 10 mV except 0.05
+ 10 mV
20 mA for 0.6
+ 10 mV
45 Hz to 0.8
+ 10 mV
65 Hz 1.0
+ 10 mV
0.15
0.07
0.07
+ 30 mV
+ 30 mV
+ 30 mV
[1] Max Distortion for 100 kHz to 200 kHz. For 200 kHz to 500 kHz, the maximum distortion is 0.9% of
output + floor as shown.
Note
•
Remote sensing is not provided. Output resistance is
< 5 mΩ for outputs ≥0.33 V. The AUX output resistance is
< 1Ω. The maximum load capacitance is 500 pF, subject to the maximum burden current limits.
1-12
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
1
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications (cont)
AUX (Auxiliary Output) [dual output mode only] [1]
Range Frequency
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
± 5 °C
± (% of output + µV)
Resolution
Max
Burden
Max Distortion and Noise
10 Hz to
100 kHz
Bandwidth
90 days 1 year
10 mV to
329.999 mV
0.33 V to
3.29999 V
10 Hz to 20 Hz
20 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 5 kHz
5 kHz to 10 kHz
10 Hz to 30 kHz
10 Hz to 20 Hz
20 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 5 kHz
5 kHz to 10 kHz
0.15
0.08
0.08
0.15
0.3
+ 370
+ 370
+ 370
+ 450
+ 450
4.0 + 900
0.2
+ 370
0.1
+ 370
0.1
+ 370
0.2
+ 450
0.4
+ 450
5.0
+ 900
0.15
0.08
0.07
+ 450
+ 450
+ 450
0.2
+ 450
0.1
+ 450
0.09
+
450
0.15
+ 1400
0.2
+
0.3
+ 1400
1400
0.4
+
1400
10 kHz to 30 kHz 4.0
+ 2800
5.0
+
2800
3.3 V to 5 V 10 Hz to 20 Hz
20 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.15
0.08
0.07
+ 450
+ 450
+ 450
0.2
+ 450
0.1
+ 450
0.09
+
450
1 kHz to 5 kHz 0.15
+ 1400
0.2
+
1400
5 kHz to 10 kHz 0.3
+1400
0.4
+
1400
1
10
µV
100
µV
µV
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA
± (% output +
floor)
0.2
+ 200 µV
0.06
+ 200 µV
0.08
+ 200 µV
0.3
+ 200 µV
0.6
+ 200 µV
1
+ 200 µV
0.2
+ 200 µV
0.06
+ 200 µV
0.08
+ 200 µV
0.3
0.6
1
+ 200 µV
0.2
0.3
0.6
+ 200 µV
+ 200 µV
+ 200 µV
0.06
0.08
+ 200 µV
+ 200 µV
+ 200 µV
+ 200 µV
[1] There are two channels of voltage output. The maximum frequency of the dual output is 30 kHz.
Note
• Remote sensing is not provided. Output resistance is < 5 mΩ for outputs ≥0.33 V. The AUX output resistance is
< 1Ω. The maximum load capacitance is 500 pF, subject to the maximum burden current limits.
1-13
5520A
Service Manual
1-14. AC Current (Sine Wave) Specifications
LCOMP off
Range Frequency
Absolute Uncertainty,
±
tcal
±
5
°
C
(% of output
+ µ
A)
Compliance adder
±
(
µ
A/V)
90 days 1 year
29.00
µ
A to
329.99
µ
A
10 Hz to 20 Hz
20 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 5 kHz
0.16
+
0.1
0.12
+
0.1
0.2
+
0.1
0.15
+
0.1
0.1
+
0.1
0.125
+
0.1
0.25
+
0.15
0.3
+
0.15
5 kHz to 10 kHz 0.6
+
0.2
10 kHz to 30 1.2
+
0.4
kHz
0.8
+
0.2
1.6
+
0.4
0.33 mA to
3.2999 mA
10 Hz to 20 Hz
20 Hz to 45 Hz
0.05
0.05
0.05
1.5
1.5
10
0.16
+
0.15
0.2
+
0.15
0.1
+
0.15
0.05
0.125
+
0.15
0.05
0.08
+
0.15
0.1
+
0.15
0.05
0.2
+
0.2
0.5
+
0.3
1.0
+
0.6
1.5
1.5
10
3.3 mA to
32.999 mA
33 mA to
329.99 mA
0.33 A to
1.09999 A
1.1 A to
2.99999 A
3 A to
10.9999 A
11A to
20.5 A
[2]
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 5 kHz 0.16
+
0.2
5 kHz to 10 kHz 0.4
+
0.3
10 kHz to 30 0.8
+
0.6
kHz
10 Hz to 20 Hz
20 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 5 kHz
5 kHz to 10 kHz 0.16
+
3
10 kHz to 30 0.32
+
4 kHz
0.15
+
2
0.075
+
2
0.035
+
2
0.065
+
2
0.18
0.09
0.04
0.08
0.2
0.4
+
+
+
+
+
+
3
4
2
2
2
2
10 Hz to 20 Hz
20 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 5 kHz 0.10
+
50
5 kHz to 10 kHz 0.16
+
100 0.2
+
100
10 kHz to 30 0.32
+
200 0.4
+
200 kHz
0.15
+
20 0.18
+
20
0.075
+
20 0.09
+
20
0.035
+
20 0.04
+
20
0.08
+
50
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 5 kHz
0.15
+
100 0.18
+
100
0.036
+
100 0.05
+
100
0.5
+
1000 0.6
+
1000
5 kHz to 10 kHz 2.0
+
5000 2.5
+
5000
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.15
+
100 0.18
+
100
0.05
+
100 0.06
+
100
1 kHz to 5 kHz 0.5
+
1000 0.6
+
1000
5 kHz to 10 kHz 2.0
+
5000 2.5
+
5000
45 Hz to 100 Hz 0.05
+
2000 0.06
+
2000
100 kHz to 1 0.08
+
2000 0.10
+
2000 kHz
1 kHz to 5 kHz 2.5
+
2000 3.0
+
2000
45 Hz to 100 Hz 0.1
+
5000 0.12
+
5000
100 Hz to 1 kHz 0.13
+
5000 0.15
+
5000
1 kHz to 5 kHz 2.5
+
5000 3.0
+
5000
0.05
0.05
0.05
1.5
1.5
10
0.05
0.05
0.05
1.5
1.5
10
[3]
[4]
[3]
[4]
Max
Distortion &
Noise 10 Hz to 100 kHz
BW
±
(% output
+
0.15
+
0.5
µ
A
0.1
+
0.5
µ
A
0.05
+
0.5
µ
A
0.5
+
0.5
µ
A
1.0
+
0.5
µ
A
1.2
+
0.5
µ
A
0.15
0.06
0.02
0.5
1.0
1.2
0.15
0.05
0.07
0.3
0.7
1.0
0.15
0.05
0.02
0.03
0.1
0.6
0.2
0.07
1
2
+
+
50
50
50
50
50
50
500
500
0.2
1
2
+
+
500
500
0.2
0.1
floor)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
0.07
+
+
+
+
+
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.5
+
+
+
5
5
5
5
5
µ
µ
0.5
+
+
+
+
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
A
A
µ
µ
500
+
+
µ
A
A
A
µ
µ
µ
µ
A
A
µ
500
µ
µ
500
A
A
µ
500
µ
µ
A
A
3 mA
3 mA
0.8
+
3 mA
0.2
+
3 mA
0.1
+
3 mA
0.8
+
3 mA
µ
µ
µ
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
µ
A
µ
A
A
A
A
A
Max
Inductive
Load
µ
H
200
200
50
50
2.5
2.5
1
1
[1] Max Distortion for 100 kHz to 200 kHz. For 200 kHz to 500 kHz, the maximum distortion is 0.9% of
output + floor as shown.
[2] Duty Cycle: Currents < 11 A may be provided continuously. For currents > 11 A, see Figure 1-4. The
current may be provided 60-T-I minutes any 60 minute period where T is the temperature in °C (room
temperature is about 23
°
C) and I is the output current in Amps. For example, 17 A, at 23
°
C could be
provided for 60-17-23 = 20 minutes each hour.
[3] For compliance voltages greater than 1 V, add 1 mA/V to the floor specification from 1 kHz to 5 kHz.
[4] For compliance voltages greater than 1 V, add 5 mA/V to the floor specification from 5 kHz to 10 kHz.
1-14
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
1
AC Current (Sine Wave) Specifications (cont)
LCOMP on
Range
29.00
µ
329.99
A to
µ
33 mA to
0.33 A to
A
0.33 mA to
3.2999 mA
3.3 mA to
32.999 mA
329.99 mA
2.99999 A
3 A to 20.5 A
Frequency
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
(% of output
90 days
°
C
+ µ
A)
1 year
10 Hz to 100 Hz 0.2
+
0.2
100 Hz to 1 kHz 0.5
+
0.5
10 Hz to 100 Hz 0.2
+
0.3
100 Hz to 1 kHz 0.5
+
0.8
10 Hz to 100 Hz 0.07
+
4
100 Hz to 1 kHz 0.18
+
10
10 Hz to 100 Hz 0.07
+
40
100 Hz to 1 kHz 0.18
+
100
0.25
0.6
0.6
0.2
0.2
+
0.25
+
0.08
+
0.08
+
+
0.2
0.5
+
0.3
0.8
+
4
10
+
40
100
10 Hz to 100 Hz 0.1
+
200
100 to 440 Hz 0.25
+
1000
0.12
0.3
+
+
200
1000
10 Hz to 100 Hz 0.1
+
2000 [2] 0.12
+
2000
[2]
±
5
Max Distortion
& Noise, 10 Hz to 100 kHz BW
±
(% output
+
µ
A)
0.1
+
1.0
0.05
+
1.0
0.15
+
1.5
0.06
+
1.5
0.15
+
5
0.05
+
5
0.15
+
50
0.05
0.2
+
0.25
0.1
+
+
50
500
+
0
500
Max
Inductive
Load
µ
H
400
400 [4]
[1] 100 Hz to 1 kHz 0.8
+
5000 [3] 1.0
+
5000 [3] 0.5
+
0
[1] Duty Cycle: Currents < 11 A may be provided continuously. For currents >11 A, see Figure 1-4. The current may be provided 60-T-I minutes any 60 minute period where T is the temperature in
°
C (room temperature is about 23
°
C) and I is the output current in amperes. For example, 17 A, at 23
°
C could be provided for 60-17-23 = 20 minutes each hour.
[2] For currents >11 A, Floor specification is 4000
µ
A within 30 seconds of selecting operate. For operating times >30 seconds, the floor specification is 2000
µ
A.
[3] For currents >11 A, Floor specification is 1000
µ
A within 30 seconds of selecting operate. For operating times >30 seconds, the floor specification is 5000
µ
A.
[4] Subject to compliance voltages limits.
Range
0.029 mA to 0.32999 mA
Resolution
µ
A
0.01
Max Compliance Voltage
0.33 mA to 3.29999 mA
3.3 mA to 32.9999 mA
33 mA to 329.999 mA
0.33 A to 2.99999 A
0.01
0.1
1
10
3 A to 20.5 A 100
[1] Subject to specification adder for compliance voltages greater than 1 V rms.
V rms
7
7
5
5
4
3
1-15
5520A
Service Manual
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
±
(% of output
+
floor)
Allowed Frequency or
Charge-Discharge Rate
Range
90 days 1 year
Resolution
0.1 pF
Min and Max to Meet
Specification
Typical
Max for
<
0.5%
Error
10 Hz to 10 kHz 20 kHz 0.19 nF to
0.3999 nF
0.4 nF to
1.0999 nF
1.1 nF to
3.2999 nF
3.3 nF to
10.9999 nF
11 nF to
32.9999 nF
33 nF to
109.999 nF
110 nF to
329.999 nF
0.33
µ
F to
1.09999
µ
F
1.1
µ
F to
3.29999
µ
F
3.3
µ
F to
10.9999
µ
F
11
µ
F to
32.9999
µ
F
33
µ
F to
109.999
µ
F
110
µ
F to
329.999
µ
F
0.33
µ
F to
1.09999mF
1.1 mF to
3.2999 mF
3.3 mF to
10.9999 mF
11 mF to
32.9999 mF
33 mF to
110 mF
Notes:
0.38
0.38
0.38
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.30
0.34
0.34
0.34
0.34
0.34
0.7
1.0
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
0.01 nF
0.01 nF
0.01 nF
0.01 nF
0.1 nF
0.1 nF
0.3 nF
1 nF
3 nF
10 nF
30 nF
100 nF
300 nF
1
3
30
µ
µ
10
µ
100
F
F
µ
F
µ
F
F
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.40
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.75
1.1
+
+
+
+
0.01 nF
0.01 nF
0.01 nF
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
0.01 nF
0.1 nF
0.1 nF
0.3 nF
1 nF
3 nF
10 nF
30 nF
100 nF
300 nF
1
3
µ
µ
10
30
100
F
F
µ
µ
µ
F
F
F
0.1 pF
0.1 pF
0.1 pF
0.1 pF
1 pF
1 pF
10 pF
10 pF
100 pF
100 pF
1 nF
1 nF
10 nF
10 nF
100 nF
100 nF
10
µ
F
1. The output is continuously variable from 190 pF to 110 mF.
10 Hz to 10 kHz
10 Hz to 3 kHz
10 Hz to 1 kHz
10 Hz to 1 kHz
10 Hz to 1 kHz
10 Hz to 1 kHz
10 Hz to 600 Hz
10 Hz to 300 Hz
10 Hz to 150 Hz
10 Hz to 120 Hz
10 Hz to 80 Hz
0 to 50 Hz
0 to 20 Hz
0 to 6 Hz
0 to 2 Hz
0 to 0.6 Hz
0 to 0.2 Hz
30 kHz
30 kHz
20 kHz
8 kHz
4 kHz
2.5 kHz
1.5 kHz
800 Hz
450 Hz
250 Hz
150 Hz
80 Hz
45 Hz
30 Hz
15 Hz
7.5 Hz
3 Hz
Typical
Max for
<
1%
Error
40 kHz
50 kHz
50 kHz
25 kHz
10 kHz
6 kHz
3.5 kHz
2 kHz
1 kHz
650 Hz
350 Hz
200 Hz
120 Hz
65 Hz
40 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
5 Hz
2. Specifications apply to both dc charge/discharge capacitance meters and ac RCL meters. The
maximum allowable peak voltage is 3 V. The maximum allowable peak current is 150 mA, with an rms
limitation of 30 mA below 1.1
µ
F and 100 mA for 1.1
µ
F and above.
3. The maximum lead resistance for no additional error in 2-wire COMP mode is 10
Ω
.
1-16
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
1
1-16. Temperature Calibration (Thermocouple) Specifications
TC
Type
[1]
Range
°
C
[2]
Absolute Uncertainty
Source/Measure tcal
±
5
°
C
± °
C [3]
90 days 1 year
TC
Type
[1]
Range
°
C
[2]
Absolute Uncertainty
Source/Measure tcal
±
5
°
C
± °
C [3]
90 days 1 year
B
C
E
600 to 800
800 to 1000
1000 to 1550
1550 to 1820
0 to 150
150 to 650
650 to 1000
1000 to 1800
1800 to 2316
-250 to -100
-100 to -25
-25 to 350
0.23
0.38
0.63
0.38
0.12
0.10
0.42
0.34
0.30
0.26
0.23
0.19
0.31
0.50
0.84
0.50
0.16
0.14
0.44
0.34
0.30
0.33
0.30
0.26
L
N
R
-200 to -100
-100 to 800
800 to 900
-200 to -100
-100 to -25
-25 to 120
120 to 410
410 to 1300
0 to 250
250 to 400
400 to 1000
1000 to 1767
0.14
0.21
0.48
0.28
0.26
0.30
0.37
0.26
0.17
0.30
0.17
0.15
J
K
350 to 650
650 to 1000
-210 to -100
-100 to -30
-30 to 150
150 to 760
760 to 1200
-200 to -100
-100 to -25
-25 to 120
0.12
0.16
0.20
0.12
0.10
0.13
0.18
0.25
0.14
0.12
0.16
0.21
0.27
0.16
0.14
0.17
0.23
0.33
0.18
0.16
S
T
U
0 to 250
250 to 1000
1000 to 1400
1400 to 1767
-250 to -150
-150 to 0
0 to 120
120 to 400
-200 to 0
0 to 600
0.47
0.30
0.28
0.34
0.48
0.18
0.12
0.10
0.56
0.27
0.47
0.36
0.37
0.46
120 to 1000
1000 to 1372
0.19
0.30
0.26
0.40
[1] Temperature standard ITS-90 or IPTS-68 is selectable.
TC simulating and measuring are not specified for operation in electromagnetic fields above 0.4 V/m.
[2] Resolution is 0.01
°
C
[3] Does not include thermocouple error
0.63
0.24
0.16
0.14
0.56
0.27
0.18
0.27
0.57
0.35
0.33
0.40
0.37
0.26
0.17
0.40
0.22
0.19
1-17
5520A
Service Manual
1-17. Temperature Calibration (RTD) Specifications
RTD
Type
Pt 395,
100
Ω
Range
°
C
[1]
-200 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 630
630 to 800
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.10
0.21
Absolute
Uncertainty
tcal
±
5
°
C
± °
C [2]
90 days 1 year
0.04
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.07
0.09
0.10
0.12
0.23
RTD
Type
Pt 385,
500
Ω
Range
°
C
[1]
-200 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 600
Pt 3926,
100
Ω
Pt 3916,
100
Ω
-200 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 630
-200 to -190
-190 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 600
600 to 630
0.08
0.08
0.21
Pt 385,
200
Ω
-200 to -80
-80 to 0
0.03
0.03
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
300 to 400
0.04
0.04
0.11
0.12
400 to 600
600 to 630
[1] Resolution is 0.003
°
C
0.12
0.14
0.25
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.06
0.07
0.04
0.05
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.10
0.25
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.05
0.05
0.07
0.09
0.10
0.12
0.09
0.10
0.23
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.12
0.13
0.14
0.16
Pt 385,
1000
Ω
PtNi 385,
120
Ω
(Ni120)
Cu 427,
10
Ω
[3]
600 to 630
-200 to -80
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 600
600 to 630
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
-100 to 260
[2] Applies for COMP OFF (to the 5520A Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals) and 2-wire and 4-
wire compensation.
0.05
0.06
0.22
0.06
0.07
0.13
0.3
Absolute
Uncertainty
tcal
±
5
°
C
± °
C [2]
90 days 1 year
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.07
0.08
0.05
0.06
0.08
0.08
0.09
0.09
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.11
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.07
0.23
0.08
0.08
0.14
0.3
[3] Based on MINCO Application Aid No. 18
1-18
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
1
1-18. DC Power Specification Summary
Voltage Range
Current Range
0.33 mA to
329.99 mA
0.33 A to
2.9999 A
3 A to
20.5 A
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C,
±
(% of watts output) [1]
90 days
33 mV to 1020 V 0.021
0.019 [2] 0.06 [2]
1 year
33 mV to 1020 V 0.023
0.022 [2] 0.07 [2]
[1] To determine dc power uncertainty with more precision, see the individual “AC Voltage Specifications,” “AC
Current Specifications,” and “Calculating Power Uncertainty.”
[2] Add 0.02% unless a settling time of 30 seconds is allowed for output currents
>
10 A or for currents on the highest two current ranges within 30 seconds of an output current
>
10 A.
1-19. AC Power (45 Hz to 65 Hz) Specification Summary, PF=1
Current Range
90 days
1 year
Voltage Range
33 to 329.999 mV
330 mV to 1020 V
33 to 329.999 mV
330 mV to 1020 V
3.3 mA to
8.999 mA
9 mA to
32.999 mA
33 mA to
89.99 mA
90 mA to 329.99 mA
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C,
±
(% of watts output) [1]
0.13
0.11
0.14
0.12
0.09
0.07
0.10
0.08
0.13
0.11
0.14
0.12
0.09
0.07
0.10
0.08
Current Range [2]
Voltage Range
0.33 A to
0.8999 A
0.9 A to
2.1999 A
2.2 A to
4.4999 A
4.5 A to
20.5 A
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C,
±
(% of watts output) [1]
90 days
33 to 329.999 mV
330 mV to 1020 V
0.12
0.10
0.10
0.08
0.12
0.11
0.10
0.09
1 year
33 to 329.999 mV 0.13
0.11
0.13
0.11
330 mV to 1020 V 0.11
0.09
0.12
0.10
[1] To determine ac power uncertainty with more precision, see the individual “DC Voltage Specifications” and “DC
Current Specifications” and “Calculating Power Uncertainty.”
[2] Add 0.02% unless a settling time of 30 seconds is allowed for output currents
>
10 A or for currents on the highest two current ranges within 30 seconds of an output current
>
10 A.
1-19
5520A
Service Manual
1-20. Power and Dual Output Limit Specifications
Frequency
Voltages
(NORMAL)
Currents
Voltages
(AUX)
dc
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 65 Hz
65 Hz to 500 Hz
65 Hz to 500 Hz
0 to
±
1020 V
33 mV to 32.9999 V
33 mV to 1000 V
330 mV to 1000 V
3.3 V to 1000 V
0 to
±
20.5 A
3.3 mA to 2.99999 A
3.3 mA to 20.5 A
33 mA to 2.99999 A
33 mA to 20.5 A
0 to
±
7 V
10 mV to 5 V
10 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
500 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 5 kHz
330 mV to 1000 V
3.3 V to 1000 V [1]
33 mA to 20.5 A
33 mA to 2.99999 A
100 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V [1]
5 kHz to 10 kHz 3.3 V to 1000 V [2] 33 mA to 329.99 mA 1 V to 5 V [2]
[1] In dual voltage output mode, voltage is limited to 3.3 V to 500 V in the NORMAL output.
[2] In dual voltage output mode, voltage is limited to 3.3 V to 250 V in the NORMAL output.
Notes
The range of voltages and currents shown in “DC Voltage Specifications,” “DC Current Specifications,” “AC
Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications,” and “AC Current (Sine Wave) Specifications” are available in the power and dual output modes (except minimum current for ac power is 0.33 mA). However, only those limits shown in this table are specified. See “Calculating Power Uncertainty” to determine the uncertainty at these points.
The phase adjustment range for dual ac outputs is 0
°
to
±
179.99
°
. The phase resolution for dual ac outputs is 0.01
°
.
1
1
1
Power
Factor
(PF)
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
1-20
Introduction and Specifications
Specifications
1
10 Hz to
65 Hz
0.10
°
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C, (
∆ Φ °
)
65 Hz to
500 Hz
0.25
°
500 Hz to
1 kHz
0.5
°
1 kHz to
5 kHz
2.5
°
5 kHz to
10 kHz
5
°
10 kHz to
30 kHz
10
°
PF
Phase
(
Φ
)
Watts
Phase
(
Φ
)
VARs
0
°
10
°
20
°
30
°
40
°
50
°
60
°
70
°
80
°
90
°
20
°
10
°
0
°
60
°
50
°
40
°
30
°
90
°
80
°
70
°
1.000
0.985
0.940
0.866
0.766
0.643
0.500
0.342
0.174
0.000
10 Hz to
65 Hz
0.00%
0.03%
0.06%
0.10%
0.15%
0.21%
0.30%
0.48%
0.99%
Power Uncertainty Adder due to Phase Error
65 Hz to
500 Hz
0.00%
0.08%
0.16%
0.25%
0.37%
0.52%
0.76%
1.20%
2.48%
500 Hz to
1 kHz
0.00%
0.16%
0.32%
0.51%
0.74%
1.04%
1.52%
2.40%
4.95%
1 kHz to
5 kHz
0.10%
0.86%
1.68%
2.61%
3.76%
5.29%
7.65%
12.08%
24.83%
5 kHz to
10 kHz
10 kHz to
30 kHz
0.38%
1.92%
3.55%
1.52%
4.58%
7.84%
5.41%
7.69%
11.54%
16.09%
10.77% 22.21%
15.48% 31.60%
24.33% 49.23%
49.81% 100.00%
Note
To calculate exact ac watts power adders due to phase uncertainty for values not shown, use the following formula:
Adder
( )
= −
Cos
(
+
)
)
Cos
.
For example: for a PF of .9205 (
Φ
= 23) and a phase uncertainty of
∆Φ
= 0.15, the ac watts power adder is:
Adder
( )
= −
Cos
(23
+
.
15 )
Cos
( )
)
=
0 11%
1-21
5520A
Service Manual
1-22. Calculating Power Uncertainty
Overall uncertainty for power output in watts (or VARs) is based on the root sum square
(rss) of the individual uncertainties in percent for the selected voltage, current, and power factor parameters:
Watts uncertainty
VARs uncertainty
U
power
U
VARs
=
=
U
U
2
voltage
2
voltage
+
+
U
U
2
2 current current
+
+
U
U
2
PFadder
2
VARsadder
Because there are an infinite number of combinations, you should calculate the actual ac power uncertainty for your selected parameters. The method of calculation is best shown in the following examples (using 90-day specifications):
Example 1 Output: 100 V, 1 A, 60 Hz, Power Factor = 1.0 (
Φ
=0), 1 year specifications
Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 60 Hz is 150 ppm
+
2 mV, totaling:
100 V x 190 x 10
-6
= 15 mV added to 2 mV = 17 mV. Expressed in percent:
17 mV/100 V x 100 = 0.017% (see “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications”).
Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A is 0.036%
+
100
µ
A, totaling:
1 A x 0.00036 = 360
µ
A added to 100
µ
A = 0.46 mA. Expressed in percent:
0.46 mA/1 A x 100 = 0.046% (see “AC Current (Sine Waves) Specifications”).
PF Adder Watts Adder for PF = 1 (
Φ
=0) at 60 Hz is 0% (see “Phase Specifications”).
Total Watts Output Uncertainty =
U
power
=
.
2
+
.
2
+
0
2
=
.
Example 2 Output: 100 V, 1 A, 400 Hz, Power Factor = 0.5 (
Φ
=60)
Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 400 Hz is, 150 ppm
+
2 mV, totaling:
100 V x 190 x 10
-6
= 15 mV added to 2 mV = 17 mV. Expressed in percent:
17 mV/100V x 100 = 0.017% (see “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications”).
Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A is 0.036%
+
100
µ
A, totaling:
1 A x 0.00036 = 360
µ
A added to 100
µ
A = 0.46 mA. Expressed in percent:
0.46 mA/1A x 100 = 0.046% (see “AC Current (Sine Waves) Specifications”).
PF Adder Watts Adder for PF = 0.5 (
Φ
=60) at 400 Hz is 0.76% (see “Phase
Specifications”).
Total Watts Output Uncertainty =
U
power
=
.
2
+
.
2
+
.
2
=
.
VARs When the Power Factor approaches 0.0, the watts output uncertainty becomes unrealistic because the dominant characteristic is the VARs (volts-amps-reactive) output.
In these cases, calculate the Total VARs Output Uncertainty, as shown in example 3:
Example 3 Output: 100 V, 1 A, 60 Hz, Power Factor = 0.174 (
Φ
=80)
Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 400 Hz is, 150 ppm
+
2 mV, totaling:
100 V x 190 x 10
-6
= 15 mV added to 2 mV = 17 mV. Expressed in percent:
17 mV/100V x 100 = 0.017% (see “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications”).
Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A is 0.036%
+
100
µ
A, totaling:
1 A x 0.00036 = 360
µ
A added to 100
µ
A = 0.46 mA. Expressed in percent:
0.46 mA/1 A x 100 = 0.046% (see “AC Current (Sine Waves) Specifications”).
VARs Adder VARs Adder for
Φ
= 80 at 60 Hz is 0.02% (see “Phase Specifications”).
Total VARS Output Uncertainty =
U
VARs
= .
2
+
.
2
+
.
2
=
.
1-22
Introduction and Specifications
Additional Specifications
1
1-23. Additional Specifications
The following paragraphs provide additional specifications for the 5520A Calibrator ac voltage and ac current functions. These specifications are valid after allowing a warm-up period of 30 minutes, or twice the time the 5520A has been turned off. All extended range specifications are based on performing the internal zero-cal function at weekly intervals, or when the ambient temperature changes by more than 5
°
C.
Frequency
Range
Resolution
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal
±
5
°
C
Jitter
0.01 Hz to 119.99 Hz
120.0 Hz to 1199.9 Hz
1.200 kHz to 11.999 kHz
12.00 kHz to 119.99 kHz
0.01 Hz
0.1 Hz
1.0 Hz
10 Hz
2.5 ppm
±
5
µ
Hz [1] 100 nS
120.0 kHz to 1199.9 kHz
1.200 MHz to 2.000 MHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
[1] With REF CLK set to ext, the frequency uncertainty of the 5520A is the uncertainty of the external
10 MHz clock
±
5
µ
Hz. The amplitude of the 10 MHz external reference clock signal should be between 1 V and 5 V p-p.
1-23
5520A
Service Manual
1-25. Harmonics (2nd to 50th) Specifications
Fundamental
Frequency [1]
Voltages
NORMAL
Terminals
Currents
Voltages
AUX Terminals
Amplitude
Uncertainty
10 Hz to 45 Hz 33 mV to 32.9999 V 3.3 mA to 2.99999 A 10 mV to 5 V Same % of output as
45 Hz to 65 Hz
65 Hz to 500 Hz
33 mV to 1000 V
33 mV to 1000 V
3.3 mA to 20.5 A
33 mA to 20.5 A
10 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V the equivalent single output, but twice the floor adder.
500 Hz to 5 kHz
5 kHz to 10 kHz
330 mV to 1000 V
3.3 V to 1000 V
33 mA to 20.5 A
33 mA to
329.9999 mA
100 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
10 kHz to 30 kHz 3.3 V to 1000 V 33 mA to
329.9999 mA
100 mV to
3.29999 V
[1] The maximum frequency of the harmonic output is 30 kHz (10 kHz for 3 V to 5 V). For example, if the fundamental output is 5 kHz, the maximum selection is the 6th harmonic (30 kHz). All harmonic frequencies (2nd to 50th) are available for fundamental outputs between 10 Hz and 600 Hz (200 Hz for 3 V to 5 V).
Note
Phase uncertainty for harmonic outputs is 1
°
, or the phase uncertainty shown in “Phase Specifications” for the particular output, whichever is greater. For example, the phase uncertainty of a 400 Hz fundamental output and 10 kHz harmonic output is 10
°
(from “Phase Specifications”). Another example, the phase uncertainty of a 60 Hz fundamental output and a 400 Hz harmonic output is 1
°
.
Example of determining Amplitude Uncertainty in a Dual Output Harmonic Mode
What are the amplitude uncertainties for the following dual outputs?
NORMAL (Fundamental) Output: 100V, 100 Hz
From “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications” the single output specification for
100V, 100 Hz, is 0.015%
+
2 mV. For the dual output in this example, the specification is 0.015%
+
4 mV as the 0.015% is the same and the floor is twice the value (2 x 2 mV).
AUX (50th Harmonic) Output: 100 mV, 5 kHz
From “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications” the auxiliary output specification for
100 mV, 5 kHz, is 0.15%
+
450 mV. For the dual output in this example, the specification is 0.15%
+
900 mV as the 0.15% is the same and the floor is twice the value (2 x 450 mV).
1-24
Introduction and Specifications
Additional Specifications
1
1-26. AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Extended Bandwidth Specifications
Range Frequency
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty tcal
±
5
°
C
Max Voltage
Resolution
1.0 mV to 33 mV
34 mV to 330 mV
0.4 V to 33 V
0.3 V to 3.3V
Normal Channel (Single Output Mode)
0.01 Hz to 9.99 Hz
±
(5.0 % of output
+
0.5% of range)
Two digits, e.g., 25 mV
Three digits
Two digits
Two digits
10 mV to 330 mV
0.4 V to 5V
500.1 kHz to 1 MHz
1.001 MHz to 2 MHz
-10 dB at 1 MHz, typical
-31 dB at 2 MHz, typical
Auxiliary Output (Dual Output Mode)
0.01 Hz to 9.99 Hz
±
(5.0 % of output
+
0.5% of range)
Three digits
Two digits
1-25
5520A
Service Manual
1-27. AC Voltage (Non-Sine Wave) Specifications
Triangle Wave
&
Truncated
Sine
Range, p-p [1]
Frequency 1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C,
±
(% of output
+
% of range) [2]
Max Voltage
Resolution
2.9 mV to 93 V
Normal Channel (Single Output Mode)
0.01 Hz to 10 Hz
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 20 kHz
20 kHz to 100 kHz
[3]
5.0
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.25
0.5
+
0.25
5.0
+
0.5
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
93 mV
Auxiliary Output (Dual Output Mode)
0.01 Hz to 10 Hz 5.0
+
0.5
Two digits on each range to 14 V 10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 10 kHz
0.25
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.25
5.0
+
0.5
Six digits on each range
[1] To convert p-p to rms for triangle wave, multiply the p-p value by 0.2886751. To convert p-p to rms for truncated sine wave, multiply the p-p value by 0.2165063.
[2] Uncertainty is stated in p-p. Amplitude is verified using an rms-responding DMM.
[3] Uncertainty for Truncated Sine outputs is typical over this frequency band.
Square
Wave Range
(p-p) [1]
Frequency
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
±
(% of output
+
% of range) [2]
Max Voltage
Resolution
2.9 mV to
66 V
66 mV to
14V
0.01 Hz to 10 Hz
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 20 kHz
Normal Channel (Single Output Mode)
20 kHz to 100 kHz
5.0
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.25
0.5
+
0.25
5.0
+
0.5
0.01 Hz to 10 Hz
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
Auxiliary Output (Dual Output Mode)
1 kHz to 10 kHz [3]
5.0
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.25
5.0
+
0.5
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
[1] To convert p-p to rms for square wave, multiply the p-p value by 0.5.
[2] Uncertainty is stated in p-p. Amplitude is verified using an rms-responding DMM.
[3] Limited to 1 kHz for Auxiliary outputs
≥
6.6 V p-p.
1-26
Introduction and Specifications
Additional Specifications
1
1-28. AC Voltage, DC Offset Specifications
Range [1]
(Normal Channel)
Offset Range
[2]
Max
Peak
Signal
1-Year Absolute Offset
Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C [3]
±
(% dc output
+
floor)
3.3 mV to 32.999 mV
33 mV to 329.999 mV
0.33 mV to 3.29999 V
3.3 V to 32.9999 V
9.3 mV to 92.999 mV
93 mV to 929.999 mV
0.93 mV to 9.29999 V
9.3 mV to 92.9999 V
6.6 mV to 65.999 mV
66 mV to 659.999 mV
0.66 mV to 6.59999 V
6.6 mV to 65.9999 V
0 to 50 mV
0 to 500 mV
0 to 5 V
0 to 50 V
80 mV
800 mV
8 V
55 V
Triangle Waves and Truncated Sine Waves (p-p)
0 to 50 mV
0 to 500 mV
0 to 5 V
0 to 50 V
80 mV
800 mV
8 V
55 V
0.1
+
93
µ
V
0.1
+
930
µ
V
0.1
+
9300
µ
V
0.1
+
93 mV
Square Waves (p-p)
0.1
+
33
µ
V
0.1
+
330
µ
V
0.1
+
3300
µ
V
0.1
+
33 mV
0 to 50 mV
0 to 500 mV
0 to 5 V
0 to 50 V
Sine Waves (rms)
80 mV
800 mV
8 V
55 V
0.1
+
66
µ
V
0.1
+
660
µ
V
0.1
+
6600
µ
V
0.1
+
66 mV
[1] Offsets are not allowed on ranges above the highest range shown above.
[2] The maximum offset value is determined by the difference between the peak value of the selected voltage output and the allowable maximum peak signal. For example, a 10 V p-p square wave output has a peak value of 5 V, allowing a maximum offset up to
±
50 V to not exceed the 55 V maximum peak signal. The maximum offset values shown above are for the minimum outputs in each range.
[3] For frequencies 0.01 Hz to 10 Hz, and 500 kHz to 2 MHz, the offset uncertainty is 5% of output,
±
1% of the offset range.
1-27
5520A
Service Manual
1-29. AC Voltage, Square Wave Characteristics
Risetime
@ 1 kHz
Typical
Settling Time
@ 1 kHz
Typical
Overshoot
@ 1 kHz
Typical
Duty Cycle
Range
<
1
µ s
<
10
µ s to 1% of final value
<
2% 1% to 99%,
<
3.3 V p-p,
0.01 Hz to
100 kHz
Duty Cycle Uncertainty
±
(0.02% of period + 100 ns), 50% duty cycle
±
(0.05% of period + 100 ns), other duty cycles
from 10% to 90%
1-30. AC Voltage, Triangle Wave Characteristics (typical)
Linearity to 1 kHz
0.3% of p-p value, from 10% to 90% point
Aberrations
<
1% of p-p value, with amplitude
>
50% of range
1-31. AC Current (Sine Wave) Extended Bandwidth Specifications
Range Frequency
All current ranges,
<
330 mA 0.01 Hz to 10 Hz
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal
±
5
°
C
±
(% of output
+
% of range) [2]
5.0
+
0.5
Max
Current
Resolution
2 digits
1-28
Introduction and Specifications
Additional Specifications
1
1-32. AC Current (Non-Sine Wave) Specifications
Triangle Wave &
Truncated Sine
Wave Range p-p
0.047 mA
Frequency
0.01 Hz o 10 Hz
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal
±
5
°
C
±
(% of output
+
% of range)
to 0.92999 mA [1]
0.93 mA to
9.29999 mA [1]
9.3 mA to
92.9999 mA [1]
93 mA to
929.999 mA [1]
0.93 A to
8.49999 A
8.5 A to 57 A [2]
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 10 kHz
0.01 Hz to 10 Hz
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 10 kHz
0.01 Hz to 10 Hz
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 10 kHz
0.01 Hz to 10 Hz
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 10 kHz
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1kHz
1 kHz to 10 kHz
45 Hz to 500 Hz
500 Hz to 1 kHz
0.25
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.5
10
+
2
0.5
+
1.0
0.5
+
0.5
10
+
2
0.5
+
0.5
1.0
+
1.0
5.0
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.25
10
+
2
5.0
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.25
10
+
2
5.0
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.25
10
+
2
5.0
+
0.5
[1] Frequency limited to 1 kHz with LCOMP on.
[2] Frequency limited to 440 Hz with LCOMP on
Max
Current
Resolution
Two digits
Six digits
Two digits
Six digits
Two digits
Six digits
Two digits
Six digits
Six digits
1-29
5520A
Service Manual
AC Current (Non-Sine Wave) Specifications (cont)
Square Wave
Range
p-p
0.047 mA to
0.65999 mA [1]
0.66 mA to
6.59999 mA [1]
6.6 mA to
65.9999 mA [1]
66 mA to
659.999 mA [1]
0.66 A to
5.99999 A [2]
6 A to 41 A [2]
Frequency
0.01 Hz to 10 Hz
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 10 kHz
0.01 Hz to 10 Hz
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 10 kHz
0.01 Hz to 10 Hz
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 10 kHz
0.01 Hz to 10 Hz
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 10 kHz
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 10 kHz
45 Hz to 500 Hz
500 Hz to 1 kHz
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C,
±
(% of output
+
% of range)
10
+
2
5.0
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.5
10
+
2
0.5
+
1.0
0.5
+
0.5
10
+
2
0.5
+
0.5
1.0
+
1.0
5.0
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.25
10
+
2
5.0
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.25
10
+
2
5.0
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.5
0.25
+
0.25
[1] Frequency limited to 1 kHz with LCOMP on.
[2] Frequency limited to 440 Hz with LCOMP on.
Max
Current
Resolution
Two digits
Six digits
Two digits
Six digits
Two digits
Six digits
Two digits
Six digits
1-30
Introduction and Specifications
Additional Specifications
1
1-33. AC Current, Square Wave Characteristics (typical)
Range
I
<
6A @ 400 Hz
3A & 20A
Ranges
LCOMP Risetime
off 25
µ s on 100
µ s
Settling Time
40
µ s to 1% of final value
200
µ s to 1% of final value
Overshoot
<
10% for
<
1 V
Compliance
<
10% for
<
1 V
Compliance
1-34. AC Current, Triangle Wave Characteristics (typical)
Linearity to 400 Hz
0.3% of p-p value, from 10% to 90% point
Aberrations
<
1% of p-p value, with amplitude
>
50% of range
1-31
5520A
Service Manual
1-32
Chapter 2
Theory of Operation
Title Page
2-1.
2-2.
Encoder Assembly (A2)........................................................................ 2-4
2-3.
Synthesized Impedance Assembly (A5) ............................................... 2-4
2-4.
DDS Assembly (A6) ............................................................................. 2-5
2-5.
Current Assembly (A7)......................................................................... 2-6
2-6.
Voltage Assembly (A8) ........................................................................ 2-7
2-7.
Main CPU Assembly (A9).................................................................... 2-8
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
Outguard Supplies ............................................................................ 2-8
Inguard Supplies............................................................................... 2-8
2-1
5520A
Service Manual
2-2
Theory of Operation
Introduction
2
2-1. Introduction
This chapter provides a block diagram discussion of the calibrator’s analog and digital sections. Figure 2-1 shows the arrangement of assemblies inside the 5520A. The
Oscilloscope Calibration Option is described in the Options chapter.
The 5520A produces calibration outputs of the following functions and ranges:
•
DC voltage from 0 V to
±
1000 V.
•
AC voltage from 1 mV to 1000 V, with output from 10 Hz to 500 kHz.
•
AC current from 0.01
µ
A to 20.5 A, with output from 10 Hz to 30 kHz.
•
DC current from 0 to
±
20.5 A.
•
Resistance values from a short circuit to 1.1 G
Ω
.
•
Capacitance values from 190 pF to 110 mF.
•
Simulated output for Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs).
•
Simulated output for thermocouples.
Main CPU (A9)
Filter (A12)
Voltage (A8)
Current (A7)
DDS (A6)
Synthesized Impedance (A5)
Oscilloscope Calibration Option (A4)
Encoder (A2)
Keyboard (A1)
FRONT
Motherboard (A3)
Figure 2-1. 5520A Internal Layout
yg116f.eps
2-3
5520A
Service Manual
2-2. Encoder Assembly (A2)
The Encoder assembly (A2) has its own microprocessor and is in communication with the Main CPU (A9) on the Rear Panel through a serial link. Memory for the Encoder assembly is contained in EPROM. The Encoder assembly handles the interface to the
Keyboard assembly (A1).
2-3. Synthesized Impedance Assembly (A5)
The Synthesized Impedance assembly (A5) generates variable resistance and capacitance outputs. It uses discrete resistors and capacitors as references, with an amplifier in series.
Figure 2-2 is a block diagram of the synthesized resistance function. Figure 2-3 is a block diagram of the synthesized capacitance function.
For resistance synthesis, there is a two-wire compensation circuit, an input amplifier, two
DACs (coarse and fine) with offset adjust, and an output LO buffer.
For capacitance synthesis, there is a two-wire compensation circuit, selectable references, an input amplifier, two DACs (coarse and fine), and an output LO buffer.
NORMAL HI
Rref
_
+
Rx =
RCOM
NORMAL LO
DAC
Figure 2-2. Synthesized Resistance Function
yg117f.eps
2-4
Theory of Operation
DDS Assembly (A6)
2
K
C ref
DAC
NORMAL
HI
-1
C x
=
C x
= (1 + K) • C ref
NORMAL
LO
SCOM yg118f.eps
Figure 2-3. Synthesized Capacitance Function
2-4. DDS Assembly (A6)
The DDS (Direct Digital Synthesis) assembly (A6) contains the following blocks:
•
References for all voltage and current functions.
•
Gain determining elements for voltage functions and thermocouple measuring and sourcing.
• ±
7 V references.
•
Thermocouple sourcing and measuring amplifier.
•
An A/D (Analog-to-Digital) measurement system for monitoring all functions.
•
Self-calibration circuitry.
•
Zero calibration circuitry.
•
Precision voltage channel DAC (VDAC).
•
Precision current channel DAC (IDAC).
•
Dual-channel DDS (Direct Digital Synthesizer).
These functional blocks, when used with the Voltage (A8) and/or Current (A7) assemblies, provide single or dual channel ac and dc volts, amps, and watts, offsettable and nonsinusoidal waveforms, duty cycle, thermocouple measuring and sourcing, internal calibration and diagnostics, and digital control over all the analog assemblies.
DACS are used to control the level of dc signals and to control the amplitude of ac signals.
2-5
5520A
Service Manual
The dual-channel DDS (Direct Digital Synthesizer) generates finely stepped digital waveforms that take the form of sine, triangular, and other waveforms.
2-5. Current Assembly (A7)
The Current assembly outputs six current ranges (330
µ
A, 3.3 mA, 33 mA, 330 mA, 3 A, and 20 A) and three voltage ranges (330 mV, 3.3 V, and 5V) to the AUX outputs. The
20 A outputs are sourced through the 20 A AUX binding posts.
The Current assembly works together with the DDS (A6) assembly. The Filter (A12) assembly provides the high current power supplies.
The Current assembly (A7) contains the following blocks:
•
A floating supply.
•
Several stages of transconductance amplifier.
•
Current-sensing shunts and shunt amplifier. (These are the accuracy-setting elements.)
•
AUX voltage function.
Operating power for the Current assembly is filtered by the Filter assembly (A12). Its common is separated from SCOM by a shunt resistor.
Figure 2-4 is a block diagram of the current function. Note that the DDS assembly works together with the Current assembly to generate current outputs.
±
IDAC
DDS Assembly (A6)
IDAC Error
Amp
DDS
Ch 1 dc ac
Current Assembly (A7)
Current
Amp
Ref
SCOM dc ac
AC
Converter
AUX HI
SCOM
Shunt
Amp
SCOM
Shunt
AUX LO
SCOM
ICOM yg119f.eps
Figure 2-4. Current Function (AUX Out Ranges)
2-6
Theory of Operation
Voltage Assembly (A8)
2
2-6. Voltage Assembly (A8)
The Voltage assembly (A8) generates dc and ac voltage outputs in the range 3.3 V and above. It also provides all the inguard supplies referenced to SCOM as described under the heading “Power Supplies.”
Figure 2-5 is a block diagram of the voltage function and shows the signal paths for dc and ac voltage outputs. The DAC shown in the figure is VDAC, which resides on the
DDS assembly. Note that the voltage amplifier for outputs
≥
3.3 V resides on the Voltage assembly, but the amplifier for voltage outputs
<
3.3 V is on the DDS assembly.
Ref
VDAC dc ac
_
+
Error
Amp
AC
Converter
± 1
DDS dc ac
Voltage
Amp
( > 3.3V on A8,
< 3.3V on A6 )
±G
NORMAL
HI
NORMAL
LO
Sense
Amp
_
+
SCOM
SCOM yg120f.eps
Figure 2-5. Voltage Function
2-7
5520A
Service Manual
2-7. Main CPU Assembly (A9)
The Main CPU (A9) attached to the rear panel assembly communicates with the following assemblies:
•
Inguard CPU on the DDS assembly (A6)
•
Display assembly CPU
•
Serial and IEEE interfaces
•
External amplifier (5725A)
The main CPU memory is Flash ROM. There is a real-time clock with a battery backup.
Each analog assembly has the same bus structure:
•
One or more Chip Select lines
•
Common data bus that connects to the motherboard, latched in by latches
•
A Fault line that sets all modules to a safe state in case of malfunction
Signals to the front panel jacks are routed by output relays on the motherboard.
2-8. Power Supplies
AC line voltage is applied through a line filter to a power module in the rear panel that provides switching for four line voltages. The outputs of the power module are wired directly to the primaries of the mains transformer. The safety ground wire is attached from the power module to the rear panel.
Major internal grounds are SCOM, which is tied to OUTPUT LO and the guard shell,
ICOM, which is the internal ground for the current function, and GCOM, which is the outguard common and is tied to earth ground.
2-9. Outguard Supplies
The motherboard generates the outguard power supplies: +12VG, -12VG, and +5VG. All the transformer connections for the outguard supplies come through one bundle of wires connected to the motherboard with P1. A row of test points is provided in front of the fan for the raw and regulated supplies. The outguard supplies are used only by the CPU assembly (A9) and Encoder (A2) assemblies.
The inguard supplies are located on the Voltage assembly (A8). The mains transformer connections (inguard SCOM referenced) are connected to the Motherboard (A3). Current protection devices for each of the supplies are located on the Motherboard. It is unlikely these devices will blow unless there is another fault since the regulators will limit current below the device ratings.
Filter capacitors for the high-current supply for the Current assembly (A7) are located on the Filter assembly (A12).
The inguard SCOM referenced supplies are +15 V, -15 V, +5 V, -5 V, and +5RLH. The
+5 V and +5RLH supplies share the same raw supply. The +5RLH supply is used exclusively as a relay driver and is nominally about 6.3 V. Test points for these supplies are located in a row across the top of the Voltage assembly. The 65 V supplies are rectified and filtered on the Motherboard but regulated on the Voltage assembly (A8).
2-8
Chapter 3
Calibration and Verification
Title Page
3-1.
3-2.
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification.......................... 3-3
3-3.
3-4.
Starting Calibration .......................................................................... 3-5
3-5.
3-6.
3-7.
3-8.
DC Volts Calibration (NORMAL Output) ....................................... 3-6
DC Volts Calibration (30 Vdc and Above) ...................................... 3-7
AC Volts Calibration (NORMAL Output) ....................................... 3-8
Thermocouple Function Calibration................................................. 3-10
3-9.
3-10.
3-11.
3-12.
DC Current Calibration .................................................................... 3-11
AC Current Calibration .................................................................... 3-14
DC Volts Calibration (AUX Output)................................................ 3-20
AC Volts Calibration (AUX Output)................................................ 3-20
3-13.
3-14.
Resistance Calibration ...................................................................... 3-21
Capacitance Calibration.................................................................... 3-24
3-15.
Calibration Remote Commands ............................................................ 3-27
3-16.
Generating a Calibration Report ........................................................... 3-33
3-25.
3-26.
3-27.
3-28.
3-29.
3-30.
3-31.
3-32.
3-33.
3-34.
3-17.
Performance Verification Tests ............................................................ 3-34
3-18.
Zeroing the Calibrator ...................................................................... 3-34
3-19.
3-20.
Verifying DC Volts (NORMAL Output) ......................................... 3-35
Verifying DC Volts (AUX Output) .................................................. 3-36
3-21.
3-22.
3-23.
3-24.
Verifying DC Current....................................................................... 3-36
Verifying Resistance ........................................................................ 3-38
Verifying AC Voltage (NORMAL Output) ..................................... 3-40
Verifying AC Voltage (AUX Output) .............................................. 3-42
Verifying AC Current....................................................................... 3-43
Verifying Capacitance ...................................................................... 3-46
200
µ
F to 110 mF Capacitance Verification .................................... 3-47
Capacitance Measurement ................................................................ 3-47
Measurement Uncertainty................................................................. 3-51
Verifying Thermocouple Simulation (Sourcing).............................. 3-52
Verifying Thermocouple Measurement............................................ 3-52
Verifying Phase Accuracy, Volts and AUX Volts ........................... 3-53
Verifying Phase Accuracy, Volts and Current ................................. 3-54
Verifying Frequency Accuracy ........................................................ 3-55
3-1
5520A
Service Manual
3-2
Calibration and Verification
Introduction
3
3-1. Introduction
You should recalibrate at the end of either a 90-day or 1-year calibration interval. If you recalibrate every 90 days, use the 90-day specifications, which provide higher performance. Use the Verification procedure or any part thereof any time you need to verify that the Calibrator is meeting its specifications.
Fluke recommends that you return the 5520A to Fluke for calibration and verification.
The Fluke Service Center uses a software-controlled verification process and provides a detailed test report including traceability to national standards. If you plan to calibrate or verify the 5520A at your site, use this chapter as a guide. The procedures in this chapter are manual versions of the software-controlled process used at the Fluke Service Center.
3-2. Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification
The equipment listed in Table 3-1 is required to calibrate and verify performance of the
5520A. If a specified instrument is not available, you can substitute an instrument that has the same, or better performance.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Table 3-1. Consolidated List of Required Equipment for Calibration and Verification
Quan.
Manufacturer
1
1
Fluke
Hewlett
Packard
Fluke
Keithley
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Guildline
Guildline
Fluke
Fluke
Guildline
Guildline
Fluke
Fluke
Model
5500A/LEADS Test lead set
3458A with -002
Option
752A
155
742A-1k
742A-100
742A-10
742A-1
9230
9230
742A-1M
742A-10 M
9334/100 M
9334/1G
PN 900394
5790A
DMM
Equipment Purpose
All functions
DC voltage, dc current, resistance, capacitance, thermocouple measurement and sourcing
Reference Divider 100:1, 10:1 DC voltage
Null Detector DC voltage (calibrate Fluke
752A for dc voltage)
Resistance Standard, 1 k
Ω
Resistance Standard, 100
Ω
Resistance Standard, 10
Ω
Resistance Standard, 1
Ω
0.1
Ω
shunt
DC current
DC current
DC current
DC current
DC current, verification procedure only
0.01
Ω
shunt DC current
Resistance Standard, 1 M
Ω
Resistance
Resistance Standard, 10 M
Ω
Resistance
Resistance Standard, 100 M
Ω
Resistance
Resistance Standard, 1G
Ω
Resistance
Type N to dual banana adapter AC voltage
AC Measurement Standard AC voltage, ac current
3-3
5520A
Service Manual
Table 3-1. Consolidated List of Required Equipment for Calibration and Verification (cont)
Quan.
Manufacturer Model Equipment Purpose
1
1
1
1
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke various
A40
A40A
792A-7004 metal film resistors
10 mA, 20 mA, 200 mA, 2 A current shunts
20 A current shunt
A40 Current Shunt Adapter
1 k
Ω
, 200
PM 9540/BAN Cable Set
PM 6304C LCR Meter
5700A Calibrator
Ω
AC current
AC current
AC current
AC current
1
1
1
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Capacitance
Capacitance
Precision current source for ac/dc current transfers, and to use in conjunction with an
HP3458A DMM for thermocouple measurement function
1
1
ASTM various
56 C various
Mercury thermometer
Dewar flask and cap, mineral oil lag bath
Precision Phase Meter [1]
Thermocouple measurement
Thermocouple measurement
1 North Atlantic
Or
Clarke-Hess
Fluke
2000
6000
PN 690567
Phase
1 Fluke resistor network used as a shunt, 0.01
Ω
, 0.09
Ω
, 0.9
Ω values needed
Phase
1 Fluke 6680B Frequency Counter Frequency
[1] If desired, the test uncertainty ratio (TUR) may be improved by characterizing the phase meter with a
primary phase standard like the Clarke-Hess 5500 prior to usage.
3-4
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
3-3. Calibration
The standard 5520A has no internal hardware adjustments. Oscilloscope Options have hardware adjustments; see Chapter 6. The Control Display prompts you through the entire calibration procedure. Calibration occurs in the following major steps:
1.
The 5520A sources specific output values and you measure the outputs using traceable measuring instruments of higher accuracy. The 5520A automatically programs the outputs and prompts you to make external connections to appropriate measurement instruments.
2.
At each measure and enter step, you can press the OPTIONS, and BACK UP STEP softkeys to redo a step, or SKIP STEP to skip over a step.
3.
You enter the measured results either manually through the front panel keyboard or remotely with an external terminal or computer.
Note
Intermixed with the "output and measure" procedures are internal 5520A calibration procedures that require no action by the operator.
4.
The 5520A computes a software correction factor and stores it in volatile memory.
5.
When the calibration process is compete, you are prompted to either store all the correction factors in nonvolatile memory or discard them and start over.
For routine calibration, all steps except frequency and phase are necessary. All the routine calibration steps are available from the front panel interface as well as the remote interface (IEEE-488 or serial). Frequency and phase calibration are recommended after instrument repair, and are available only by way of the remote interface (IEEE-488 or serial). Remote commands for calibration are described later in this chapter.
3-4. Starting Calibration
From the front panel, you start calibration by pressing the
S key, followed by the
CAL softkey twice, then 5520A CAL. The CALIBRATION SWITCH on the 5520A rear panel can be in either position when you begin calibration. It must be set for ENABLE to store the correction factors into nonvolatile memory.
After you press the 5520A CAL softkey, the procedure works as follows:
1.
The 5520A automatically programs the outputs and prompts you to make external connections to appropriate measurement instruments.
2.
The 5520A then goes into Operate mode, or asks you to place it into Operate mode.
3.
You are then prompted to enter into the 5520A the value read on the measurement instrument.
Note
At each measure and enter step, you can redo a step by pressing the
OPTIONS, and BACK UP STEP softkey, or skip over a step by pressing the
SKIP STEP softkey.
3-5
5520A
Service Manual
3-5. DC Volts Calibration (NORMAL Output)
The equipment listed in Table 3-2 is required for calibration of the dc volts function. (The equipment is also listed in the consolidated table, Table 3-1.)
Quan.
1
1
1
1
Table 3-2. Test Equipment Required for Calibrating DC Volts
Manufacturer
Fluke
Hewlett Packard
Fluke
Keithley
Model
5500A/LEADS
3458A with -002 Option
752A
155
Equipment
Test lead set
DMM
Reference Divider
Null Detector
Proceed as follows to calibrate the dc voltage function:
1.
On the HP 3458A, perform the ACAL (autocal) ALL and MATH NULL functions as described in the HP 3458A user documentation.
2.
Verify that the UUT (Unit Under Test) is in Standby.
3.
Start 5520A calibration as described under the previous heading.
4.
Perform an internal DC Zeros Calibration as prompted.
5.
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-1.
6.
Measure and enter the values into the UUT for steps 1 through 6 in Table 3-3 as prompted. You will need to disconnect and reconnect the DMM as prompted during these steps.
7.
Verify that the UUT is in Standby.
8.
Connect the DMM and Reference Divider to the UUT as shown in Figure 3-2.
9.
For voltages 30 Vdc and above, see the next section.
3-6
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
Step
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
8
9
Table 3-3. Calibration Steps for DC Volts
5520A Output (NORMAL)
1.000000 V
3.000000 V
-1.000000 V
-3.000000 V
0.0000 mV
300.0000 mV
30.00000 V
300.0000 V
1000.000 V
UUT
5520A CALIBRATOR
HP3458A
Set the HP3458A to external guard
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX yg102f.eps
Figure 3-1. Connections for Calibrating DC Volts up to 30 V
3-6. DC Volts Calibration (30 Vdc and Above)
Use the following procedure to calibrate the dc voltage function (30 Vdc and above).
1.
Prior to using the 752A, perform the self-calibration on the 752A using the null detector and a 20 V source. See the documentation from the 752A for more details.
2.
Connect the 5520A (unit under test), 752A, and HP3458A as in Figure 3-2. Make sure that the ground to guard strap on the 752A is not connected.
3.
The HP3458A should be used on the 10 Vdc range for all measurements. The 752A mode switch should be set to 10:1 for the 30 V measurement, and to 100:1 for all voltages above 30 V.
4.
Measure and enter the values into the UUT for steps 7 through 9 in Table 3-3 (30 V and above) as prompted.
5.
Verify that the UUT is in Standby and disconnect the test equipment.
3-7
5520A
Service Manual
UUT
5520A CALIBRATOR
Set the HP3458A to external guard
HP3458A
752A
1000V
RMS
MAX
1V PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
150V
PK
SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
PK
MAX yg103f.eps
Figure 3-2. Connections for Calibrating DC Volts 30 V and Above
3-7. AC Volts Calibration (NORMAL Output)
The equipment listed in Table 3-4 is required for calibration of the ac volts function. (The equipment is also listed in the consolidated table, Table 3-1.)
Table 3-4. Test Equipment Required for Calibrating AC Volts
Quan.
1
1
1
Manufacturer
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Model
5500A/LEADS
PN 900394
5790A
Equipment
Test lead set
Type N to dual banana adapter
AC Measurement Standard
Proceed as follows to calibrate the ac voltage function:
1.
Measure the 5520A output using Input 1 of a Fluke 5790A AC Measurement
Standard. Use a Type N to dual banana adapter as Figure 3-3 shows.
2.
Enter the measured values into the 5520A for each step in Table 3-5 as prompted.
3-8
Step
3
4
1
2
5
6
9
10
7
8
11
5790A
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
HI
LO
10V PEAK
MAX
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
Table 3-5. Calibration Steps for AC Volts
5520A Output (NORMAL)
Amplitude
3.29990 V
0.33000 V
3.00000 V
3.0 V
30.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
30.0000 V
300.000 V
1000.00 V
1000.00 V
Frequency
100.00 Hz
100.00 Hz
500.0 kHz
9.99 Hz
100.00 Hz
100.00 Hz
500.0 kHz
100.00 Hz
70.00 kHz
100.00 Hz
7.000 kHz
UUT
5520A CALIBRATOR
Set the 57900A to external guard
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX yg104f.eps
Figure 3-3. Connections for Calibrating AC Volts
3-9
5520A
Service Manual
3-8. Thermocouple Function Calibration
The equipment listed in Table 3-6 is required for calibration of the thermocouple measure and source functions. (The equipment is also listed in the consolidated table, Table 3-1.)
Table 3-6. Test Equipment Required for Calibrating the Thermocouple Function
Quan.
1
1
1
4 feet
1
Manufacturer
Fluke various
ASTM various
Hewlett Packard
Model
5520A/LEADS various
56C various
3458A with -002 option
Equipment
Test lead set (includes Type-J thermocouple, wire, and mini plug)
24-gauge solid copper telephone wire
Mercury thermometer
Dewar flask and cap, mineral oil lag bath
DMM
Proceed as follows to calibrate the thermocouple function:
1.
Verify that the UUT is in standby.
2.
With nothing connected to the UUT terminals, press the GO ON softkey as prompted to start TC calibration. Wait for the internal calibration steps to complete.
3.
Connect the HP3458A DMM to the TC terminals using solid copper telephone wire and a copper (uncompensated) TC miniplug as shown in Figure 3-4. Attach the wires directly to the DMM binding posts. Set the DMM to read dc millivolts.
4.
Enter the measured value into the UUT for step 1 in Table 3-7 as prompted.
5.
Disconnect the test equipment.
6.
Connect a Type-J thermocouple to the TC terminals on the UUT, and immerse the thermocouple and a precision mercury thermometer in a mineral oil lag bath that is within
±
2
°
C of ambient temperature. The test setup is shown in Figure 3-5.
7.
Wait at least 3 minutes for the temperature readings to stabilize, then read the temperature on the mercury thermometer and enter it into the UUT.
Step
1
2
Table 3-7. Calibration Steps for Thermocouple Measurement
5520A Output (AUX HI, LO)
300 mV dc (NORMAL)
Enter temperature read from mercury thermometer as prompted
3-10
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
UUT
5520A CALIBRATOR
HP3458A
Attach wires directly to binding posts
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX yg105f.eps
Figure 3-4. Connections for Calibrating Thermocouple Sourcing
Mercury
Thermometer
UUT
5520A CALIBRATOR
1000V
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX
STBY
7
4
1
OPR EARTH SCOPE BOOST
PREV
MENU
8
5
9
6
µ m n k dBm
W
V
A sec
¡F
Hz
¡C
2 3 p
M F
+
/ 0 • SHIFT ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
J type
Thermocouple
Mineral Oil
Lag Bath
Dewar Flask and Cap
Figure 3-5. Connections for Calibrating Thermocouple Measuring
yg004f.eps
3-9. DC Current Calibration
The equipment listed in Table 3-8 is required for calibration of the dc current function.
(The equipment is also listed in the consolidated table, Table 3-1.)
You must use the calibrated dc current function of the 5520A later to prepare for ac calibration. Because of this, you must save the dc current constants after dc current calibration and exit calibration, then resume calibration. The following procedure for dc current calibration explains how to save, exit, and resume calibration.
3-11
5520A
Service Manual
Table 3-8. Test Equipment Required for Calibrating DC Current
Quan.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Manufacturer Model Equipment
Fluke
Hewlett Packard
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Guildline
5500A/LEADS
3458A with -002 option
742A-1k
742A-100
742A-10
742A-1
9230
Test lead set
DMM
Resistance Standard, 1 k
Ω
Resistance Standard, 100
Ω
Resistance Standard, 10
Ω
Resistance Standard, 1
Ω
0.01
Ω
shunt
Proceed as follows to calibrate the dc current function:
1.
Perform the ACAL ALL and MATH NULL operations on the HP 3458A before you begin.
2.
Verify that the UUT is in standby.
3.
Set the DMM to measure dc voltage.
4.
Connect the DMM and 742A-1k Resistance Standard to the UUT as shown in
Figure 3-6.
5.
On the first dc current calibration point in Table 3-9, wait for the output to settle, record the DMM voltage reading, and compute the UUT current output using the certified resistance value of the 742A.
6.
Enter the computed value into the UUT.
7.
Proceed to the next calibration point, verify that the UUT is in standby, and disconnect the 742A.
8.
Repeat steps 3 through 6 above using the resistance standard or current shunt specified for each calibration point in Table 3-9.
9.
Exit calibration and save the calibration constants modified so far by using the front panel menus or the CAL_STORE remote command.
3-12
Step
3
4
1
2
5
6
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
Table 3-9. Calibration Steps for DC Current
5520A Output (AUX HI, LO)
300.000
µ
A
3.00000 mA
30.000 mA
300.000 mA
2.00000 A
20A, LO
10.0000 A
Shunt to Use
Fluke 742A-1k 1 k
Ω
Resistance Standard
Fluke 742A-100 100
Ω
Resistance Standard
Fluke 742A-10 10
Ω
Resistance Standard
Fluke 742A-1 1
Ω
Resistance Standard
Guildline 9230 0.01
Ω
shunt
Guildline 9230 0.01
Ω
shunt
5520A CALIBRATOR
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
RMS
MAX
PK
MAX
TRIG
RMS
MAX
GUARD 20A
SHELLS
20V
PK
NOT
GROUNDED
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX
STBY
7
4
1
OPR EARTH SCOPE BOOST
PREV
MENU
8
5
9
6
µ m n k dBm
W
V
A sec
Hz
2 3 p
M F
+
/ 0 • SHIFT ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
AUX output terminals are used for steps 1-5. 20A terminal is used for step 6.
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
Current shunt
HP3458A
Set the HP3458A to external guard
Figure 3-6. Connections for Calibrating DC Current
yg106f.eps
3-13
5520A
Service Manual
3-10. AC Current Calibration
Note
DC Current must be calibrated before proceeding with ac current calibration.
The ac current calibration uses a number of current shunts that require dc characterization before they can used. DC characterization can be performed with the 5520A, as long as you perform the entire 5520A dc current calibration first. During dc characterization, data is obtained for each of the ac current levels required by the ac current calibration procedure. For example, if a shunt is used for .33 mA ac and 3.3 mA ac calibrations, data must be obtained at .33 mA dc and 3.3 mA dc.
Follow these steps to characterize the shunt:
1.
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-7.
5790A
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
UUT
5520A CALIBRATOR
792-7004
Current shunt adapter
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
10V PEAK
MAX
HI
LO
A40 shunt
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20V PK MAX
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
TC 20V PK MAX
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD
Set 5790A to external guard yg130f.eps
Figure 3-7. Connections for Calibrating AC Current with a Fluke A40 Shunt
2.
For each amplitude listed in Table 3-11, apply the equivalent +(positive) and
- (negative) dc current from the 5520A.
3.
Compute the actual dc characterization value using this formula:
((+ value) - (- value))
2
The time between the dc characterization of a current shunt and its use in the calibration process should be kept to an absolute minimum. To reduce this time, each shunt is characterized as it is needed. As the ac current calibration procedure is performed, it must be temporarily aborted each time a new shunt value is required. After the required shunt is characterized, the calibration procedure is resumed at the previous point using the newly characterized shunt.
The following example explains this procedure:
1.
Perform the dc current calibration procedure.
2.
Using Table 3-11, select the first required current shunt (A40-10 mA)
3-14
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
3.
Perform a dc characterization of the shunt at the amplitude specified in the table (as demonstrated above).
4.
Restart the ac current calibration procedure and using the blue softkeys, perform the
SKIP STEP command to reach the step(s) requiring the newly characterized shunt.
5.
Place the 5520A in OPERATE and measure the ac voltage across the shunt.
6.
Using the data derived during the dc characterization and the ac correction factors supplied for the shunt by the manufacturer, calculate the ac current and enter this value into the calibrator.
7.
Continue this process until Table 3-11 is complete.
Following are some important remote commands used in this procedure:
•
CAL_START MAIN, AI Start the ac current calibration procedure.
•
CAL_SKIP
•
CAL_ABORT
•
CAL_NEXT
•
CAL_STORE
Skip to the appropriate calibration step.
Used to exit calibration between steps.
Perform the next calibration step.
Store the new calibration constants
Because of the complexity of this procedure, it is highly recommended that the process be automated. See Figure 3-9 for a MET/CAL code fragment that demonstrates an automated approach.
The equipment listed in Table 3-10 is required for calibration of the ac current function.
(The equipment is also listed in the consolidated table, Table 3-1.) Refer to Figure 3-8 for the proper connections.
Quan.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Table 3-10. Test Equipment Required for Calibrating AC Current
Manufacturer
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Fluke
Model
5500A/LEADS
PN 900394
5790A
A40-10 mA
A40-200 mA
A40-2A
A40A-20A
792A-7004
Equipment
Test lead set
Type N to dual banana adapter
AC Measurement Standard
Current Shunt, 10 mA
Current Shunt, 200 mA
Current Shunt, 2 A
Current Shunt, 20 A
A40 Current Shunt Adapter
3-15
5520A
Service Manual
Step
11
12
13
14
9
10
7
8
15
16
17
18
19
3
4
1
2
5
6
20
21
22
23
24
25
Amplitude
3.29990 mA
0.33000 mA
3.00000 mA
3.00000 mA
0.30000 mA
0.30000 mA
0.30000 mA
30.0000 mA
30.0000 mA
30.0000 mA
300.000 mA
300.000 mA
300.000 mA
2.00000 A
2.00000 A
2.00000 A
2.00000 A
2.00000 A
2.00000 A
10.0000 A
10.0000 A
10.0000 A
10.0000 A
10.0000 A
10.0000 A
Table 3-11. Calibration Steps for AC Current
5520A Output (AUX HI, LO)
Frequency
100.00 Hz
100.00 Hz
10.00 kHz
30.000 kHz
100.00 Hz
10.00 kHz
Shunt to Use
Fluke A40 10 mA
Fluke A40 10 mA
Fluke A40 10 mA
Fluke A40 10 mA
Fluke A40 10 mA
Fluke A40 10 mA
30.00 kHz
100.00 Hz
10.00 kHz
30.00 kHz
100.00 Hz
10.00 kHz
30.00 kHz
100.00 Hz
Fluke A40 10 mA
Fluke A40 200 mA
Fluke A40 200 mA
Fluke A40 200 mA
Fluke A40 2 A
Fluke A40 2 A
Fluke A40 2 A
Fluke A40 2 A
1000.0 Hz
5000.0 Hz
60.00 Hz
100.00 Hz
Fluke A40 2 A
Fluke A40 2 A
Fluke A40 2 A
Fluke A40 2 A
440.00 Hz
AUX 20A, LO
Fluke A40 2 A
100.00 Hz
500.00 Hz
Fluke A40A 20 A
Fluke A40A 20 A
1000.00 Hz
60.00 Hz
100.00 Hz
440.00 Hz
Fluke A40A 20 A
Fluke A40A 20 A
Fluke A40A 20 A
Fluke A40A 20 A
3-16
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
5790A
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
UUT
5520A CALIBRATOR
Set the 5790A to external guard
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
HI
LO
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
10V PEAK
MAX
A40A Shunt
Input
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20V PK MAX
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
TC 20V PK MAX
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD
Ensure the UUT is connected to the shunt "INPUT"
Figure 3-8. Connections for Calibrating AC Current with a Fluke A40A Shunt
yg129f.eps
3-17
5520A
Service Manual
Fluke Corporation - Worldwide Support Center MET/CAL Procedure
=============================================================================
INSTRUMENT: Sub Fluke 5520A ACI ADJ
DATE: 22-Sep-98
AUTHOR: Gary Bennett, Metrology Specialist
REVISION: 0.6
ADJUSTMENT THRESHOLD: 70%
NUMBER OF TESTS: 1
NUMBER OF LINES: 487
CONFIGURATION: Fluke 5790A
=============================================================================
STEP FSC RANGE NOMINAL TOLERANCE MOD1 MOD2 3 4 CON
# 10 Sep 98 changed Cal_Info? commands to Out? and checked for 10A -
# needs cal_next to get past display; check for 0 out when ACI is done.
#
1.001 ASK- R Q N U C F W
1.002 HEAD AC CURRENT ADJUSTMENT
# Set M[10] to 3mA initially
1.003 MATH M[10] = 0.003
# Reset UUT - get it out of calibration mode.
1.004 IEEE *CLS;*RST; *OPC?[I]
1.005 IEEE ERR?[I$][GTL]
1.006 MATH MEM1 = FLD(MEM2,1,",")
1.007 JMPT
1.008 IEEE CAL_SW?[I][GTL]
1.009 MEME
1.010 JMPZ 1.012
1.011 JMP 1.015
1.012 HEAD WARNING! CALIBRATION SWITCH IS NOT ENABLED.
1.013 DISP The UUT CALIBRATION switch is in NORMAL.
1.013 DISP
1.013 DISP The switch MUST be in ENABLE to store the
1.013 DISP new calibration constants.
1.013 DISP
1.013 DISP Select ENABLE, then press "Advance" to
1.013 DISP continue with the calibration process.
1.014 JMP 1.008
# Reset 5790A standard.
1.015 ACMS *
1.016 5790 * S
1.017 HEAD DCI References
1.018 PIC 552A410m
1.019 IEEE OUT 3.2999mA, 0HZ; OPER; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.020 IEEE [D30000][GTL]
1.021 ACMS G
1.022 5790 A SH N 2W
Figure 3-9. Sample MET/CAL Program
3-18
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
1.023 MATH M[17] = MEM
# Apply nominal -DC Current to A40
1.024 IEEE OUT -3.2999mA, 0HZ; OPER; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.025 IEEE [D5000][GTL]
1.026 ACMS G
1.027 5790 A SH N 2W
1.028 MATH M[17] = (ABS(MEM) + M[17]) / 2
1.029 IEEE OUT .33mA, 0HZ; OPER; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.030 IEEE [D15000][GTL]
1.031 ACMS G
1.032 5790 A SH N 2W
1.033 MATH M[18] = MEM
# Apply nominal -DC Current to A40
1.034 IEEE OUT -.33mA, 0HZ; OPER; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.035 IEEE [D5000][GTL]
1.036 ACMS G
1.037 5790 A SH N 2W
1.038 MATH M[18] = (ABS(MEM) + M[18]) / 2
1.039 IEEE OUT 3mA, 0HZ; OPER; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.040 IEEE [D15000][GTL]
1.041 ACMS G
1.042 5790 A SH N 2W
1.043 MATH M[19] = MEM
# Apply nominal -DC Current to A40
1.044 IEEE OUT -3mA, 0HZ; OPER; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.045 IEEE [D5000][GTL]
1.046 ACMS G
1.047 5790 A SH N 2W
1.048 MATH M[19] = (ABS(MEM) + M[19]) / 2
1.049 IEEE CAL_START MAIN,AI; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.050 IEEE CAL_NEXT; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.051 HEAD Calibrating 3.2999mA @ 100Hz
# cal_next is required for initial start.
# after sending AIG330U if you send cal_next 5520A tries to
# start the cal at that time.
# 3.2999mA @ 100Hz
1.052 IEEE *CLS;OPER; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.053 IEEE [D5000][GTL]
1.054 ACMS G
1.055 5790 A SH N 2W
# Calculate difference between the average value of both polarities of DC
# Current and the applied AC Current.
1.056 MATH M[21] = 0.0032999 - (.0032999 * (1 - (MEM / M[17])))
# Determine measurement frequency to retrieve correct AC-DC difference value.
1.057 IEEE OUT?[I$][GTL]
1.058 MATH M[2] = FLD(MEM2,5,",")
Figure 3-9. Sample MET/CAL Program (cont)
3-19
5520A
Service Manual
# Retrieve AC-DC difference from data file named "A40-10mA"
1.059 DOS get_acdc A40-10mA
1.060 JMPT 1.064
1.061 OPBR An error occurred during get_acdc
1.061 OPBR Press YES to try again or NO to terminate.
1.062 JMPT 1.059
1.063 JMP 1.231
# Correct the calculated value of AC Current by adding the AC-DC difference
# of the A40-series shunt used at the frequency under test
1.064 MATH MEM = (M[21] * MEM) + M[21]
# Store corrected value into the UUT
1.065 IEEE CAL_NEXT [MEM]; *OPC?[I][GTL]
1.066 IEEE ERR?[I$][GTL]
1.067 MATH MEM1 = FLD(MEM2,1,",")
1.068 JMPT 1.231
# ’Ask’ UUT for next value to calibrate
1.069 IEEE CAL_REF?[I][GTL]
Figure 3-9. Sample MET/CAL Program (cont)
3-11. DC Volts Calibration (AUX Output)
To calibrate the auxiliary dc voltage function, use the same technique as previously described for the normal dc voltage output, except use the AUX HI and LO terminals on the UUT. Table 3-12 lists the calibration steps for AUX dc volts.
Step
1
2
3
Table 3-12. Calibration Steps for AUX DC Volts
5520A Output (AUX)
300.000 mV
3.00000 V
7.00000 V
3-12. AC Volts Calibration (AUX Output)
To calibrate the auxiliary ac voltage function, use the same technique as previously described for the normal ac voltage output, except use the AUX HI and LO terminals on the UUT. Table 3-13 lists the calibration steps for AUX dc volts.
Step
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
Table 3-13. Calibration Steps for AUX Output AC Volts
5520A Output (AUX)
Amplitude Frequency
300.000 mV 100 Hz
300.000 mV
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
5.0000 V
5.0000 V
3.0 V
5 kHz
100 Hz
5 kHz
100 Hz
5 kHz
9.99 Hz
3-20
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
The equipment listed in Table 3-14 is required for calibration of the resistance function.
(The equipment is also listed in the consolidated table, Table 3-1.)
Quan.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Table 3-14. Test Equipment Required for Calibrating Resistance
Manufacturer
Fluke
Hewlett Packard
Fluke
Fluke
Guildline
Guildline
5500A/LEADS
3458A with -002 option
742A-1M
742A-10M
9334/100M
9334/1G
Model Equipment
Test lead set
DMM
Resistance Standard, 1 M
Ω
Resistance Standard, 10 M
Ω
Resistance Standard, 100 M
Ω
Resistance Standard, 1G
Ω
Proceed as follows to calibrate the resistance function:
1.
On the HP 3458A, perform the ACAL (autocal) ALL and MATH NULL functions as described in the HP 3458A user documentation.
2.
Verify that the UUT (Unit Under Test) is in Standby.
3.
Follow the prompt on the Control Display to connect the DMM to the UUT for
4-wire ohms measurement as shown in Figure 3-10.
4.
Press the GO ON softkey and wait for the internal calibration steps to complete.
5.
Measure and enter the values into the UUT for calibration steps 1 through 8 in Table
3-15 as prompted.
6.
Disconnect the DMM from the UUT, and connect it to the Fluke 742A-1M
Resistance Standard as shown in Figure 3-11. Scale the 1 M
Ω
DMM range to the
Resistance Standard as described in the HP3458A user documentation.
7.
Connect the UUT to the DMM in a 2-wire ohms configuration as shown in
Figure 3-12.
8.
Measure and enter the values into the UUT for calibration steps 9 through 11 in Table
3-15 as prompted.
9.
Disconnect the DMM from the UUT, and connect it to the Fluke 742A-10M
Resistance Standard. Scale the 10 M
Ω
DMM range to the Resistance Standard as described in the HP3458A user documentation.
10.
Connect the UUT to the DMM in a 2-wire ohms configuration as shown in
Figure 3-12.
11.
Measure and enter the values into the UUT for calibration steps 12 and 13 in Table 3-
15 as prompted.
12.
Disconnect the DMM from the UUT, and connect it to the Guildline 9334/100M
Resistance Standard as shown in Figure 3-13. Scale the 100 M
Ω
DMM range to the
Resistance Standard as described in the HP3458A user documentation.
13.
Connect the UUT to the DMM in a 2-wire ohms configuration as shown in
Figure 3-12.
3-21
5520A
Service Manual
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Step
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
8
14.
Measure and enter the values into the UUT for calibration steps 14 and 15 in Table 3-
15 as prompted.
15.
Disconnect the DMM from the UUT, and connect it to the Guildline 9334H/1G
Resistance Standard. Scale the 1 G
Ω
DMM range to the Resistance Standard as described in the HP3458A user documentation.
16.
Connect the UUT to the DMM in a 2-wire ohms configuration as shown in
Figure 3-12.
17.
Measure and enter the value into the UUT for calibration step 16 in Table 3-15 as prompted.
18.
Verify that the UUT is in Standby and disconnect the test equipment.
Table 3-15. Calibration Steps for Resistance
5520A Output (4-Wire Ohms, NORMAL and AUX)
1.0000
Ω
11.0000
Ω
110.0000
Ω
0.350000 k
Ω
1.100000 k
Ω
3.50000 k
Ω
11.00000 k
Ω
35.0000 k
Ω
2-Wire Ohms, NORMAL
110.0000 k
Ω
0.350000 M
Ω
1.100000 M
Ω
3.50000 M
Ω
11.00000 M
Ω
35.0000 M
Ω
110.000 M
Ω
400.00 M
Ω
3-22
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
UUT
5520A CALIBRATOR
HP3458A
Set the HP3458A to external guard
Figure 3-10. Four-Wire Resistance Connection
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX yg111f.eps
742A
HP3458A
Set the HP3458A to external guard yg112f.eps
Figure 3-11. Scaling the DMM to a Fluke 742A
3-23
5520A
Service Manual
UUT
5520A CALIBRATOR
HP3458A
Set the HP3458A to external guard
Figure 3-12. Two-Wire Resistance Connection
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX yg113f.eps
P1 P2
HP3458A
Set the HP3458A to external guard
3-24 yg114f.eps
Figure 3-13. Scaling the DMM to a Guildline 9334
The equipment listed in Table 3-16 is required for calibration of the resistance function.
(The equipment is also listed in the consolidated table, Table 3-1.)
Quan.
1
1
Table 3-16. Test Equipment Required for Calibrating Capacitance
Equipment Manufacturer
Fluke
Fluke
Model
PM 9540/BAN
PM 6304C
Cable Set
LCR Meter
Calibration and Verification
Calibration
3
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
11
12
Proceed as follows to calibrate the capacitance function:
1.
Connect the UUT to the LCR meter using the Fluke PM 9540/BAN cables as shown in Figure 3-14. These special cables eliminate the need for a four-wire connection.
Note
Make sure there are no other connections to the 5520A, especially the SCOPE
BNC. Connecting any additional grounds to the 5520A can cause erroneous capacitance outputs.
2.
Select the frequency on the LCR meter per table 3-17.
3.
Measure and enter the values into the UUT for the calibration steps in Table 3-17 as prompted. The right column in the table shows the best stimulus frequency for each calibration point.
4.
Verify that the UUT is in Standby and disconnect the LCR meter.
Step
Table 3-17. Calibration Steps for Capacitance
5520A Output (NORMAL)
5520A Calibration Output Best Stimulus Frequency
200 pF
0.5000 nF
1 kHz
1 kHz
1.1000 nF
3.5000 nF
11.0000 nF
35.000 nF
110.000 nF
0.35000
µ
F
1.10000
µ
F
3.3000
µ
F
11.0000
µ
F
33.000
µ
F
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
100 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
3-25
5520A
Service Manual
UUT
5520A CALIBRATOR
PM6304C
PM9540/BAN Cable
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX yg115f.eps
Figure 3-14. Connections for Calibrating Capacitance
AUX
Output
Terminals
NORMAL
Output
Terminals
5500A CALIBRATOR
1000V
RMS
MAX
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
150V
PK
MAX
TRIG
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD 20A
SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX
STBY
+
7
4
1
/
OPR EARTH SCOPE BOOST
PREV
MENU
8
5
2
9
6
3
µ m n k p
M dBm
W
V
A sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
F
0 • SHIFT ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
Percision
Phase
Meter
CH1
Figure 3-15. Normal Volts and AUX Volts Phase Verification
CH2 yg014f.eps
3-26
Calibration and Verification
Calibration Remote Commands
3
CH2
5500A CALIBRATOR
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20V PK MAX
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
TC 20V PK MAX
STBY
7
4
1
OPR EARTH
8
5
9
6
SCOPE BOOST
µ m dBm
V
PREV
MENU sec
Hz n k
W
A
¡F
¡C
2 3 p
M F
+ / 0 • SHIFT ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
Precision
Phase
Meter
CH1
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL AUX
V, , ,RTD
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
0.1 Ohm shunt placed as closely as possible to the AUX terminals of the 5520A
GUARD
20A
If the Phase Meter LO terminals are not common use a short between NORMAL LO and AUX LO on the 5520A yg015f.eps
Figure 3-16. Volts and Current Phase Verification
3-15. Calibration Remote Commands
Calibration of the 5520A using remote commands is simple. To access the standard calibration steps, simply send the command:
CAL_START MAIN
To jump to specific calibration steps, this command above can be modified by specifying an entry point. The allowable entry points are as shown in Table 3-18.
Table 3-18. Jumping to a Specific Calibration Step in Remote
Entry points for CAL_START MAIN
AC Volts
Thermocouple Measuring
DC Current
AC Current
AUX DC Volts
AUX AC Volts
Resistance
Capacitance
Entry points for CAL_START FACTORY
NORMAL Volts and AUX Volts Phase
Volts and Current Phase
Modifier
AV
TEMPX
ICAL
AI
V2
AVS
R
C
Modifier
PHASE
IPHASE
3-27
5520A
Service Manual
For example, to jump directly to ac volts calibration, send the command:
CAL_START MAIN,AV
To go directly to Resistance calibration, send the command:
CAL_START MAIN,R
These calibration commands can be used with either the IEEE-488 or serial interface. To use the serial interface, and without having to write a calibration program, do the following:
1.
Connect the appropriate COM port from a PC to the 5520A Serial 1 connector, using a Fluke PM8914 cable.
2.
Call up the Terminal program from within Microsoft Windows. Set the communications parameters to match that of the 5520A.
3.
Press
E . At the prompt, type the desired calibration command, e.g.,
CAL_START MAIN
.
The following is an alphabetical list of the IEEE-488/RS-232 remote calibration commands for the 5520A Calibrator (for remote commands pertaining to normal operation of the 5520A, please see the 5520A Operators Manual ). For sorting purposes, this list ignores the * character that precedes the common commands. The remote commands duplicate activities that can be initiated from the front panel in local operation.
IEEE-488 (GPIB) and RS-232 Applicability Each command title listed in this section shares the same remote interface applicability, IEEE-488 (general purpose interface bus, or GPIB) and RS-232 remote operations, and command group: Sequential, Overlapped, and Coupled.
x IEEE-488 xRS-232 xSequential pOverlapped pCoupled
Sequential Commands Commands executed immediately as they are encountered in the data stream are called sequential commands. Anything not overlapped or coupled is sequential.
Overlapped Commands Commands that require additional time to execute are called overlapped commands because they can overlap the next command before completing execution.
Coupled Commands Some commands are coupled commands because they “couple” in a compound command sequence. Care must be taken to be sure the action of one command does not disable the action of a second command and thereby cause a fault.
3-28
Calibration and Verification
Calibration Remote Commands
3
CAL_ABORT
Description: Instruct 5520A to abort calibration procedure after present step
Example: CAL_ABORT
CAL_BACKUP
Description: Skip to next entry point in calibration procedure.
CAL_DATE?
Description: Return a calibration date associated with stored calibration constants.
The date is returned with the same format as the CLOCK command.
Parameter: Which date: MAIN, ZERO, OHMSZERO, SCOPE
Response: The date
CAL_DAYS?
Description: Return the number of days and hours since the last calibration constants were stored.
Parameter: Which date: MAIN, ZERO, OHMSZERO, SCOPE
Response: 1. (Integer) Days
2. (Integer) Hours
CAL_FACT
Description: Set the procedure "fault action" flag. Procedures refer to both calibration and diagnostic procedures. This command is more useful for diagnostics than calibration.
Parameter: (Character) CONT to continue on faults or ABORT to abort on faults
Example: CAL_FACT ABORT (this is the default)
CAL_FACT?
Description: Get the procedure "fault action" flag
Response:
Example:
(Character) CONT or ABORT
ABORT
CAL_FAULT?
Description: Get information about calibration error (if one occurred)
Response: 1. error number (use EXPLAIN? command to interpret)
2. Name of step where error occurred
3-29
5520A
Service Manual
CAL_INFO?
Description: Return message or instructions associated with running step
Response: (String) the message string
CAL_NEXT
Description: Continue a calibration procedure if it is waiting for a CAL_NEXT command.
Parameter: (Optional) reference value (used if it’s waiting for a reference) If the reference value has no unit, the unit is assumed to be that returned by the
CAL_REF? command
Example: CAL_NEXT
CAL_NEXT 2.999987
CAL_REF?
Description: Return nominal value expected for reference entry
Response: 1. The nominal value
2.
The accepted or implied unit
3. Example: 3.000000e+00,V
CAL_SKIP
Description: Skip to next entry point in calibration procedure.
CAL_SECT
Description: Skip to next section of calibration procedure.
CAL_START
Description: Start a calibration procedure
Parameter: 1. Procedure name:
MAIN is the procedure for the 5520A minus any scope cal option
ZERO is the internal procedure to correct zero offsets
OHMSZERO is the internal procedure to touch up resistance offsets
SCOPE is the procedure for the 5520A-SC300 scope cal option
SC600 is the procedure for the 5520A-SC600 scope cal option
DIAG is the diagnostic pseudo-cal procedure
NOT aborts a procedure after the step underway
3-30
Calibration and Verification
Calibration Remote Commands
3
Example:
2. (Optional) name of the step at which to start.
If this parameter is not provided, it starts at the beginning.
CAL_START MAIN
CAL_START MAIN,DVG3_3
CAL_STATE?
Description: Return state of calibration
Response: RUN - Running a calibration step
REF - Waiting for a CAL_NEXT with reference (measurement) value
INS - Instruction available, waiting for a CAL_NEXT
NOT - Not in a calibration procedure (or at end of one)
CAL_STEP?
Description: Return name of step currently running
Response: (Char) the step name
Example: IDAC_RATIO (running IDAC ratio calibration)
NOT (not running a calibration procedure now)
CAL_STORE
Description: Store new calibration constants (CAL switch must be ENABLEd)
CAL_STORE?
Description: Return whether a cal store is needed
Response: 1 is yes, 0 if no
CAL_SW?
Description: Return the setting of the calibration enable switch
Response: (Integer) 1 for enable, 0 for normal
Example: 1
EOFSTR
Description: Sets the End-Of-File character string used for calibration reports.
The maximum length is two characters. The EOF setting is saved in nonvolatile memory.
Parameter: The EOF string (two characters maximum)
3-31
5520A
Service Manual
EOFSTR?
Description: Returns the End-Of-File character string used for calibration reports
Parameter: None
Response: (String) The End-Of-File character string
PR_RPT
Description: Prints a self-calibration report out the selected serial port
Parameter: 1. Type of report to print: STORED, ACTIVE, or CONSTS
2. Format of report: PRINT (designed to be read)
SPREAD (designed to be loaded into a spreadsheet)
3. Calibration interval to be used for instrument specifications in the
report: I90D (90 day specifications) or I1Y (1 year specifications)
4. Serial port out which to print report: HOST or UUT
Example: PR_RPT STORED,PRINT,I90D,HOST
RPT?
Description: Returns a self-calibration report.
Parameter: 1. Type of report to return: STORED, ACTIVE, or CONSTS
2. Format of report: PRINT (designed to be read)
SPREAD (designed to be loaded into a spreadsheet)
3. Calibration interval to be used for instrument specifications in the
report:
I90D (90 day specifications) or I1Y (1 year specifications)
Example: RPT? STORED,PRINT,I90D
RPT_PLEN
Description: Sets the page length used for calibration reports. This setting is stored in nonvolatile memory.
Parameter: Page length
RPT_PLEN?
Description: Returns the page length used for calibration reports.
Parameter: None
Response: (Integer) Page length
3-32
Calibration and Verification
Generating a Calibration Report
3
RPT_STR
Description: Sets the user report string used for calibration reports. The string is stored in nonvolatile memory. The CALIBRATION switch must be set to
ENABLE.
Parameter: String of up to 40 characters
RPT_STR?
Description: Returns the user report string used for calibration reports.
Parameter: None
Response: (String) Up to 40 characters
STOP_PR
Description: Terminates printing a calibration report if one was being printed.
Parameter: None
UNCERT?
Description: Returns specified uncertainties for the present output. If there is no specification for an output, the uncertainty returned is zero.
Parameter: 1. (Optional) The preferred unit in which to express the primary output uncertainty (default is PCT).
2. (Optional) The preferred unit in which to express the secondary output
uncertainty (default is same as primary unit).
Response: 1. (Float) 90 day specified uncertainty of primary output.
2. (Float) 1 year specified uncertainty of primary output.
3. (Character) unit of primary output uncertainty.
4. (Float) 90 day specified uncertainty of secondary output.
5. (Float) 1 year specified uncertainty of secondary output.
6. (Character) unit of secondary output uncertainty.
Example: With a power output of 1V, 1A, 1kHz:
UNCERT?
Returns 2.00E-02,2.10E-02,PCT,4.60E-02,6.00E-02,PCT
3-16. Generating a Calibration Report
Three different calibration reports are available from the 5520A, each one either formatted for printing, or in comma-separated variable format for importation into a spreadsheet. Using the REPORT SETUP softkey under UTILITY FUNCTS / CAL, you select lines per page, calibration interval, type of report, format, and which serial port to use. The specification shown in these reports depends on the interval selected in the
REPORT SETUP menu.
The three types of report are as follows:
•
“stored,” lists output shifts as a result of the most recent stored calibration constants.
3-33
5520A
Service Manual
•
“active,” lists output shifts as a result of a calibration just performed but whose calibration constants are not yet stored.
•
“consts,” which is a listing of the active set of raw calibration constant values.
3-17. Performance Verification Tests
The following tests are used to verify the performance of the 5520A Calibrator. If an outof-tolerance condition is found, the instrument can be re-calibrated using the front panel or the remote interface as described previously in this chapter.
Use the same test equipment and connection methods as used in the preceding calibration procedures.
Zero the 5520A Calibrator before testing by completing “Zeroing the Calibrator” as described next.
3-18. Zeroing the Calibrator
Zeroing recalibrates internal circuitry, most notably dc offsets in all ranges of operation.
To meet the specifications in Chapter 1, zeroing is required every 7 days, or when the
5520A Calibrator ambient temperature changes by more than 5
°
C. There are two zeroing functions: total instrument zero (ZERO) and ohms-only zero (OHMS ZERO). Before performing the verification tests, perform the total instrument zero.
Complete the following procedure to zero the calibrator. (Note: The 5520A Calibrator rear panel CALIBRATION switch does not have to be enabled for this procedure.)
1.
Turn on the Calibrator and allow a warmup period of at least 30 minutes.
2.
Press the
R key.
3.
Install a low-ohm copper short circuit across the 20 A and AUX LO terminals.
4.
Press the
S key, opening the setup menu.
5.
Press the CAL softkey, opening the calibration information menu.
6.
Press the CAL softkey.
7.
Press the ZERO softkey to totally zero the 5520A Calibrator. After the zeroing routine is complete (20 minutes), press the
R key to reset the calibrator.
3-34
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3
3-19. Verifying DC Volts (NORMAL Output)
Verify that the 5520A performance is within the limits in Table 3-19, using the same equipment and techniques specified previously for calibration.
Range
329.9999 mV
329.9999 mV
329.9999 mV
3.299999 V
3.299999 V
3.299999 V
3.299999 V
3.299999 V
32.99999 V
32.99999 V
32.99999 V
32.99999 V
32.99999 V
329.9999 V
329.9999 V
329.9999 V
329.9999 V
1000.000 V
1000.000 V
1000.000 V
1000.000 V
1000.000 V
1000.000 V
Table 3-19. Verification Tests for DC Voltage (NORMAL Output)
Output
0.0000 mV
329.0000 mV
-329.0000 mV
0.000000 V
1.000000 V
-1.000000 V
3.290000 V
-3.290000 V
0.00000 V
10.00000 V
-10.00000 V
32.90000 V
-32.90000 V
50.0000 V
329.0000 V
-50.0000 V
-329.0000 V
334.000 V
900.000 V
1020.000 V
-334.000 V
-900.000 V
-1020.000 V
Lower Limit
-0.0010 mV
328.9941 mV
-329.0059 mV
-0.000002 V
0.999989 V
-1.000011 V
3.289968 V
-3.290032 V
-0.00002 V
9.99988 V
-10.00012 V
32.89965 V
-32.90035V
49.9991 V
328.9949 V
-50.0009 V
-329.0051 V
333.993 V
899.985 V
1019.983 V
-334.007 V
-900.015 V
-1020.017 V
Upper Limit
0.0010 mV
329.0059 mV
-328.9941 mV
0.000002 V
1.000011 V
-0.999989 V
3.290032 V
-3.289968 V
0.00002 V
10.00012 V
-9.99989 V
32.90035 V
-32.89965 V
50.0009 V
329.0051 V
-49.9991 V
-328.9949 V
334.007 V
900.015 V
1020.017 V
-333.993 V
-899.985 V
-1019.983 V
3-35
5520A
Service Manual
3-20. Verifying DC Volts (AUX Output)
Verify that the 5520A performance is within the limits in Table 3-20, using the same equipment and techniques specified previously for calibration.
Range
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
7.0000 V
7.0000 V
Table 3-20. Verification Tests for DC Voltage (AUX Output)
Output
0.000 mV
329.000 mV
-329.000 mV
0.33000 V
3.29000 V
-3.29000 V
7.0000 V
-7.0000 V
Lower Limit
-0.350 mV
328.551 mV
-329.449 mV
0.32955 V
3.28866 V
-3.29134 V
6.9976 V
-7.0025 V
Upper Limit
0.350 mV
329.449 mV
-328.551 mV
0.33045 V
3.29134 V
-3.28866 V
7.0025 V
-6.9976 V
3-21. Verifying DC Current
Verify that the 5520A performance is within the limits in Table 3-22, using the same equipment and techniques specified previously for calibration. Use the shunt values listed in Table 3-21.
Table 3-21. Shunt Values for DC Current Calibration and Verification
Range of Verification Points
±
(0 to 329.000
µ
A)
±
(1.9 mA to 3.29000 mA)
±
(19.0000 mA to 32.9000 mA)
±
(190.000 mA to 329.000 mA)
±
(1.09000 A)
±
(2.00000 A to 20.0000 A)
Shunt
Fluke 742A-1k 1k
Ω
Resistance Standard
Fluke 742A-100 100
Ω
Resistance Standard
Fluke 742A-10 10
Ω
Resistance Standard
Fluke 742A-1 1
Ω
Resistance Standard
Guildline 9230 0.1
Ω
Shunt
Guildline 9230 0.01
Ω
Shunt
3-36
329.999 mA
329.999 mA
329.999 mA
329.999 mA
329.999 mA
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
Range
329.999
µ
A
329.999
µ
A
329.999
µ
A
329.999
µ
A
329.999
µ
A
3.29999 mA
3.29999 mA
3.29999 mA
3.29999 mA
3.29999 mA
32.9999 mA
32.9999 mA
32.9999 mA
32.9999 mA
32.9999 mA
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3
Table 3-22. Verification Tests for DC Current (AUX Output)
0.000 mA
190.000 mA
-190.000 mA
329.000 mA
-329.000 mA
0.00000 A
1.09000 A
-1.09000 A
2.99000 A
-2.99000 A
0.0000 A
10.9000 A
-10.9000 A
20.0000 A
-20.0000 A
Output
0.000
µ
A
190.000
µ
A
-190.000
µ
A
329.000
µ
A
-329.000
µ
A
0.00000 mA
1.90000 mA
-1.90000 mA
3.29000 mA
-3.29000 mA
0.0000 mA
19.0000 mA
-19.0000 mA
32.9000 mA
-32.9000 mA
-0.0025 mA
189.982 mA
-190.018 mA
328.971 mA
-329.029 mA
-0.00004 A
1.08979 A
-1.09021 A
2.98906 A
-2.99094 A
-0.0005 A
10.8954 A
-10.9046 A
19.9833 A
-20.0168 A
Lower Limit
-0.020
µ
A
189.957
µ
A
-190.043
µ
A
328.941
µ
A
-329.059
µ
A
-0.00005 mA
1.89980 mA
-1.90020 mA
3.28969 mA
-3.29031 mA
-0.00025 mA
18.9982 mA
-19.0018 mA
32.8971 mA
-32.9029 mA
0.0025 mA
190.018 mA
-189.982 mA
329.029 mA
-328.971 mA
0.00004 A
1.09021 A
-1.08979 A
2.99094 A
-2.98906 A
0.0005 A
10.9046 A
-10.8954 A
20.0168 A
-19.9833 A
Upper Limit
0.020
µ
A
190.043
µ
A
-189.957
µ
A
329.059
µ
A
-328.941
µ
A
0.00005 mA
1.90020 mA
-1.89980 mA
3.29031 mA
-3.28969 mA
0.00025 mA
19.0018 mA
-18.9982 mA
32.9029 mA
-32.8971 mA
3-37
5520A
Service Manual
Range
3.299999 k
Ω
3.299999 k
Ω
10.99999 k
Ω
10.99999 k
Ω
32.99999 k
Ω
32.99999 k
Ω
32.99999 k
Ω
109.9999 k
Ω
109.9999 k
Ω
329.9999 k
Ω
329.9999 k
Ω
329.9999 k
Ω
1.099999 M
Ω
1.099999 M
Ω
10.9999
Ω
10.9999
Ω
10.9999
Ω
32.9999
Ω
32.9999
Ω
32.9999
Ω
109.9999
Ω
109.9999
Ω
329.9999
Ω
329.9999
Ω
329.9999
Ω
1.099999 k
Ω
1.099999 k
Ω
3.299999 k
Ω
Verify that the 5520A performance is within the limits in Table 3-23, using the same equipment and techniques specified previously for calibration. Use four-wire measurements for values smaller than 110 k
Ω
, then two-wire measurements for higher resistance values.
Table 3-23. Verification Tests for Resistance
Output
1.900000 k
Ω
3.000000 k
Ω
3.30000 k
Ω
10.90000 k
Ω
11.90000 k
Ω
19.00000 k
Ω
30.00000 k
Ω
33.0000 k
Ω
109.0000 k
Ω
119.0000 k
Ω
190.0000 k
Ω
300.0000 k
Ω
0.330000 M
Ω
1.090000 M
Ω
0.0000
Ω
2.0000
Ω
10.9000
Ω
11.9000
Ω
19.0000
Ω
30.0000
Ω
33.0000
Ω
109.0000
Ω
119.0000
Ω
190.0000
Ω
300.0000
Ω
0.330000 k
Ω
1.090000 k
Ω
1.190000 k
Ω
Lower Limit
1.899938 k
Ω
2.999914 k
Ω
3.29991 k
Ω
10.89974 k
Ω
11.89954 k
Ω
18.99938 k
Ω
29.99914 k
Ω
32.9991 k
Ω
108.9974 k
Ω
118.9950 k
Ω
189.9933 k
Ω
299.9905 k
Ω
0.329990 M
Ω
1.089971 M
Ω
-0.0010
Ω
1.9989
Ω
10.8986
Ω
11.8982
Ω
18.9980
Ω
29.9978
Ω
32.9979
Ω
108.9962
Ω
118.9954
Ω
189.9938
Ω
299.9914
Ω
0.329991 k
Ω
1.089974 k
Ω
1.189954 k
Ω
Upper Limit
1.900062 k
Ω
3.000086 k
Ω
3.30009 k
Ω
10.90026 k
Ω
11.90046 k
Ω
19.00062 k
Ω
30.00086 k
Ω
33.0009 k
Ω
109.0026 k
Ω
119.0050 k
Ω
190.0068 k
Ω
300.0095 k
Ω
0.330010 M
Ω
1.090029 M
Ω
0.0010
Ω
2.0011
Ω
10.9014
Ω
11.9018
Ω
19.0020
Ω
30.0023
Ω
33.0021
Ω
109.0038
Ω
119.0046
Ω
190.0062
Ω
300.0086
Ω
0.330009 k
Ω
1.090026 k
Ω
1.190046 k
Ω
3-38
Range
3.299999 M
Ω
3.299999 M
Ω
3.299999 M
Ω
10.99999 M
Ω
10.99999 M
Ω
32.99999 M
Ω
32.99999 M
Ω
32.99999 M
Ω
109.9999 M
Ω
109.9999 M
Ω
329.9999 M
Ω
329.9999 M
Ω
1100.000 M
Ω
1100.000 M
Ω
1100.000 M
Ω
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3
Table 3-23. Verification Tests for Resistance (cont)
Output
1.190000 M
Ω
1.900000 M
Ω
3.000000 M
Ω
3.30000 M
Ω
10.90000 M
Ω
11.90000 M
Ω
19.00000 M
Ω
30.00000 M
Ω
33.0000 M
Ω
109.0000 M
Ω
119.0000 M
Ω
290.0000 M
Ω
400.000 M
Ω
640.000 M
Ω
1090.000 M
Ω
Lower Limit
1.189922 M
Ω
1.899894 M
Ω
2.999850 M
Ω
3.29959 M
Ω
10.89875 M
Ω
11.89512 M
Ω
18.99370 M
Ω
29.99150 M
Ω
32.9838 M
Ω
108.9534 M
Ω
118.6025 M
Ω
289.1750 M
Ω
394.700 M
Ω
631.820 M
Ω
1076.420 M
Ω
Upper Limit
1.190078 M
Ω
1.900106 M
Ω
3.000150 M
Ω
3.30041 M
Ω
10.90125 M
Ω
11.90488 M
Ω
19.00630 M
Ω
30.00850 M
Ω
33.0162 M
Ω
109.0466 M
Ω
119.3975 M
Ω
290.8250 M
Ω
405.300 M
Ω
648.180 M
Ω
1103.580 M
Ω
3-39
5520A
Service Manual
3-23. Verifying AC Voltage (NORMAL Output)
Verify that the 5520A performance is within the limits in Table 3-24, using the same equipment and techniques specified previously for calibration.
Range
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
32.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
Table 3-24. Verification Tests for AC Voltage (NORMAL Output)
Output
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
0.33000 V
0.33000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.000 mV
3.000 mV
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
33.000 mV
33.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
Frequency
10 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
20 kHz
45 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
20 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
500 kHz
45 Hz
20 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
450 kHz
45 Hz
10 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
10 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
Lower Limit
299.950 mV
299.950 mV
299.950 mV
299.947 mV
299.902 mV
299.788 mV
299.450 mV
0.32989 V
0.32989 V
2.83350 V
2.99920 V
2.99952 V
2.99952 V
2.99952 V
2.99946 V
2.994 mV
2.994 mV
28.335 mV
29.976 mV
29.990 mV
29.990 mV
29.990 mV
29.989 mV
29.970 mV
29.898 mV
29.770 mV
32.987 mV
32.987 mV
283.350 mV
299.917 mV
Upper Limit
300.050 mV
300.050 mV
300.050 mV
300.053 mV
300.098 mV
300.212 mV
300.550 mV
0.33011 V
0.33011 V
3.16650 V
3.00080 V
3.00048 V
3.00048 V
3.00048 V
3.00054 V
3.006 mV
3.006 mV
31.665 mV
30.024 mV
30.010 mV
30.010 mV
30.010 mV
30.011 mV
30.030 mV
30.102 mV
30.230 mV
33.013 mV
33.013 mV
316.650 mV
300.083 mV
3-40
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3
Range Output Frequency
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
329.999 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.29000 V
3.3000 V
3.3000 V
30.0000 V
30.0000 V
30.0000 V
30.0000 V
30.0000 V
30.0000 V
30.0000 V
30.0000 V
33.000 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
1020.00 V
33.000 V
300.000 V
300.000 V
300.000 V
300.000 V
300.000 V
200.000 V
330.00 V
1020.00 V
1020.00 V
1020.00 V
1020.00 V
330.00 V
1000.00 V
1000.00 V
1000.00 V
10 kHz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
1020.00 V
1020.00 V
1000.00 V
1020.00 V
8 kHz
1 kHz
1020.00 V 1020.00 V 8 kHz
Note: Typical specification is -24 dB at 2 MHz
10 kHz
45 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
18 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
45 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
20 kHz
50 kHz
90 kHz
45 Hz
50 kHz
100 kHz
450 kHz
2 MHz
45 Hz
10 kHz
9.5 Hz
Table 3-24. Verification Tests for AC Voltage (NORMAL Output) (cont)
Lower Limit Upper Limit
32.989 V
299.953 V
299.953 V
299.946 V
299.928 V
299.922 V
199.630 V
329.91 V
329.91 V
999.74 V
999.79 V
999.79 V
999.74 V
1019.79 V
1019.74 V
2.99920 V
2.99823 V
3.00080 V
3.00178 V
2.99340 V 3.00660 V
0.07500 V (Note)
3.2990 V
3.2990 V
28.3350 V
3.3010 V
3.3010 V
31.6650 V
29.9919 V
29.9957 V
29.9957 V
29.9957 V
29.9928 V
29.9904 V
29.9759 V
32.993 V
30.0082 V
30.0044 V
30.0044 V
30.0044 V
30.0072 V
30.0096 V
30.0241 V
33.007 V
33.011 V
300.047 V
300.047 V
300.054 V
300.072 V
300.078 V
200.370 V
330.09 V
330.09 V
1000.26 V
1000.21 V
1000.21 V
1000.26 V
1020.21 V
1020.27 V
3-41
5520A
Service Manual
3-24. Verifying AC Voltage (AUX Output)
Verify that the 5520A performance is within the limits in Table 3-25, using the same equipment and techniques specified previously for calibration.
Table 3-25. Verification Tests for AC Voltage (AUX Output)
Range
Output, AUX
(Note)
Frequency
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
10.000 mV
10.000 mV
10.000 mV
10.000 mV
10.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
300.000 mV
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
3.29999 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
3.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
Note: set the NORMAL output to 300 mV.
5 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
9.5 Hz
10 Hz
Lower Limit
2.99745 V
2.99410 V
2.98960 V
2.87720 V
4.72500 V
4.99205 V
4.99605 V
4.99605 V
4.99110 V
4.98360 V
9.622 mV
9.622 mV
9.535 mV
9.520 mV
8.700 mV
283.350 mV
299.180 mV
299.390 mV
299.390 mV
299.100 mV
298.650 mV
287.100 mV
2.825 V
2.99505 V
2.99745 V
Upper Limit
3.00255 V
3.00590 V
3.01040 V
3.12280 V
5.27500 V
5.00795 V
5.00395 V
5.00395 V
5.00890 V
5.01640 V
10.378 mV
10.378 mV
10.465 mV
10.480 mV
11.300 mV
316.650 mV
300.820 mV
300.610 mV
300.610 mV
300.900 mV
301.350 mV
312.900 mV
3.175 V
3.00495 V
3.00255 V
3-42
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3
3-25. Verifying AC Current
Verify that the 5520A performance is within the limits in Table 3-27. Use the previously verified UUT dc current function as the dc current source for making ac/dc current transfers with the 5790A. Use the shunt values listed in Table 3-26. See Figure 3-17 for proper equipment connections. For ranges 19 mA to 2 A, refer to Figure 3-7 and above
2 A, refer to Figure 3-8 for proper setup connections.
Table 3-26. Shunt Values for AC Current Verification
Range of Verification Points (rms values)
0 to 329.000
µ
A
1.9 mA to 3.29990 mA
19 mA to 3.3 mA
30.0000 mA to 190 mA
300.000 mA to 2 A
2.99000 A to 20.0000 A
Shunt
1 k
Ω
metal film resistor in a shielded box
200
Ω
metal film resistor in a shielded box
Fluke A40 20 mA Shunt
Fluke A40 200 mA Shunt
Fluke A40 2A Shunt
Fluke A40A 20A Shunt
5790A
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
UUT
5520A CALIBRATOR
Metal film resistor in enclosure
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
10V PEAK
MAX
HI
LO
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20V PK MAX
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
TC 20V PK MAX
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD
Set 5790A to external guard yg128f.eps
Figure 3-17. Connections for Verifying AC Current with a Metal Film Resistor (3.2999 mA and Below)
3-43
5520A
Service Manual
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
Range
329.99
µ
A
329.99
µ
A
329.99
µ
A
329.99
µ
A
329.99
µ
A
329.99
µ
A
329.99
µ
A
329.99
µ
A
329.99
µ
A
329.99
µ
A
329.99
µ
A
329.99
µ
A
329.99
µ
A
3.2999 mA
3.2999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
Table 3-27. Verification Tests for AC Current
0.3300 mA
1.9000 mA
1.9000 mA
1.9000 mA
3.2900 mA
3.2900 mA
3.2900 mA
3.2900 mA
3.2900 mA
3.2900 mA
3.3000 mA
3.3000 mA
Output
33.00
µ
A
33.00
µ
A
33.00
µ
A
190.00
µ
A
190.00
µ
A
190.00
µ
A
190.00
µ
A
329.00
µ
A
329.00
µ
A
329.00
µ
A
329.00
µ
A
329.00
µ
A
329.00
µ
A
0.3300 mA
0.3300 mA
3.3000 mA
19.0000 mA
19.0000 mA
19.0000 mA
32.9000 mA
0.3268 mA
1.8983 mA
1.8921 mA
1.8842 mA
3.2846 mA
3.2872 mA
3.2872 mA
3.2845 mA
3.2765 mA
3.2631 mA
3.297 mA
3.296 mA
Lower Limit
32.87
µ
A
32.60
µ
A
32.20
µ
A
189.71
µ
A
189.71
µ
A
188.66
µ
A
187.32
µ
A
328.37
µ
A
328.57
µ
A
328.57
µ
A
328.03
µ
A
326.83
µ
A
324.65
µ
A
0.3296 mA
0.3293 mA
3.285 mA
18.991 mA
18.967 mA
18.935 mA
32.849 mA
Frequency
30 kHz
1 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
30 kHz
1 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
10 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
1 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
45 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
0.3332 mA
1.9017 mA
1.9079 mA
1.9158 mA
3.2954 mA
3.2928 mA
3.2928 mA
3.2955 mA
3.3035 mA
3.3169 mA
3.303 mA
3.304 mA
Upper Limit
33.13
µ
A
33.40
µ
A
33.80
µ
A
190.29
µ
A
190.29
µ
A
191.34
µ
A
192.68
µ
A
329.63
µ
A
329.43
µ
A
329.43
µ
A
329.97
µ
A
331.17
µ
A
333.35
µ
A
0.3304 mA
0.3307 mA
3.315 mA
19.009 mA
19.033 mA
19.065 mA
32.951 mA
3-44
Range
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
32.999 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
329.99 mA
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
2.99999 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
Table 3-27. Verification Tests for AC Current (cont)
Output
32.9000 mA
32.9000 mA
32.9000 mA
32.9000 mA
33.0000 mA
33.0000 mA
33.0000 mA
190.0000 mA
190.0000 mA
190.0000 mA
329.0000 mA
329.0000 mA
329.0000 mA
329.0000 mA
329.0000 mA
329.0000 mA
0.33000 A
0.33000 A
0.33000 A
1.09000 A
1.09000 A
1.09000 A
1.09000 A
1.09000 A
2.99000 A
2.99000 A
2.99000 A
2.99000 A
2.99000 A
3.3000 A
3.3000 A
3.3000 A
Frequency
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
1 kHz
5 kHz
30 kHz
1 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
10 Hz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
45 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
500 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
Lower Limit
32.886 mA
32.877 mA
32.844 mA
32.791 mA
32.97 mA
32.92 mA
32.69 mA
189.91 mA
189.60 mA
189.19 mA
328.49 mA
328.86 mA
328.86 mA
328.69 mA
328.37 mA
327.75 mA
0.32978 A
0.32735 A
0.31840 A
1.08827 A
1.08951 A
1.08951 A
1.08355 A
1.06320 A
2.98542 A
2.98840 A
2.98840 A
2.97405 A
2.92520 A
3.2954 A
3.2954 A
3.2155 A
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3
Upper Limit
32.914 mA
32.923 mA
32.956 mA
33.009 mA
33.03 mA
33.08 mA
33.31 mA
190.09 mA
190.40 mA
190.81 mA
329.51 mA
329.14 mA
329.14 mA
329.31 mA
329.63 mA
330.25 mA
0.33022 A
0.33265 A
0.34160 A
1.09174 A
1.09049 A
1.09049 A
1.09645 A
1.11680 A
2.99459 A
2.99160 A
2.99160 A
3.00595 A
3.05480 A
3.3046 A
3.3046 A
3.3845 A
3-45
5520A
Service Manual
Range
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
Table 3-27. Verification Tests for AC Current (cont)
Output
10.9000 A
10.9000 A
10.9000 A
10.9000 A
10.9000 A
20.0000 A
20.0000 A
20.0000 A
20.0000 A
20.0000 A
Frequency
45 Hz
65 Hz
500 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
45 Hz
65 Hz
500 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
Lower Limit
10.8926 A
10.8926 A
10.8893 A
10.8893 A
10.6255 A
19.9750 A
19.9750 A
19.9690 A
19.9690 A
19.4950 A
Upper Limit
10.9075 A
10.9075 A
10.9107 A
10.9107 A
11.1745 A
20.0250 A
20.0250 A
20.0310 A
20.0310 A
20.5050 A
Range
0.3999 nF
0.3999 nF
1.0999 nF
1.0999 nF
1.0999 nF
3.2999 nF
10.9999 nF
10.9999 nF
32.9999 nF
109.999 nF
109.999 nF
329.999 nF
329.999 nF
Verify that the 5520A performance is within the limits in Table 3-28. Use the PM 6304C
RCL Meter directly for capacitance values up to and including 109.000
µ
F. Above
109.000
µ
F, you must use a timed charge up routine with a constant current source in order to achieve the required test uncertainty ratio.
To verify capacitance greater than 109.000
µ
F, see the section titled “200
µ
F to 110 mF
Capacitance Verification” found later in this chapter.
0.1900 nF
0.3500 nF
0.4800 nF
0.6000 nF
1.0000 nF
2.0000 nF
7.0000 nF
10.9000 nF
20.0000 nF
70.000 nF
109.000 nF
200.000 nF
300.000 nF
Table 3-28. Verification Tests for Capacitance
Output
Test Frequency or
Current
5 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
Lower Limit
0.1793 nF
0.3387 nF
0.4682 nF
0.5877 nF
0.9862 nF
1.9824 nF
6.9767 nF
10.8693 nF
19.8620 nF
69.767 nF
108.693 nF
199.320 nF
299.130 nF
Upper Limit
0.2007 nF
0.3613 nF
0.4918 nF
0.6123 nF
1.0138 nF
2.0176 nF
7.0233 nF
10.9307 nF
20.1380 nF
70.233 nF
109.307 nF
200.680 nF
300.870 nF
3-46
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3
Range
1.09999
µ
F
1.09999
µ
F
3.29999
µ
F
3.29999
µ
F
10.9999
µ
F
10.9999
µ
F
32.9999
µ
F
32.9999
µ
F
109.999
µ
F
109.999
µ
F
329.999
µ
F
329.999
µ
F
1.09999 mF
1.09999 mF
1.09999 mF
3.2999 mF
3.2999 mF
3.2999 mF
10.9999 mF
10.9999 mF
32.9999 mF
32.9999 mF
110.000 mF
110.000 mF
0.70000
µ
F
1.09000
µ
F
2.00000
µ
F
3.00000
µ
F
7.0000
µ
F
10.9000
µ
F
20.0000
µ
F
30.0000
µ
F
70.000
µ
F
109.000
µ
F
200.000
µ
F
300.000
µ
F
0.33000 mF
0.70000 mF
1.09000 mF
1.1000 mF
2.0000 mF
3.0000 mF
3.3000 mF
10.9000 mF
20.0000 mF
30.0000 mF
33.000 mF
110.000 mF
Table 3-28. Verification Tests for Capacitance (cont)
Output
Test Frequency or
Current
100 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
50 Hz
50 Hz
54
µΑ
dc
80
µΑ
dc
90
µΑ
dc
180
µΑ
dc
270
µΑ
dc
270
µΑ
dc
540
µΑ
dc
800
µΑ
dc
900
µΑ
dc
2.7 mA dc
5.4 mA dc
8.0 mA dc
9.0 mA dc
27.0 mA dc
Lower Limit
0.69767
µ
F
1.08693
µ
F
1.99320
µ
F
2.99130
µ
F
6.9767
µ
F
10.8693
µ
F
19.9100
µ
F
29.8800
µ
F
69.662
µ
F
108.529
µ
F
199.020
µ
F
298.680
µ
F
0.32788 mF
0.69662 mF
1.08529 mF
1.0933 mF
1.9902 mF
2.9868 mF
3.2788 mF
10.8529 mF
19.8300 mF
29.7600 mF
32.570 mF
108.800 mF
Upper Limit
0.70233
µ
F
1.09307
µ
F
2.00680
µ
F
3.00870
µ
F
7.0233
µ
F
10.9307
µ
F
20.0900
µ
F
30.1200
µ
F
70.338
µ
F
109.471
µ
F
200.980
µ
F
301.320
µ
F
0.33212 mF
0.70338 mF
1.09471 mF
1.1067 mF
2.0098 mF
3.0132 mF
3.3212 mF
10.9471 mF
20.1700 mF
30.2400 mF
33.430 mF
111.200 mF
µ
F to 110 mF Capacitance Verification
The 5520A calibrator can source capacitance values much larger than what most RCL meters can measure. The method described below uses a dc current from a precision current source and a high speed sampling digital multimeter to verify the 5520A capacitance outputs from 200
µ
F to 110 mF.
By definition, capacitance is the product of an applied current and the ratio of the charging time to the charging voltage:
C
=
I
*
∆
t
∆
v
3-47
5520A
Service Manual
A technique for measuring capacitance is to apply a known current across the capacitor and measure the voltage change over a known time interval.
Table 3-29. Test Equipment Required for High-value Capacitance Measurement
Quan.
Manufacturer Model Equipment
1
1
Fluke
Hewlett Packard
5500A/LEADS
3458A
Test lead set
DMM
1 Fluke 5700A Calibrator
Computer control of the instruments is highly recommended to eliminate manual timing uncertainties.
Note
For this technique, the amplitude of the current is chosen to limit compliance voltage across the capacitor under test to < 3 V over a charging interval of 10 seconds. Refer to Table 3-28 for the dc current required for each capacitance value to be verified.
For proper timing, implementing this routine under computer control is highly recommended. See Figure 3-19. for an example Visual Basic program. If you wish to perform this verification under manual control, the HP 3458A DMM can be programmed from its front panel to give the necessary timing and reading storage. Please refer to the
HP 3458A operator’s documentation for more information.
Proceed as follows to measure high-end capacitance:
1.
Connect the Fluke 5700A, 5520A, HP 3458A DMM and computer as shown in Figure 3-
18 below. See Table 3-29 for the equipment required.
2.
Lock the HP 3458A in the 10 V dc range.
3.
Program the meter to take 100 samples at 1 ms-aperture width and a 100 ms sweep for a total of 10 seconds on a trigger command.
4.
Enter the desired capacitance on the 5520A and place the 5520A into Operate mode.
5.
Enter the predetermined DCI level on the 5700A.
6.
Set the 5700A to Operate.
7.
As soon as the calibrator's remote status indicates a settled condition, your computer program should trigger the HP 3458A reading sequence. Voltage sensing is performed at the 5520A output.
8.
At the completion of the measurement, set the 5700A to Standby and then retrieve the data from the HP 3458A.
Note
If operating under manual control, and you do not activate the 5700A Standby key in a timely manner, either the 5520A or 5700A will automatically trip into
Standby because of an overload condition. This is acceptable and should not affect the readings over the 10 second measurement period.
9.
The capacitance is computed as the product of the dc current and the ratio of the time interval (10 seconds) divided by
(
V final
−
V initial
)
.
3-48
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3
Current Source 5700A
5700A
CALIBRATOR
PC-GPIB Controller
Synthesized Capacitance
Standard 5520A
5520A
CALIBRATOR
HP 3458A (Front)
Figure 3-18. High Value Capacitance Measurement Set-up
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A
SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX yg062f.eps
3-49
5520A
Service Manual
’Initial 3458 Set-up: errmsg = gpibPut(a_3458, "TARM HOLD; DCV 10; APER 1.0e-3; MEM FIFO; SWEEP 0.1, 100; END
ALWAYS")
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
’5700 setup
If (range(stp) > .002) Then ’ 1mF range with LCR Meter, 3mF range with I charge
’ 3458 has already been set-up for measurement; now
’ set up system 5700 for DCI output, set to OPERate
errmsg = gpibPut(a_5700, "CUR_POST AUX; OUT " + Str$(dci(stp)) + " A, 0 Hz")
srcSettled
errmsg = gpibPut(a_5700, "OPER")
srcSettled
Call trig_3458(stp)
errmsg = gpibPut(a_5700, "STBY")
End If
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sub trig_3458 (stp As Integer)
Dim x As Integer, errmsg As String, response As String, no_samples As Integer, deltav
As Single
result = 0
’ all of the voltage data is stuck into this array for optional regression analysis
Dim CapChan As Integer
CapChan = FreeFile
Open "C:\DATA\HICAP." & Format$(Str$(stp), "#") For Output As CapChan
’ this triggers the readings and stores them internally in the 3458
errmsg = gpibPut(a_3458, "TARM SGL")
’ retrieve the number of samples stored - loop until meter is finished taking samples
errmsg = gpibPut(a_3458, "MCOUNT?")
Do
response = Space$(80)
errmsg = gpibGet(a_3458, response)
Loop Until (Len(response) <> 0)
no_samples = Val(response)
’ now retrieve the data and put into array
Print #CapChan, Val(response)
For x = 1 To no_samples
Do
response = Space$(80)
errmsg = gpibGet(a_3458, response)
Figure 3-19. Example Visual Basic Program
3-50
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3
Loop Until (Len(response) <> 0)
capdata(x) = Val(response)
Print #CapChan, Val(response)
Next x
Close #CapChan
’ throw out first and last reading, compute delta v
deltav = capdata(no_samples - 1) - capdata(2)
’ dci() is the current; multiply by the charge time and divide product by change in voltage
’ charge time is (10 seconds - 2*100mS samples - 100mS for 0th sample)
result = (dci(stp) * 9.7) / deltav
End Sub
Figure 3-19. Example Visual Basic Program (cont)
An example of how to compute measurement uncertainty for a 3 mF verification is shown below.
Error Analysis Example: 3 mF tested at 800
µ
A
•
5700A DCI, 2.0 mA range: 50 ppm + 10 nA; at 800
µ
A: 62.5 ppm.
•
HP 3458A DCV, 10 V range: 4.1 ppm of reading + 0.05 ppm of range.
•
HP 3458A time base uncertainty: 100 ppm.
•
UUT (Fluke 5520A) 3.0 mF: 0.44%
While the HP 3458A dc volts accuracy is not specified for sample rates other than NPLC of 100, Fluke testing indicates the DMM is within 25 ppm for the fast sample rate.
Adding the error terms yields (62.5 ppm + 25 ppm + 100 ppm) = 187.5 ppm, or 0.0187%, for a test uncertainty ratio (TUR) > 20:1. The DMM has a number of other error sources: linearity, uncertainty on the 10 V range at 2% of full scale, uncertainty in fast sample mode and internal trigger timing uncertainty are all of concern. Furthermore, the current source accuracy is not independent of the continuously changing compliance voltage.
Fluke tests were performed to quantify each of these error sources, and none were found to contribute more than 0.02%. This is not significant relative to the 5520A capacitance verification. See Table 3-28 in this chapter for capacitance verification tests.
3-51
5520A
Service Manual
3-30. Verifying Thermocouple Simulation (Sourcing)
Verify that the 5520A performance is within the limits in Table 3-30. Use the HP3458A
DMM as the measurement device. Use copper connectors and copper wires.
TC Type
10
µ
V/
°
C
Table 3-30. Verification Tests for Thermocouple Simulation
Output,
°
C
0.00
°
C (0.0000 mV)
100.00
°
C (1.0000 mV)
-100.00
°
C (-1.0000 mV)
1000.00
°
C (10.0000 mV)
-1000.00
°
C (-10.0000 mV)
10000.00
°
C (100.0000 mV)
-10000.00
°
C (-100.0000 mV)
Lower Limit, mV
-0.0030
0.99696
-1.00304
9.99660
-10.0034
99.9930
-100.0070
Upper Limit, mV
0.0030
1.00304
-.99696
10.00340
-9.9966
100.0070
-99.9930
3-31. Verifying Thermocouple Measurement
Verify that the 5520A performance is within the limits in Table 3-31. Use a Fluke 5500A
Calibrator or similar instrument as the millivolt source, connected in parallel with an
HP3458A DMM. At each verification point, use the 5500A error mode controls to adjust the calibrator output for a nominal reading on the DMM. Use copper connectors and copper wires.
TC Type
10
µ
V/
°
C
Table 3-31. Verification Tests for Thermocouple Measurement
Input, mV
0.00
°
C (0.0000 mV)
10000.00
°
C (100.0000 mV)
-10000.00
°
C (-100.0000 mV)
30000.00
°
C (300.0000 mV)
-30000.00
°
C (-300.0000 mV)
Lower Limit,
°
C
-0.30
9999.30
-10000.70
29998.50
-30001.50
Upper Limit,
°
C
0.30
10000.70
-9999.30
30001.50
-29998.50
3-52
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3
3-32. Verifying Phase Accuracy, Volts and AUX Volts
Verify that the 5520A performance is within the limits in Table 3-32, using a precision phase meter see Figure 3-15.
Table 3-32. Verification Tests for Phase Accuracy, V and V
Range, Normal
Output, V
3.29999
32.9999
329.999
Output,
Normal
V
Frequency
3.00000
65 Hz
400 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
65 Hz
400 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
65 Hz
400 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
30.0000
65 Hz
50.000
65 Hz
Range, AUX
Output
3.29999 V
Output, AUX
3.00000 V
Phase
°
0
60
90
Lower Limit
°
Upper Limit
°
57.50
55.00
50.00
89.90
89.75
89.50
87.50
85.00
80.00
89.90
89.90
-0.10
-0.25
-0.50
-2.50
-5.00
-10.00
59.90
59.75
59.50
62.50
65.00
70.00
90.10
90.25
90.50
92.50
95.00
100.00
90.10
90.10
0.10
0.25
0.50
2.50
5.00
10.00
60.10
60.25
60.50
3-53
5520A
Service Manual
3-33. Verifying Phase Accuracy, Volts and Current
Verify that the 5520A performance is within the limits in Table 3-33, using a precision phase meter with a shunt. See Figure 3-16.
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 V
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
329.999 mV
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
32.9999 V
Range, Normal
Output
Table 3-33. Verification Tests for Phase Accuracy, V and I
Output,
Normal Frequency
Range, AUX
Output
Output,
AUX
Phase
°
Lower Limit
°
Upper Limit
°
3.3000 V
3.3000 V
3.3000 V
33.000 V
33.000 V
33.000 V
33.000 V
33.000 V
33.000 V
33.000 V
33.000 V
30.000 mV
30.000 mV
65 Hz
1 kHz
30.000 mV 30 kHz
200.000 mV 65 Hz
50.000 mV
50.000 mV
30.000 mV
65 Hz
400 Hz
65 Hz
200.000 mV 65 Hz
200.000 mV 65 Hz
200.000 mV 400 Hz
3.3000 V 65 Hz
3.3000 V
3.3000 V
3.3000 V
3.3000 V
65 Hz
65 Hz
400 Hz
65 Hz
65 Hz
65 Hz
400 Hz
65 Hz
65 Hz
65 Hz
400 Hz
65 Hz
65 Hz
65 Hz
400 Hz
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
2.99999 A 2.00000 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
5.0000 A
5.0000 A
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
2.99999 A
20.5000 A
2.00000 A
20.0000 A
20.5000 A 20.0000 A
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
2.99999 A
20.5000 A
2.00000 A
5.0000 A
20.5000 A 5.0000 A
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
2.99999 A
20.5000 A
2.00000 A
20.0000 A
20.5000 A 20.0000 A
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
2.99999 A
20.5000 A
2.00000 A
5.0000 A
20.5000 A 5.0000 A
329.99 mA 300.00 mA
2.99999 A
20.5000 A
20.5000 A
2.00000 A
20.0000 A
20.0000 A
0
90
0
0
90
90
90
0
90
90
90
0
90
0
0
60
60
60
0
0
0
60
0
0
0
0
89.90
89.90
89.75
-0.10
-0.10
-0.10
-0.25
89.90
89.90
89.90
89.75
59.90
59.90
59.75
-0.10
-0.10
-0.10
-0.25
89.90
-0.10
-0.50
-10.00
-0.10
-0.10
-0.25
59.90
90.10
90.10
90.25
0.10
0.100
0.10
0.25
90.10
90.10
90.10
90.25
60.10
60.10
60.25
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.25
90.10
0.10
0.50
10.00
0.10
0.10
0.25
60.10
3-54
Calibration and Verification
Performance Verification Tests
3
3-34. Verifying Frequency Accuracy
Verify that the 5520A performance is within the limits in Table 3-34, using a Fluke PM
6680B Frequency Counter.
Table 3-34. Verification Tests for Frequency
Range, Normal
Output, V
Output,
Normal, V
Frequency
3.29999
3.00000
119.00 Hz
120.0 Hz
1000.0 Hz
100.00 kHz
* Frequency accuracy is specified for 1 year
Lower Limit*
118.99970 Hz
119.99970 Hz
999.9975 Hz
99,999.75 Hz
Upper Limit*
119.00030 Hz
120.00031 Hz
1000.0025 Hz
100,000.25 Hz
3-55
5520A
Service Manual
3-56
static awareness
A Message From
Fluke Corporation
Some semiconductors and custom IC's can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during handling. This notice explains how you can minimize the chances of destroying such devices by:
1. Knowing that there is a problem.
2. Leaning the guidelines for handling them.
3. Using the procedures, packaging, and
bench techniques that are recommended.
The following practices should be followed to minimize damage to S.S. (static sensitive) devices.
1. MINIMIZE HANDLING
3. DISCHARGE PERSONAL STATIC BEFORE
HANDLING DEVICES. USE A HIGH RESIS-
TANCE GROUNDING WRIST STRAP.
2. KEEP PARTS IN ORIGINAL CONTAINERS
UNTIL READY FOR USE.
4. HANDLE S.S. DEVICES BY THE BODY.
5. USE STATIC SHIELDING CONTAINERS FOR
HANDLING AND TRANSPORT.
8. WHEN REMOVING PLUG-IN ASSEMBLIES
HANDLE ONLY BY NON-CONDUCTIVE
EDGES AND NEVER TOUCH OPEN EDGE
CONNECTOR EXCEPT AT STATIC-FREE
WORK STATION. PLACING SHORTING
STRIPS ON EDGE CONNECTOR HELPS
PROTECT INSTALLED S.S. DEVICES.
6. DO NOT SLIDE S.S. DEVICES OVER
ANY SURFACE.
7. AVOID PLASTIC,VINYL AND STYROFOAM
IN WORK AREA.
PORTIONS REPRINTED
WITH PERMISSION FROM TEKTRONIX INC.
AND GERNER DYNAMICS, POMONA DIV.
Dow Chemical
9. HANDLE S.S. DEVICES ONLY AT A
STATIC-FREE WORK STATION.
10. ONLY ANTI-STATIC TYPE SOLDER-
SUCKERS SHOULD BE USED.
11. ONLY GROUNDED-TIP SOLDERING
IRONS SHOULD BE USED.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Title Page
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
Removing Analog Modules.............................................................. 4-3
Removing the Main CPU (A9)......................................................... 4-3
4-5.
4-6.
4-7.
4-8.
Removing Rear Panel Assemblies.................................................... 4-4
Removing the Filter PCA (A12)....................................................... 4-4
Removing the Encoder (A2) and Display PCAs .............................. 4-4
Removing the Keyboard and Accessing the Output Block .............. 4-4
4-9.
4-10.
Running Diagnostics ........................................................................ 4-7
4-11.
Testing the Front Panel..................................................................... 4-7
4-12.
Complete List of Error Messages ......................................................... 4-8
4-1
5520A
Service Manual
4-2
Maintenance
Introduction
4
4-1. Introduction
Because this is a high performance instrument, it is not recommended that the user service the boards to the component level. In many different ways it is easy to introduce a subtle long-term stability problem by handling the boards. Access procedures are provided for those who want to replace a faulty module.
4-2. Access Procedures
Use the following procedures to remove the following assemblies:
•
Analog modules.
•
Main CPU (A9).
•
Rear Panel Module (transformer and ac line input components).
•
Filter PCA (A12).
•
Encoder (A2) and display assemblies.
•
Keyboard PCA, and thermocouple I/O pca.
4-3. Removing Analog Modules
Proceed as follows to remove the Voltage (A8), Current (A7), DDS (A6), or Synthesized
Impedance (A5) modules:
1.
Remove the eight Phillips screws from the top cover.
2.
Remove the top cover.
3.
Remove the eight Phillips screws from the guard box cover. The locations of the analog modules are printed on the guard box cover.
4.
Lift off the guard box cover using the finger pull on the rear edge of the cover.
5.
On the desired analog module, release the board edge locking ears.
6.
Lift the board out of its socket in the Motherboard. Lay the board shield side down.
7.
To remove the shield, remove Phillips screw at the center of the shield, then pull the sides of the shield away from the board.
8.
To reinstall the shield, first align one set of tabs then press the other side into place.
4-4. Removing the Main CPU (A9)
You can remove the Main CPU (A9) without removing the rear panel or Filter PCA
(A12). Proceed as follows to remove the Main CPU PCA:
1.
Remove the 3/16
”
jack screws from the SERIAL 1, SERIAL 2, and BOOST
AMPLIFIER connectors.
2.
Remove the 1/4
”
jack screws from the IEEE-488 connector.
3.
Remove the three Phillips screws from the right side of the rear panel.
4.
Remove the ribbon cable from the Main CPU PCA (A9). There is not much room, but the cable is reachable.
5.
Lift out the Main CPU PCA.
4-3
5520A
Service Manual
4-5. Removing Rear Panel Assemblies
Proceed as follows to remove the transformer and the ac line input filter. Figure 4-1 shows an exploded view of the rear panel assemblies.
1.
Remove the two rear handles by removing the six Allen screws from the handles.
2.
Remove the eight Phillips screws from the bottom cover.
3.
Remove the bottom cover.
4.
Remove the three Phillips screws that are accessible through holes in the bottom flange.
5.
Remove the power switch pushrod.
6.
Remove the rear panel. There are three large cables, plus one for fan power. This assumes that you have already removed the Main CPU (A9). If the Main CPU is still installed, there will be one more cable.
4-6. Removing the Filter PCA (A12)
Proceed as follows to remove the Filter PCA (A12):
1.
Remove the top cover and guard box cover as described under “Removing Analog
Modules.”
2.
Remove all the analog modules.
3.
Remove the five Phillips screws from the front side of the rear guard box wall.
4.
Lift out the Filter PCA.
4-7. Removing the Encoder (A2) and Display PCAs
Proceed as follows to remove the Encoder PCA (A2) and display pcas. Figure 4-2 shows an exploded view of the front panel assemblies.
1.
Remove top and bottom covers.
2.
With the bottom side up, unplug all the cables going to the front panel. One of these cables is fastened by a cable tie that must be cut, then replaced with a new one when reassembling.
3.
Remove the two front handles by removing the six Allen screws from the handles.
4.
Remove the front panel. The Encoder PCA (A2) and display pcas are now accessible.
4-8. Removing the Keyboard and Accessing the Output Block
To remove the keyboard and access the output block, proceed as follows:
1.
Do all four steps of the previous procedure.
2.
Unlatch the plastic catches that fasten the front panel together.
3.
Remove the four Phillips screws that are around the output block.
4.
Remove the output cables.
5.
Separate the two main parts of the front panel.
4-4
Maintenance
Access Procedures
4
Figure 4-1. Exploded View of Rear Panel Assemblies
om016f.eps
4-5
5520A
Service Manual
4-6
Figure 4-2. Exploded View of Front Panel Assemblies
om017f.eps
Maintenance
Diagnostic Testing
4
4-9. Diagnostic Testing
5520A internal software provides extensive self-testing capabilities. In case of a malfunction, this is an excellent place to begin testing to isolate a faulty module.
Note
Self-tests should only be run after the 5520A has completed its warm-up.
Access the diagnostics menu as follows:
Press
S followed by UTILITY FUNCTNS, and SELF TEST. The menu presents the following choices:
•
DIAG -- Runs internal diagnostics.
•
FRONT PANEL -- Allows you to test the front panel knob, keys, bell, and displays.
•
SERIAL IF TEST -- Does a loopback test between the two serial ports. For this test, you attach a straight-through serial cable between the two serial ports. At least pins 2,
3, and 5 need to be connected.
•
DIGITAL TEST -- Checks the RAM and bus on the Main CPU (A9).
S presents the following choices: OPTIONS and GO ON. Press GO ON to start diagnostics.
The 5520A prompts you to remove all cables from the front panel outputs. Install a lowohm copper short circuit across the 20 A and Aux Lo terminals.
After you press the GO NO softkey, an automatic sequence of tests begins. Diagnostics runs a set of steps similar to zero calibration and reports similar errors.
4-11. Testing the Front Panel
Press
S followed by UTILITY FUNCTNS, SELF TEST, and FRONT PANEL. The menu presents the following choices: KNOB TEST, KEY TEST BELL TEST, and
DISPLAY. These tests are described next:
•
KNOB TEST -- Tests the knob encoder by showing a cursor that moves when you turn the knob.
•
KEY TEST -- Lets you check the proper functioning of each key. When you press a key, the name of the key shows on the display. Press PREV MENU to exit this test.
•
BELL TEST -- Lets you ring the bell (beeper) for various timed periods.
•
DISPLAY -- Checks all the segments of the two displays.
4-7
5520A
Service Manual
4-12. Complete List of Error Messages
The following is a list of the 5520A Calibrator error messages. The error message format is shown in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1. Error Message Format
Error
Number
0 to 65535
(Message Class : Description)
QYE Query Error, caused by a full input buffer, unterminated action or interrupted action
DDE Device-Specific Error, caused by the 5520A due to some condition, for example, overrange
EXE Execution Error, caused by an element outside of, or inconsistent with, the 5520A capabilities
CME Command Error, caused by incorrect command syntax, unrecognized header, or parameter of the wrong type
F Error is displayed on the front panel as it occurs
R Error is queued to the remote interface as it occurs
S Error causes instrument to go to Standby
D Error causes instrument returns to the power up state
(none) Error is returned to the initiator only (i.e., local initiator or remote initiator)
0
1
(QYE: ) No Error
(DDE:FR ) Error queue overflow
100 (DDE:FR D) Inguard not responding (send)
101 (DDE:FR D) Inguard not responding (recv)
102 (DDE:FR D) Lost sync with inguard
103 (DDE:FR ) Invalid guard xing command
104 (DDE:FR D) Hardware relay trip occurred
105 (DDE:FR D) Inguard got impatient
106 (DDE:FR D) A/D fell asleep
107 (DDE:FR D) Inguard watchdog timeout
108 (DDE:FR ) Inguard is obsolete
109 (DDE:FR D) Inguard parity error
110 (DDE:FR D) Inguard overrun error
111 (DDE:FR D) Inguard framing error
112 (DDE:FR D) Inguard fault error
113 (DDE:FR D) Inguard fault input error
114 (DDE:FR D) Inguard fault detect error
115 (DDE:FR D) Inguard read/write error
300 (DDE: ) Invalid procedure number
301 (DDE: )
302 (DDE: )
303 (DDE: )
No such step in procedure
Can’t change that while busy
Can’t begin/resume cal there
Text characters
Up to 36 text characters
4-8
304 (DDE: )
305 (DDE: )
306 (DDE: )
307 (DDE: )
Wrong unit for reference
Entered value out of bounds
Not waiting for a reference
Continue command ignored
308 (DDE:FR ) Cal constant outside limits
309 (DDE:FR ) Cal try to null failed
310 (DDE:FR D) Sequence failed during cal
311 (DDE:FR D) A/D measurement failed
312 (DDE:FR ) Invalid cal step parameter
313 (DDE: ) Cal switch must be ENABLED
314 (DDE:FR ) Divide by zero encountered
315 (DDE:FR ) Must be in OPER at this step
316 (DDE:FR ) Open thermocouple for RJ cal
317 (DDE:FR ) Bad reference Z or entry
318 (DDE:FR ) Cal takes DAC over top limit
319 (DDE: R ) Zero cal needed every 7 days
320 (DDE: R ) Ohms zero needed every 12 hours
398 (QYE:F ) Unusual cal fault %d
399 QYE:F ) Fault during %s
400 (DDE:FR D) Encoder not responding VERS
401 (DDE:FR D) Encoder not responding COMM
402 (DDE:FR D) Encoder not responding STAT
403 (DDE:FR ) Encoder self-test failed
405 (DDE:FR ) Message over display R side
406 (DDE:FR ) Unmappable character #%d
407 (DDE:FR ) Encoder did not reset
408 (DDE:FR ) Encoder got invalid command
409 (DDE:FR D) Encoder unexpectedly reset
500 (DDE: ) Internal state error
501 (DDE: )
502 (DDE: )
503 (DDE: )
504 (DDE: )
Invalid keyword or choice
Harmonic must be 1 - 50
Frequency must be >= 0
AC magnitude must be > 0
505 (DDE: )
506 (DDE: )
507 (DDE: )
508 (DDE: )
509 (DDE: )
510 (DDE: )
511 (DDE: )
512 (DDE: )
Impedance must be >= 0
Function not available
Value not available
Cannot enter watts by itself
Output exceeds user limits
Duty cycle must be 1.0-99.0
Power factor must be 0.0-1.0
Can’t select that field now
513 (DDE: )
514 (DDE: )
515 (DDE: )
516 (DDE: )
517 (DDE: )
518 (DDE: )
519 (DDE: )
520 (DDE: )
521 (DDE: )
522 (DDE: )
523 (DDE: )
Edit digit out of range
Can’t switch edit field now
Not editing output now dBm only for single sine ACV
Freq too high for non-sine
Value outside locked range
Must specify an output unit
Can’t do two freqs at once
Can’t source 3 values at once
Temp must be degrees C or F
Can’t do that now
Maintenance
Complete List of Error Messages
4
4-9
5520A
Service Manual
526 (DDE: )
527 (DDE: )
528 (DDE: )
529 (DDE: )
530 (DDE: )
531 (DDE: )
532 (DDE: )
533 (DDE: )
Limit too small or large
No changes except RESET now
Offset out of range
Cannot edit to or from 0 Hz
Bad state image - not loaded
TC offset limited to +/-500 C
Can’t go to STBY in Meas TC
Can’t set an offset now
534 (DDE: )
535 (DDE: )
536 (DDE: )
537 (DDE: )
Can’t lock this range
Can’t set phase or PF now
Can’t set wave now
Can’t set harmonic now
538 (DDE: )
539 (DDE: )
Can’t change duty cycle now
Can’t change compensation now
540 (DDE:FR ) Current OUTPUT moved to 5725A
541 (DDE: ) TC ref must be valid TC temp
542 (DDE: ) Can’t turn EARTH on now
543 (DDE: D) STA couldn’t update OTD
544 (DDE: )
545 (DDE: )
Can’t enter W with non-sine
Can’t edit now
546 (DDE: ) Can’t set trigger to that now
547 (DDE: ) Can’t set output imp. now
548 (DDE:FR ) Compensation is now OFF
549 (DDE: )
550 (DDE: )
Period must be >= 0
A report is already printing
551 (DDE: )
552 (DDE: )
553 (DDE: )
554 (DDE: )
555 (DDE: )
556 (DDE: )
557 (DDE: )
558 (DDE: )
ScopeCal option not installed
Not a ScopeCal function
Can’t set marker shape now
Can’t set video parameter now
Marker location out of range
Pulse width must be 1 - 255
Can’t set range directly now
Not a range for this function
559 (DDE: )
560 (DDE: )
Can’t set TD pulse now
ZERO_MEAS only for C or PRES meas
561 (DDE:FR ) That requires a -SC option
562 (DDE:FR ) That requires a -SC600 option
563 (DDE: )
564 (DDE: )
565 (DDE: )
566 (DDE: )
Time limit must be 1s-60s
Can’t set ref. phase now
ZERO_MEAS reading not valid
Can’t set dampen now
567 (DDE: ) Can’t turn EXGRD on now
600 (DDE:FR D) Outguard watchdog timeout
601 (DDE:FR ) Power-up RAM test failed
602 (DDE:FR ) Power-up GPIB test failed
700 (DDE: R ) Saving to NV memory failed
701 (DDE: R ) NV memory invalid
702 DDE: R ) NV invalid so default loaded
703 (DDE: R ) NV obsolete so default loaded
800 (DDE:FR ) Serial parity error %s
801 (DDE:FR ) Serial framing error %s
802 (DDE:FR ) Serial overrun error %s
4-10
803 (DDE:FR ) Serial characters dropped %s
900 (DDE:FR ) Report timeout - aborted
1000 (DDE:FR ) Sequence failed during diag
1200 (DDE:FR ) Sequence name too long
1201 (DDE:FR ) Sequence RAM table full
1202 (DDE:FR ) Sequence name table full
1300 (CME: R ) Bad syntax
1301 (CME: R ) Unknown command
1302 (CME: R ) Bad parameter count
1303 (CME: R ) Bad keyword
1304 (CME: R ) Bad parameter type
1305 (CME: R ) Bad parameter unit
1306 (EXE: R ) Bad parameter value
1307 (QYE: R ) 488.2 I/O deadlock
1308 (QYE: R ) 488.2 interrupted query
1309 (QYE: R ) 488.2 unterminated command
1310 (QYE: R ) 488.2 query after indefinite response
1311 (DDE: R ) Invalid from GPIB interface
1312 (DDE: R ) Invalid from serial interface
1313 (DDE: R ) Service only
1314 (EXE: R ) Parameter too long
1315 (CME: R ) Invalid device trigger
1316 (EXE: R ) Device trigger recursion
1317 (CME: R ) Serial buffer full
1318 (EXE: R ) Bad number
1319 (EXE: R ) Service command failed
1320 (CME: R ) Bad binary number
1321 (CME: R ) Bad binary block
1322 (CME: R ) Bad character
1323 (CME: R ) Bad decimal number
1324 (CME: R ) Exponent magnitude too large
1325 (CME: R ) Bad hexadecimal block
1326 (CME: R ) Bad hexadecimal number
1328 (CME: R ) Bad octal number
1329 (CME: R ) Too many characters
1330 (CME: R ) Bad string
1331 (DDE: R ) OPER not allowed while error pending
1332 (CME:FR ) Can’t change UUT settings now
1500 (DDE:FRS ) Compliance voltage exceeded
1501 (DDE:FRS ) Shunt amp over or underload
1502 (DDE:FRS ) Current Amp Thermal Limit Exceeded
1503 (DDE:FRS ) Output current lim exceeded
1504 (DDE:FRS ) Input V or A limit exceeded
1505 (DDE:FRS ) VDAC counts out of range
1506 (DDE:FRS ) IDAC counts out of range
1507 (DDE:FRS ) AC scale dac counts out of range
1508 (DDE:FRS ) DC scale dac counts out of range
1509 (DDE:FRS ) Frequency dac counts out of range
1510 (DDE:FRS ) IDAC counts (DC OFFSET) out of range
1511 (DDE:FRS ) ZDAC counts out of range
1512 (DDE:FRS ) Can’t read External Clock register
1513 (DDE:FRS ) External Clock too Fast
Maintenance
Complete List of Error Messages
4
4-11
5520A
Service Manual
1514 (DDE:FRS ) External Clock too Slow
1515 (DDE:FR D) Can’t load waveform for scope mode
1600 (DDE:FR D) OPM transition error
1601 (DDE:FR D) TC measurement fault
1602 (DDE:FR D) Z measurement fault
65535 (DDE:FR ) Unknown error %d
4-12
Chapter 5
List of Replaceable Parts
Title Page
5-1.
5-2.
5-1
5520A
Service Manual
5-2
List of Replaceable Parts
Introduction
5
5-1. Introduction
This chapter contains an illustrated list of replaceable parts for Fluke model 5520A
Multi-Product Calibrator. Parts are listed by assembly; alphabetized by reference designator. Each assembly is accompanied by an illustration showing the location of each part and its reference designator. Refer to Tables 5-1 through 5-3.
The parts lists give the following information:
•
Reference designator (for example, “R52”)
•
An indication if the part is subject to damage by static discharge (* near the part description)
•
Description
•
Fluke stock number
•
Total quantity
•
Any special notes (i.e., factory-selected part)
W
Caution
A * symbol indicates a device that may be damaged by static discharge.
5-2. How to Obtain Parts
Electronic components may be ordered directly from the Fluke Corporation and its authorized representatives by using the part number under the heading Fluke Stock No.
Parts price information is available from the Fluke Corporation or its representatives.
To contact Fluke, call one of the following telephone numbers:
•
1-888-99FLUKE (1-888-993-5853) in U.S.A.
•
1-800-36-FLUKE (1-800-363-5853) in Canada
•
+31-402-678-200 in Europe
•
+81-3-3434-0181 Japan
•
+65-738-5655 Singapore
•
+1-425-446-5500 from other countries
Or, visit the Fluke web site at
www.fluke.com
. A list of service centers is available on the Fluke web site.
In the event that the part ordered has been replaced by a new or improved part, the replacement will be accompanied by an explanatory note and installation instructions, if necessary.
To ensure prompt delivery of the correct part, include the following information when you place an order:
•
Instrument model and serial number
•
Part number and revision level of the pca (printed circuit assembly) containing the part.
•
Reference designator
•
Fluke stock number
•
Description (as given under the Description heading)
•
Quantity
5-3
5520A
Service Manual
Table 5-1. Chassis Assembly
Reference
Designator
Description
A6
A7
A8
A1
A2
A3
A5
A9
A12
BT1
H1-12
H13-20
H21-28,H78-81
H58-69
H82-89
H90,H93
H91,H94
MP1
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP6,MP7
MP8,MP9
MP10
MP11,MP12
MP14,MP15,MP
22,MP24
MP25
MP26,MP19
MP29-32
MP33,MP34
MP35,MP36
MP88
*PCB, KEYBOARD
*PCA, ENCODER
*PCA, SUB-ASSY, MOTHERBOARD
*PCA, SYNTHESIZED IMPEDANCE
*PCA, DDS
*PCA, CURRENT
*PCA, SUB-ASSY, VOLTAGE
*PCA, MAIN CPU
*PCA, SUB-ASSY, FILTER
BATTERY,LITHIUM,3.0V,0.560AH
SCREW,CAP,SCKT,SS,8-32,.375
SCREW,FHU,P,LOCK,MAG SS,6-32,.
SCREW,FHU,P,LOCK,MAG SS,6-32,.
SCREW,PH,P,LOCK,SS,6-32,.500
SCREW,PH,P,LOCK,STL,6-32,.250
CONN ACC,COAX,BNC,NUT
CONN ACC,COAX,BNC,LOCKWASHER
ASSEMBLY, CHASSIS, RIVETED
COVER, INSTRUMENT TOP
COVER, INSTRUMENT BOTTOM
COVER, ANALOG, TOP
EXTRUSION, SIDE
INSERT, PLASTIC SIDE
PUSH ROD
TAPE,FOAM,VINYL,.500,.125
BOTTOM FOOT, MOLDED, GRAY #7
AIDE,PCB PULL
LABEL,CALIB, CERTIFICATION SEA
GRND STRIP,CU FINGERS,.32,12.5
GRND STRIP,CU FINGERS,ADHES,.3
GRND STRIP,CU FINGERS,ADHES,.3
TAPE,FOAM,POLYUR,W/LINER,.3125
* Indicates a device that may be damaged by static discharge.
5-4
8
2
12
12
2
1
1
1
12
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
Total
Quantity
Fluke
Stock No.
626934
626736
821439
295105
320093
320093
320051
152140
622719
622743
760868
627232
626694
626892
626900
626918
626710
617255
647146
627213
937086
937271
937276
945241
330449
868786
541730
802306
601770
601762
601762
603134
2
2
1
1
2
4
List of Replaceable Parts
How to Obtain Parts
5
Figure 5-1. Chassis Assembly
5520A (Final Assembly)
(5 of 6) yg018f.eps
5-5
5520A
Service Manual
5-6
Figure 5-1. Chassis Assembly (cont)
5520A (A64)
(4 of 6) yg019f.eps
List of Replaceable Parts
How to Obtain Parts
5
Table 5-2. Front Panel Assembly
Reference
Designator
MP8
MP9
MP11
MP12
MP13
MP14
MP18
MP20
MP21
MP22
MP24
MP31
MP32,MP33
MP34
MP35
MP36
MP38,MP39
MP40,MP41
H1-14,H28
H15-18
H19-27,H36, H37
H29,H60,H61
H38-041,H50-55
H42-45,H63-68
H46-49
H58,H62
H59
H71-76
J1,J2
MP1
MP2
MP3,MP4
MP6
Description
SCREW,PH,P,LOCK,STL,6-32,.250
SCREW,CAP,SCKT,SS,8-32,.375
SCREW,WH,P,THD FORM,STL,5-20,.
BINDING POST-RED
WASHER, LOW THERMAL #8
NUT, LOW THERMAL, 8-32
SCREW,PH,P,LOCK,STL,6-32,.625
BINDING POST-BLACK
BINDING POST-BLUE
SCREW,PH,P,LOCK,SS,6-32,.500
CONN,COAX,BNC(F),CABLE
FRONT PANEL, MODIFIED
PANEL, FRONT
HANDLE,INSTRUMENT, GRAY #7
OUTPUT BLOCK
DECAL, OUTPUT BLOCK
LENS, BEZEL
ADHESIVE, BEZEL
NAMEPLATE
LCD MODULE,16X2 CHAR,TRANSMISS
LCD MODULE,40X2 CHAR,TRANSMISS
DECAL, POWER ON/OFF
DECAL, KEYPAD
ENCODER WHEEL
KNOB, ENCODER, GREY
POWER BUTTON, ON/OFF
CLAMP,TOROID
GASKET, FRONT PANEL
GASKET, CONDUCTIVE
CLAMP,CABLE,.50 ID,ADHESIVE MO
GROMMET,SLOT,RUBBER,.406,.062
MOUNT,SHOCK,FOAM,ADHES,.312,.6
CLIP,FLAT CABLE FERRITE CORE
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
6
4
2
15
4
11
3
10
10
Total
Quantity
Fluke
Stock No.
764548
868794
775338
627080
627072
627064
688629
625731
945246
945258
626983
929179
929182
886312
886304
501593
107687
643822
152140
295105
494641
886382
859939
850334
152181
886379
886366
320051
412858
937284
626108
886333
625704
5-7
5520A
Service Manual
Reference
Designator
MP42,MP43
MP47
MP48
MP55
MP67
MP66
S7
W99
Table 5-2. Front Panel Assembly (cont)
Description
CORE,FERRITE,FLAT CABLE,2.0W,2
CABLE ACCESS,TIE,11.00L,.19W,3
SHIELD, DISPLAY
GROMMET,EXTRUDED,POLYETHYLENE,
TAPE,FOAM,VINYL,.500,.062
BEZEL, FRONT PANEL
KEYPAD, ELASTOMERIC
CABLE, OUTPUT TO MOTHER BOARD
Fluke
Stock No.
643814
501734
661717
854351
282152
945238
1586668
625936
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
Total
Quantity
5-8
List of Replaceable Parts
How to Obtain Parts
5
Figure 5-2. Front Panel Assembly
5520A (A63)
(2 of 6) yg020f.eps
5-9
5520A
Service Manual
5-10
Rear View
Figure 5-2. Front Panel Assembly (cont)
5520A (A63) yg023f.eps
List of Replaceable Parts
How to Obtain Parts
5
H53,H55
H57,H58
H59,H60
H61,H62
H63-66
H92
MP1
MP2
H16,H17
H18-21
H22-25
H26-29
H40,H41
H45-48
H49,H50
H52,H56
MP4,MP5
MP6
MP8
MP10
MP17
Reference
Designator
E1
E2
F1
W
F2,F3
W
FL1
FL10
FL9
H2
H3-5
H6-8
H9-12
Table 5-3. Rear Panel Assembly
Description
BINDING HEAD, PLATED
BINDING POST, STUD, PLATED
FUSE,.25X1.25,5A,250V,SLOW
FUSE,.25X1.25,2.5A,250V,SLOW
FILTER,LINE,250VAC,4A,W/ENTRY
FILTER,LINE,PART,FUSE DRWR W/S
FILTER,LINE,PART,VOLTAGE SELEC
NUT,HEX,BR,1/4-28
SCREW,PH,P,LOCK,STL,6-32,.250
WASHER,FLAT,STL,.160,.281,.010
SCREW,CAP,SCKT,SS,8-32,.375
CONN ACC,MICRO-RIBBON,SCREW LO
SCREW,CAP,SCKT,STL,LOCK,6-32,.
SCREW, MODIFIED
NUT,HEX,ELASTIC STOP,STL,10-32
SCREW,FHU,P,SS,6-32,.312
WASHER,FLAT,STL,.203,.434,.031
WASHER,FLAT,STL,.191,.289,.010
NUT, LOW THERMAL, 8-32
WASHER, LOW THERMAL #8
WASHER,FLAT,SS,.174,.375,.030
CONN ACC,D-SUB,JACKSCREW KIT,.
NUT,EXT LOCK,STL,8-32
WASHER,FLAT,STL,.170,.375,.031
WASHER,LOCK,INTRNL,STL,.267ID
PANEL, REAR
TRANSFORMER COVER, PAINTED
HANDLE,INSTRUMENT, GRAY #7
HOUSING, AIR FILTER
AIR FILTER
SHIM,TRANSFORMER
DECAL, CSA
2
2
2
4
4
4
2
4
3
4
1
3
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Total
Quantity
1
1
4
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
Fluke
Stock No.
102889
102707
109215
854737
944772
660933
944350
867234
110262
111047
850334
851931
944269
944277
944272
110619
152140
111005
295105
859939
176743
944715
195263
110288
110817
626975
647138
886333
937107
945287
625985
864470
5-11
5520A
Service Manual
Reference
Designator
MP18
MP20,MP21
MP22
MP24
MP67
T1
W20
Table 5-3. Rear Panel Assembly (cont)
Description
LABEL,VINYL,1.500,.312
CABLE ACCESS,TIE,4.00L,.10W,.7
LABEL,MYLAR,GROUND SYMBOL
LABEL, CE MARK, BLACK
WIRE, 6" GROUND
TRANSFORMER, POWER, MAIN
FAN ASSEMBLY
Fluke
Stock No.
844712
172080
911388
600707
626116
625720
843029
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
Total
Quantity
5-12
List of Replaceable Parts
How to Obtain Parts
5
Figure 5-3. Rear Panel Assembly
5520A (A65)
(3 of 6) yg021f.eps
5-13
5520A
Service Manual
5-14
Figure 5-4. Wiring Diagram
5520A (Wiring Diagram)
(6 of 6) yg022f.eps
Chapter 6
Oscilloscope Calibration Options
•
Option 5500A-SC600: see page 6-3.
•
Option 5500A-SC300: see page 6-63.
6-1
5520A
Service Manual
6-2
Chapter 6
SC600 Option
Title Page
6-9.
6-10.
6-11.
6-12.
6-13.
6-14.
6-15.
6-16.
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
Volt Specifications ........................................................................... 6-6
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
Edge Specifications .......................................................................... 6-7
Leveled Sine Wave Specifications ................................................... 6-8
Time Marker Specifications ............................................................. 6-9
Wave Generator Specifications ........................................................ 6-9
Pulse Generator Specifications......................................................... 6-10
Trigger Signal Specifications (Pulse Function)................................ 6-10
Trigger Signal Specifications (Time Marker Function) ................... 6-10
Trigger Signal Specifications (Edge Function) ................................ 6-11
Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function) ..... 6-11
Trigger Signal Specifications ........................................................... 6-11
Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications............ 6-11
Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications ......... 6-11
6-17.
Overload Measurement Specifications ............................................. 6-12
6-18.
6-19.
6-20.
6-21.
6-22.
6-23.
6-24.
Leveled Sine Wave Mode ................................................................ 6-12
Time Marker Mode........................................................................... 6-13
Wave Generator Mode ..................................................................... 6-13
Input Impedance Mode (Resistance) ................................................ 6-13
6-25.
6-26.
Input Impedance Mode (Capacitance).............................................. 6-13
Overload Mode................................................................................. 6-13
6-27.
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification.......................... 6-15
6-28.
SC600 Calibration Setup ...................................................................... 6-17
6-29.
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions ........ 6-18
6-30.
Overview of HP3458A Operation .................................................... 6-18
6-31.
6-32.
Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave Measurements ................... 6-18
Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Gen Square Wave Measurements 6-20
6-33.
6-34.
6-35.
DC Voltage Calibration .................................................................... 6-21
AC Voltage Calibration .................................................................... 6-21
Wave Generator Calibration............................................................. 6-22
6-3
5520A
Service Manual
6-36.
6-37.
6-38.
6-39.
Edge Amplitude Calibration............................................................. 6-22
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration...................................... 6-23
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration.......................................... 6-24
Low Frequency Calibration.......................................................... 6-24
6-40.
6-41.
6-42.
MeasZ Calibration ............................................................................ 6-26
6-43.
6-44.
6-45.
6-46.
6-47.
6-48.
6-49.
6-50.
6-51.
6-52.
6-53.
6-54.
6-55.
6-56.
6-57.
6-58.
6-59.
6-60.
6-61.
6-62.
6-63.
6-64.
6-65.
High Frequency Calibration ......................................................... 6-25
Pulse Width Calibration ................................................................... 6-25
DC Voltage Verification................................................................... 6-29
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-29
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-29
AC Voltage Amplitude Verification................................................. 6-31
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-31
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-33
AC Voltage Frequency Verification................................................. 6-34
Edge Amplitude Verification............................................................ 6-35
Edge Frequency Verification............................................................ 6-35
Edge Duty Cycle Verification .......................................................... 6-36
Edge Rise Time Verification ............................................................ 6-36
Edge Abberation Verification........................................................... 6-38
Tunnel Diode Pulser Drive Amplitude Verification......................... 6-39
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification .................................... 6-39
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification..................................... 6-41
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification .................................... 6-42
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification ........................................ 6-44
Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness ............................ 6-44
Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness............................ 6-44
Low Frequency Verification ........................................................ 6-46
High Frequency Verification........................................................ 6-46
6-66.
6-67.
6-68.
6-69.
Time Marker Verification................................................................. 6-48
Wave Generator Verification............................................................ 6-49
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-50
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-50
Pulse Width Verification .................................................................. 6-53
6-70.
6-71.
6-72.
6-73.
Pulse Period Verification.................................................................. 6-54
MeasZ Resistance Verification......................................................... 6-54
MeasZ Capacitance Verification ...................................................... 6-55
Overload Function Verification........................................................ 6-56
6-74.
SC600 Hardware Adjustments.............................................................. 6-57
6-75.
Equipment Required ......................................................................... 6-57
6-76.
6-77.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function ..................................... 6-57
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-57
6-78.
6-79.
6-80.
6-81.
6-82.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave VCO Balance......................... 6-58
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics ............................. 6-58
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function............................. 6-59
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-60
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations ................................................... 6-60
6-4
SC600 Option
Introduction
6
6-1. Introduction
This chapter contains the following information and service procedures for the
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option functions.
•
Specifications
•
Theory of Operation
•
Calibration Procedures
•
Verification Procedures
•
Hardware Adjustments made after Repair
The calibration and verification procedures provide traceable results for all of the SC600 functions as long as they are performed using the recommended equipment. All of the required equipment, along with the minimum specifications, is provided in Table 6-15 under “Equipment Requirements for Calibration and Verification.”
The calibration and verification procedures in this chapter are not the ones Fluke uses at the factory. These procedures have been developed to provide you with the ability to calibrate and verify the SC600 at your own site if necessary. You should review all of the procedures in advance to make sure you have the resources to complete them. It is strongly recommended that, if possible, you return your unit to Fluke for calibration and verification.
Hardware adjustments that are made after repair, at the factory or designated Fluke service centers, are provided in detail.
6-2. Maintenance
There are no maintenance techniques or diagnostic remote commands for the SC600 that are available to users. If your SC600 is not installed or not receiving power, the following error message appears on the display when you press a to access the oscilloscope calibration menus.
om030i.eps
If this message is displayed, and you have the SC600 installed in your Calibrator
Mainframe, you must return the Calibrator Mainframe to Fluke for repair. If you wish to purchase the SC600, contact your Fluke sales representative.
6-5
5520A
Service Manual
6-3. SC600 Specifications
These specifications apply only to the SC600 Option. General specifications that apply to the Calibrator Mainframe (hereafter termed the Calibrator) can be found in Chapter 1.
The specifications are valid under the following conditions:
•
The Calibrator is operated under the conditions specified in Chapter 1.
•
The Calibrator has completed a warm-up period of at least twice the length of time the calibrator was powered off, up to a maximum of 30 minutes.
•
The SC600 Option has been active longer than 5 minutes.
6-4. Volt Specifications
Table 6-1. Volt Specifications
Volt Function dc Signal
50
Ω
Load 1 M
Ω
Load
Square Wave Signal [1]
50
Ω
Load 1 M
Ω
Load
Amplitude Characteristics
Range
Resolution
0 V to
±
6.6 V 0 V to
Range
1 mV to 24.999 mV
25 mV to 109.99 mV
110 mV to 2.1999 V
2.2 V to 10.999 V
11 V to 130 V
±
130 V
±
1 mV to
±
6.6 V p-p
Resolution
1
µ
V
10
µ
V
100
µ
V
1 mV
10 mV
Adjustment Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
±
(0.25% of output +
40
µ
V)
Sequence
Square Wave Frequency Characteristics
Continuously adjustable
±
(0.05% of output +
40
µ
V)
±
(0.25% of output + 40
µ
V)
1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
Typical Aberration
within 4
µ s from 50% of leading/trailing edge
±
10 Hz to 10 kHz
(2.5 ppm of setting)
< (0.5% of output + 100
[1] Selectable positive or negative, zero referenced square wave.
[2] For square wave frequencies above 1 kHz,
±
(0.25% of output + 40
µ
V).
µ
V)
±
±
±
1 mV to
130 V p-p
(0.1% of output +
40
µ
V) [2]
6-6
SC600 Option
SC600 Specifications
6
Table 6-2. Edge Specifications
Rise Time
Edge Characteristics into 50
Amplitude Range (p-p)
Resolution
Adjustment Range
Sequence Values
Ω
Load
≤
300 ps
5.0 mV to 2.5 V
4 digits
±
10% around each sequence value (indicated below)
5 mV, 10 mV, 25 mV, 50 mV, 60 mV, 80 mV, 100 mV, 200 mV,
250 mV, 300 mV, 500 mV, 600 mV,
1 V, 2.5 V
1 kHz to 10 MHz
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
±
(+0 ps / -100 ps)
(2% of output + 200
µ
V)
Frequency Range [1]
Typical Jitter, edge to trigger
Leading Edge Aberrations [2]
Typical Duty Cycle
Tunnel Diode Pulse Drive
< 5 ps (p-p) within 2 ns from 50% of rising edge
2 to 5 ns
5 to 15 ns after 15 ns
±
(2.5 ppm of setting)
< (3% of output + 2 mV)
< (2% of output + 2 mV)
< (1% of output + 2 mV)
< (0.5% of output + 2 mV)
45% to 55%
Square wave at 100 Hz to 100 kHz, with variable amplitude of 60 V to
100 V p-p.
[1] Above 2 MHz rise time specification < 350 ps.
[2] All edge aberration measurements made with Tektronix 11801 mainframe with SD26 input module.
6-7
5520A
Service Manual
6-6. Leveled Sine Wave Specifications
Table 6-3. Leveled Sine Wave Specifications
Leveled Sine Wave
Characteristics into 50
Ω
50 kHz
(reference)
Frequency Range
50 kHz to
100 MHz
100 MHz to
300 MHz
300 MHz to
600 MHz
Amplitude Characteristics (for measuring oscilloscope bandwidth)
Range (p-p) 5 mV to 5.5 V
Resolution
Adjustment Range
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
Flatness (relative to
50 kHz)
Short-Term Amplitude
Stability
Frequency Characteristics
±
(2% of output
+ 300
µ
V) not applicable
< 100 mV: 3 digits
≥
100 mV: 4 digits continuously adjustable
±
(3.5% of output
+ 300
µ
V)
±
(1.5% of output
+ 100
µ
V)
±
(4% of output
+ 300
µ
V)
≤
1% [1]
±
(2% of output
+ 100
µ
V)
±
±
(6% of output
+ 300
µ
V)
(4% of output
+ 100
µ
V)
Resolution
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
±
10 kHz
2.5 ppm
Distortion Characteristics
2nd Harmonic
3rd and Higher
Harmonics
≤
-33 dBc
≤
-38 dBc
[1] Within one hour after reference amplitude setting, provided temperature varies no more than
±
5°C.
6-8
SC600 Option
SC600 Specifications
6
6-7. Time Marker Specifications
Table 6-4. Time Marker Specifications
Time Maker into 50
Ω
5s 50 ms 20 ms to
100 ns
50 ns to
20 ns
10 ns 5 ns to
2 ns
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty at
Cardinal Points, tcal
±
5
°
C
Wave Shape
±
(25 + t *1000) ppm [1]
±
2.5 ppm
±
2.5 ppm
±
2.5 ppm
±
2.5 ppm
Typical Output Level
Typical Jitter (rms) spike or square spike, square, or
20%-pulse
> 1 V p-p [2]
<10 ppm
> 1 V p-p
[2]
< 1 ppm spike or square
> 1 V p-p [2]
< 1 ppm square or sine
> 1 V p-p
[2]
< 1 ppm sine
> 1 V p-p
< 1 ppm
Sequence
Adjustment Range [3]
5-2-1 from 5 s to 2 ns (e.g., 500 ms, 200 ms, 100 ms)
At least
±
10% around each sequence value indicated above.
4 digits Amplitude Resolution
[1] t is the time in seconds.
[2] Typical rise time of square wave and 20%-pulse (20% duty cycle pulse) is < 1.5 ns.
[3] Time marker uncertainty is
±
50 ppm away from the cardinal points.
Table 6-5. Wave Generator Specifications
Wave Generator Characteristics
Square Wave, Sine Wave, and Triangle Wave into 50
Ω
or 1 M
Ω
Amplitude
Range into 1 M
Ω
: 1.8 mV to 55 V p-p into 50
Ω
: 1.8 mV to 2.5 V p-p
±
(3% of p-p output + 100 µV) 1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C,
10 Hz to 10 kHz
Sequence
Typical DC Offset Range
1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
0 to
±
(
≥
40% of p-p amplitude) [1]
Frequency
Range 10 Hz to 100 kHz
Resolution
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency
±
(25 ppm + 15 mHz)
[1] The DC offset plus the wave signal must not exceed 30 V rms.
6-9
5520A
Service Manual
Typical rise/fall times
Available Amplitudes
Pulse Width
Table 6-6. Pulse Generator Specifications
Pulse Generator Characteristics
< 1.5 ns
Positive pulse into 50
Ω
2.5 V, 1 V, 250 mV, 100 mV, 25 mV, 10 mV
Range
Uncertainty [2]
Pulse Period
4 ns to 500 ns [1]
5%
±
2 ns
Range 20 ms to 200 ns (50 Hz to 5 MHz)
Resolution 4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency and width
±
2.5 ppm 1-Year Absolute Uncertainty at Cardinal
Points, tcal
±
5
°
C
[1] Pulse width not to exceed 40% of period.
[2] Pulse width uncertainties for periods below 2
µ s are not specified.
6-10. Trigger Signal Specifications (Pulse Function)
Time Marker
Period
20 ms to 150 ns
Table 6-7. Trigger Signal Specifications (Pulse Function)
Division Ratio [1]
Amplitude into 50
Ω
(p-p) Typical Rise Time
off/1/10/100
≥
1 V
≤
2 ns
6-11. Trigger Signal Specifications (Time Marker Function)
Pulse Period
5 s to 750 ns
34.9 ms to
7.5 ns
34.9 ms to 2 ns
Table 6-8. Trigger Signal Specifications (Time Marker Function)
Division Ratio [1]
off/1 off/10
Amplitude into 50
Ω
(p-p)
≥
1 V
≥
1 V
Typical Rise Time
≤
2 ns
≤
2 ns off/100
≥
1 V
≤
2 ns
6-10
SC600 Option
SC600 Specifications
6
6-12. Trigger Signal Specifications (Edge Function)
Edge Signal
Frequency
1 kHz to 10 MHz
Table 6-9. Trigger Signal Specifications (Edge Function)
Typical Rise Time Division
Ratio
off/1
Typical Amplitude into 50
Ω
(p-p)
≥
1 V
≤
2 ns
Typical Lead Time
40 ns
6-13. Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function)
Table 6-10. Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function)
Edge Signal
Frequency
10 Hz to 10 kHz
Division
Ratio
off/1
Typical Amplitude into 50
Ω
(p-p)
≥
1 V
Typical Rise Time
≤
2 ns
Typical Lead Time
1
µ s
6-14. Trigger Signal Specifications
Trigger Signal Type
Field Formats
Polarity
Amplitude into 50
Ω
(p-p)
Line Marker
Table 6-11. TV Trigger Signal Specifications
Parameters
Selectable NTSC, SECAM, PAL, PAL-M
Selectable inverted or uninverted video
Adjustable 0 to 1.5 V p-p into 50 ohm load, (
±
7% accuracy)
Selectable Line Video Marker
6-15. Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications
Measurement Range
Uncertainty
Table 6-12. Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications
Scope input selected 50
Ω
40
Ω
to 60
Ω
0.1 %
500 k
1 M
Ω
to
Ω
1
0.1 %
.
5 M
Ω
6-16. Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications
Table 6-13. Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications
Scope input selected 1 M
Ω
Measurement Range
Uncertainty
5 pF to 50 pF
±
(5% of input + 0.5 pF) [1]
[1] Measurement made within 30 minutes of capacitance zero reference. SC600 option must be
selected for at least five minutes prior to any capacitance measurement, including the zero process.
6-11
5520A
Service Manual
Source
Voltage
5 V to 9 V
Table 6-14. Overload Measurement Specifications
Typical ‘On’ current indication
100 mA to 180 mA
Typical ‘Off’ current
10 mA
indication
Maximum Time Limit DC or
AC (1 kHz)
setable 1 s to 60 s
6-18. Theory of Operation
The following discussion provides a brief overview of the following SC600 operating modes: voltage, edge, leveled sine wave, time marker, wave generator, video, pulse generator, input impedance, and overload. This discussion will allow you to identify which of the main plug-in boards of the Calibrator Mainframe are defective. Figure 6-1 shows a block diagram of the SC600 Option, also referred to as the A50 board. Functions that are not depicted in the figure are generated from the DDS Assembly (A6 board). For a diagram of all Calibrator Mainframe board assemblies, refer to Figure 2-1.
6-19. Voltage Mode
All signals for the voltage function are generated from the A51 Voltage/Video board, a daughter card to the A50 board. A dc reference voltage is supplied to the A51 board from the A6 DDS board; all dc and ac oscilloscope output voltages are derived from this signal and generated on the A51 board. The output of the A51 board is passed to the A50 Signal board (also attached to the A50 board) and attenuator module and is then cabled to the output connectors on the front panel. The reference dc signal is used to generate both + and - dc and ac signals that are amplified or attenuated to provide the complete range of output signals.
The edge clock originates on the DDS A6 board and is passed to the A50 board. The signal is then shaped and split to generate the fast edge and external trigger signals. The edge signal is passed from the A50 board first to the attenuator assembly (where range attenuation occurs) and then to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel. If turned on, the trigger is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel.
6-21. Leveled Sine Wave Mode
All of the leveled sine wave signals (from 50 kHz to 600 MHz) are produced on the A50 board. The leveled sine wave signal is passed from the A50 board to the on-board attenuator assembly. The attenuator assembly provides range attenuation and also contains a power detector which maintains amplitude flatness across the frequency range.
The signal is then passed to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
6-12
SC600 Option
Theory of Operation
6
6-22. Time Marker Mode
There are 3 primary “ranges” of time marker operation: 5 s to 20 ms, 10 ms to 2
µ s, and
1
µ s to 2 ns.
The 5 s to 20 ms markers are generated on the A6 DDS board and are passed to the A50 board. The signal path is also split to drive the external trigger circuitry on the A50 board.
If turned on, the trigger is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel. The marker signal passing through the A50 board is connected to the attenuator assembly. The signal is then passed to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
The 10 ms to 2
µ s markers are derived from a square wave signal that is generated on the
A6 board and passed to the A50 board for wave shaping and external trigger generation.
If the trigger is turned on, the signal is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel.
The marker signal is passed from the A50 board to the attenuator assembly and then to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
The 1
µ s to 2 ns markers are generated from the leveled sine wave generator on the A50 board. This signal is also split to drive the external trigger circuits. If the trigger is turned on, the signal is then connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel. The other path routes the signal to the marker circuits on the A50 board, where the signal is shaped into the other marker waveforms. The marker signals are passed from the A50 board to the attenuator assembly and on to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
6-23. Wave Generator Mode
All signals for the wavegen function are generated from the A6 board and are passed to the A50 board. They are then sent to the attenuator assembly, where range attenuation occurs. Wavegen signals are then sent to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
Video and pulse generator mode signals are derived entirely from dedicated circuitry on the A50 SC600 option board. If there are faults associated only with these functions, the
A50 board most likely needs replacement.
6-24. Input Impedance Mode (Resistance)
The reference resistors for this mode are on the A50 board, while the DCV reference signal and measuring signals are on the A6 DDS board.
6-25. Input Impedance Mode (Capacitance)
Capacitance measurement circuits are contained on the A50 SC600 Scope Option board, utilizing signals from the leveled sine wave source. If there are faults associated only with capacitance measurement, the A50 board most likely needs replacement.
The source voltage for the overload mode is generated on the A51 Voltage/Video board of the A50 SC600 Option board. The voltage is applied to the external 50
Ω load, and the circuit current is monitored by the A6 DDS board.
6-13
5520A
Service Manual
LF PWB
A6
DDS
50
Ω
Time Mark II
Analog Shaped
2
µ s - 10
µ s
Time Mark
III
Pulse Shaped
20
µ s - 1
µ s
LF Mux.
Trigger
%1,10,100,1000
Oscilloscope
Calibrator
Trigger BNC
External
Clock In
Leveled Sine Wave and Time Mark
IV
Unleveled
Leveled
PLLs
Pwr Amp.
Leveling Loop
Level
Edge
HF Mux.
HF PWB
Step Attenuator Module
SCOPE
Output BNC
HF Mux.
pp detect
10 MHz Clock
A4 SC600 Option om031f.eps
Figure 6-1. SC600 Block Diagram
6-14
SC600 Option
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification
6
6-27. Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification
Table 6-15 lists the equipment, recommended models, and minimum specifications required for each calibration and verification procedure.
Digital
Multimeter
Table 6-15. SC600 Calibration and Verification Equipment
Wave Generator and Edge Amplitude Calibration, AC Voltage and TD Pulser Verification
Instrument Model Minimum Use Specifications
HP 3458A
Adapter
Termination
Pomona #1269
Voltage
Edge
1.8 mV to
±
130 V p-p Uncertainty: 0.06%
4.5 mV to 2.75 V p-p Uncertainty: 0.06%
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug
Feedthrough 50
Ω ±
1% (used with Edge Amplitude
Calibration and AC Voltage Verification)
BNC Cable
High-
Frequency
Digital Storage
Oscilloscope
Attenuator
Adapter
(supplied with SC600)
Edge Rise Time and Aberrations Verification
Frequency 12.5 GHz
Tektronix 11801 with
Tektronix SD-22/26 sampling head, or
Tektronix TDS 820 with
8 GHz bandwidth
Resolution 4.5 mV to 2.75 V
Weinschel 9-10 (SMA) or Weinschel 18W-10 or equivalent
10 dB, 3.5 mm (m/f)
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC600)
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration and Verification
Fluke 5790A
Range 5 mV p-p to 5.5 V p-p
AC
Measurement
Standard
Adapter
Termination
BNC Cable
Pomona #1269
Frequency 50 kHz
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug
Feedthrough 50
Ω ±
1%.
(supplied with SC600)
DC and AC Voltage Calibration and Verification, DC Voltage Verification
HP 3458A Digital
Multimeter
Adapter
Termination
BNC Cable
Pomona #1269
(supplied with SC600)
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug
Feedthrough 50
Ω ±
1%.
6-15
5520A
Service Manual
Table 6-15. SC600 Calibration and Verification Equipment (cont.)
Pulse Width Calibration and Verification
High-Frequency Digital
Storage Oscilloscope
Attenuator
Tektronix 11801 with Tektronix SD-
22/26 sampling head
3 dB, 3.5 mm (m/f)
Adapter (2)
BNC Cable
Frequency
Counter
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m)
(supplied with SC600)
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
PM 6680 with option (PM 9621, PM 9624, or PM 9625) and (PM 9690 or PM 9691)
50 kHz to 600 MHz, < 0.15 ppm uncertainty
Pomona #3288
(supplied with SC600)
BNC(f) to Type N(m) Adapter
BNC Cable
Standard
Adapter
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness (Low Frequency) Calibration and Verification
AC Measurement Fluke 5790A with -03 option
Pomona #3288
Range
Frequency
5 mV p-p to 5.5 V p-p
50 kHz to 10 MHz
BNC(f) to Type N(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC600)
Spectrum Analyzer
Adapter
BNC Cable
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
HP 8590A
Pomona #3288
(supplied with SC600)
BNC(f) to Type N(m)
Pulse Period, Edge Frequency, AC Voltage Frequency Verification
Frequency Counter PM 6680 with option (PM
9690 or PM 9691)
20 ms to 150 ns, 10 Hz to 10 MHz: < 0.15 ppm uncertainty
BNC Cable
Frequency Counter
BNC Cable
(supplied with SC600)
Edge Duty Cycle
PM 6680
Termination
(supplied with SC600)
Overload Functional Verification
Feedthrough 50
Ω ±
1%.
BNC Cable
Resistors
Capacitors
Adapters
BNC Cable
(supplied with SC600)
MeasZ Resistance, Capacitance Verification
1 M
Ω
and 50
Ω
nominal values
50 pF nominal value at the end of BNC(f) connector to connect resistors and capacitors to BNC(f) connector
(supplied with SC600)
6-16
SC600 Option
SC600 Calibration Setup
6
Table 6-15. SC600 Calibration and Verification Equipment (cont.)
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness (High Frequency) Calibration and Verification
Instrument Model
Power Meter Hewlett-Packard 437B Range
Frequency
Power Sensor Hewlett-Packard 8482A Range
Frequency
Power Sensor Hewlett-Packard 8481D Range
Frequency
30 dB
Reference
Attenuator
Adapter
Hewlett-Packard
11708A
(supplied with HP
8481D)
Hewlett-Packard
PN 1250-1474
Range
Frequency
Minimum Use Specifications
-42 to +5.6 dBm
10 - 600 MHz
-20 to +19 dBm
10 - 600 MHz
-42 to -20 dBm
10 - 600 MHz
30 dB
50 MHz
BNC(f) to Type N(f)
BNC Cable
Frequency
Counter
Adapter
(supplied with SC600)
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency, Time Marker Verification
2 ns to 5 s, 50 kHz to 600 MHz: < 0.15 ppm uncertainty PM 6680 with option
(PM 9621, PM 9624, or
PM 9625) and (PM
9690 or PM 9691)
Pomona #3288 BNC(f) to Type N(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC600)
Wave Generator Verification
Fluke 5790A Range 1.8 mV p-p to 55 V p-p AC
Measurement
Standard
Adapter
Termination
BNC Cable
Pomona #1269
(supplied with SC600)
Frequency 10 Hz to 100 kHz
BNC(f) to Double Banana
Feedthrough 50
Ω ±
1%.
6-28. SC600 Calibration Setup
The procedures in this manual have been developed to provide users the ability to calibrate the SC600 at their own site if they are required to do so. It is strongly recommended that, if possible, you return your unit to Fluke for calibration and verification. The Calibrator Mainframe must be fully calibrated prior to performing any of the SC600 calibration procedures.
The hardware adjustments are intended to be one-time adjustments performed in the factory, however, adjustment may be required after repair. Hardware adjustments must be performed prior to calibration. Calibration must be performed after any hardware adjustments. See “Hardware Adjustments” in this chapter.
The AC Voltage function is dependent on the DC Voltage function. Calibration of the
AC Voltage function is required after the DC Voltage is calibrated.
The Calibrator Mainframe must complete a warm-up period and the SC600 must be enabled for at least 5 minutes prior to calibration to allow internal components to
6-17
5520A
Service Manual thermally stabilize. The Calibrator Mainframe warm-up period is at least twice the length of time the calibrator was powered off, up to a maximum of 30 minutes. The SC600 is enabled by pressing the front panel SCOPE key. The green indicator on the SCOPE key will be illuminated when the SC600 is enabled.
Much of the SC600 can be calibrated interactively from the front panel. Enable the
SC600 and wait at least 5 minutes. Enter Scope Cal mode by pressing the front panel
SETUP key, CAL blue softkey, second CAL blue softkey, and SCOPE CAL blue softkey. Entering Scope Cal mode prior to having the SC600 enabled for at least 5 minutes will cause a warning message to be displayed.
All equipment specified for SC600 calibration must be calibrated, certified traceable if traceability is to be maintained, and operating within their normal specified operating environment. It is also important to ensure that the equipment has had sufficient time to warm up prior to its use. Refer to each equipment’s operating manual for details.
Before you begin calibration, you may wish to review all of the procedures in advance to ensure you have the resources to complete them.
The Calibrator Mainframe first prompts the user to calibrate the DC Voltage function. If another function is to be calibrated, alternately press the OPTIONS and NEXT
SECTION blue softkeys until the desired function is reached.
6-29. Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage
Functions
The Voltage, Edge, and Wave Generator functions have square wave voltages that need to be calibrated or verified. The HP3458A digital multimeter can be programmed from either the front panel or over the remote interface to make these measurements.
6-30. Overview of HP3458A Operation
The Hewlett-Packard 3458A digital multimeter is setup as a digitizer to measure the peak-to-peak value of the signal. It is set to DCV, using various analog-to-digital integration times and triggering commands to measure the topline and baseline of the square wave signal.
6-31. Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave Measurements
By controlling the HP 3458A’s integration and sample time, it can be used to make accurate, repeatable measurements of both the topline and baseline of the Voltage Square
Wave up to 10 kHz. To make these measurements, the HP 3458A’s External Trigger function is used in conjunction with the SC600’s External Trigger output. In general, the
HP 3458A is setup to make an analog-to-digital conversion after receiving the falling edge of an external trigger. The conversion does not take place until a time determined by the 3458A “DELAY” command. The actual integration time is set according to the frequency that the DMM is measuring. Table 6-16 below summarizes the DMM settings required to make topline and baseline measurements. Figure 6-2 illustrates the proper connections for this setup.
6-18
SC600 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions
6
Voltage
Input Frequency
100 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
.1
.01
.002
.001
Table 6-16. Voltage HP3458A Settings
NPLC
HP 3458A Settings
DELAY (topline)
.007 s
.0007 s
.00014
.00007
DELAY (baseline)
.012 s
.0012 s
.00024
.00012
For all measurements, the HP 3458A is in DCV, manual ranging, with external trigger enabled. A convenient method to make these measurements from the HP 3458A’s front panel is to program these settings into several of the user defined keys on its front panel.
For example, to make topline measurements at 1 kHz, you would set the DMM to “NPLC
.01; DELAY .0007; TRIG EXT”. To find the average of multiple readings, you can program one of the keys to “MATH OFF; MATH STAT” and then use the “RMATH
MEAN” function to recall the average or mean value.
Note
For this application, if making measurements of a signal > 1 kHz, the HP
3458A has been known to have .05% to .1% peaking in the 100 mV range.
For these signals, lock the HP 3458A to the 1 V range.
HP 3458A (Front)
SC600 Cable
5520A-SC600
5520A CALIBRATOR
BNC(F) to
Double Banana
Adapter
50
Ω
Feedthrough
Termination
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A
SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX
HP 3458A (Rear)
Figure 6-2. Equipment Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave Measurements
ygo54f.eps
6-19
5520A
Service Manual
6-32. Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Gen Square Wave Measurements
The setup to measure the topline and baseline of Edge and Wave Generator signals differs slightly from the Voltage Square Wave method described above. The HP 3458A is triggered by a change in input level instead of an external trigger. The trigger level is set to 1% of the DCV range, with ac coupling of the trigger signal. The delay after the trigger event is also changed for the Edge and Wave Generator functions. See Table 6-17 and
Figure 6-3.
Input Frequency
1 kHz
10 kHz
Table 6-17. Edge and Wave Generator HP3458A Settings
.01
.001
NPLC
HP 3458A Settings
DELAY (topline)
.0002 s
.00002 s
DELAY (baseline)
.0007 s
.00007 s
HP 3458A
SC600 Cable
5520A-SC600
5520A CALIBRATOR
BNC(F) to
Double Banana
Adapter
50
Ω
Feedthrough
Termination
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A
SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX
Figure 6-3. Equipment Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Gen Square Wave Measurements
yg055f.eps
For all measurements, the HP 3458A is in DCV, manual ranging, with level triggering enabled. A convenient method to make these measurements from the HP 3458A’s front panel is to program these settings into several of the user defined keys on its front panel.
For example, to make topline measurements at 1 kHz, you would set the DMM to
“NPLC .01; LEVEL 1; DELAY .0002; TRIG LEVEL”. To find the average of multiple readings, you can program one of the keys to “MATH OFF; MATH STAT” and then use the “RMATH MEAN” function to recall the average or mean value. Refer to Figure 6-3 for the proper connections.
6-20
SC600 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions
6
6-33. DC Voltage Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Note
Calibrating dc voltage requires ac voltage calibration.
Refer to Figure 6-3 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe in Scope Cal mode, DC Voltage section. Then follow these steps to calibrate DC Voltage.
1.
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2.
Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
3.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4.
Ensure the HP 3458A reading is 0.0 V DC
±
10
µ
V. If not, adjust R121 on A41.
R121 is a square single turn pot and is marked on the board located near Q29.
5.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
6.
Calibration voltages 33 V and greater will automatically put the Calibrator
Mainframe output in standby. When this occurs, press
O on the Calibrator
Mainframe to activate the output. Allow the HP 3458A DC voltage reading to stabilize. Enter the reading via the Calibrator Mainframe front panel keypad, then press ENTER.
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and carefully re-enter the reading insuring proper multiplier (i.e., m,
µ
, n, p). If the warning still occurs, repair may be necessary.
7.
Repeat steps 6 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate ac voltage. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
AC voltage must now be calibrated: continue with the next section.
6-34. AC Voltage Calibration
This procedure uses the same equipment and setup as DC Voltage calibration. Refer to
Figure 6-3. DC voltages are measured and entered in the Calibrator Mainframe to calibrate the AC Voltage function.
Set up the Calibrator Mainframe to Cal ACV. Press OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “The next steps calibrate -SC600 ACV”. Then follow these steps to calibrate ac voltage.
1.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
2.
Allow the HP 3458A DC voltage reading to stabilize. Enter the reading via the
Calibrator Mainframe front panel keypad, then press ENTER.
6-21
5520A
Service Manual
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and carefully re-enter the reading insuring proper multiplier (i.e., m, u, n, p). If the warning still occurs, repair may be necessary.
3.
Repeat step 2 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate WAVEGEN. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Within the calibration menu, press the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “WAVEGEN Cal:”. Then follow these steps to calibrate the Wave
Generator:
1.
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2.
Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .0002 for measuring the upper part of the wave form (i.e. topline), and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the lower part of the wave form (i.e. baseline). Manually range lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step.
3.
For each calibration step, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A
MATH functions to retrieve the average or mean value. See “Setup for SC600 Edge and Wave Generator Measurements” for more details.
6-36. Edge Amplitude Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
Refer to Figure 6-3 for the proper setup connections. Press the OPTIONS and NEXT
SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “Set up to measure fast edge amplitude”. Then follow these steps to calibrate edge amplitude:.
1.
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana.
2.
Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .0002 for measuring the upper part of the wave form (i.e. topline), and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the lower part of the wave form (i.e. baseline). Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the baseline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at
6-22
SC600 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions
6 each step. Note that in the EDGE function, the topline is very near 0V, and the baseline is a negative voltage.
3.
For each calibration step, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A
MATH functions to enter the average or mean value. See “Setup for SC600 Edge and
Wave Generator Measurements” for more details.
The “true amplitude” of the wave form is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements, correcting for the load resistance error. To make this correction, multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload)/Rload), where Rload = actual feedthrough termination resistance.
6-37. Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
5790A AC Measurement Standard
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug Adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Press the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “Set up to measure leveled sine amplitude”. Then follow these steps to calibrate Leveled Sine
Wave amplitude.
1.
Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination then to the
5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2.
Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
3.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4.
Press
O to activate operating mode on the Calibrator Mainframe.
5.
Allow the 5790A rms reading to stabilize. Multiply the 5790A reading by (0.5 * (50
+ Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Enter the corrected rms reading via the Calibrator
Mainframe front panel keypad, then press ENTER.
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and calculation and carefully re-enter the corrected rms reading insuring proper multiplier (i.e., m, u, n, p). If the warning still occurs, repair may be necessary.
6.
Repeat step 5 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate Leveled Sine flatness. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
6-23
5520A
Service Manual
6-24
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
HI
LO
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
10V PEAK
MAX
INPUT1 INPUT1 INPUT1 SHUNT INPUT1
2.2 mV
6
7 mV
0
2.2 mV
22 mV
7
220 mV
8
70 mV
1
700 mV
2
2.2 V
9
3 4
220 mV
+/-
5
1kV
ENTER
DELETE
CLEAR
AUTO MAN
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD
VIEW
REF
UTIL
MENUS
SPEC
POWER
I
O
5520A CALIBRATOR
RMS
MAX
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
RMS
MAX
SCOPE
OUT
150V
PK
MAX
TRIG
GUARD
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX
STBY
7
4
1
+ /
OPR EARTH SCOPE BOOST
8
5
2
9
6
3
µ m n k p
M dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU
F sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
0 • SHIFT ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
Figure 6-4. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard
yg034f.eps
6-38. Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration
Leveled Sine Wave flatness calibration is divided into two frequency bands: 50 kHz to 10
MHz (low frequency) and > 10 MHz to 600 MHz (high frequency). The equipment setups are different for each band. Flatness calibration of the low frequency band is made relative to 50 kHz. Flatness calibration of the high frequency band is made relative to 10
MHz.
Leveled Sine Wave flatness is calibrated at multiple amplitudes. Both low and high frequency bands are calibrated at each amplitude. Calibration begins with the low frequency band, then the high frequency band for the first amplitude, followed by the low frequency band, then the high frequency band for the second amplitude, and so on, until the flatness calibration is complete.
Press the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “Set up to measure leveled sine flatness”.
6-39. Low Frequency Calibration
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector to the 5790A WIDEBAND input as described under “Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness”.
Follow these steps to calibrate low frequency Leveled Sine Wave flatness for the amplitude being calibrated.
1.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
2.
Establish the 50 kHz reference:
•
Allow the 5790A rms reading to stabilize.
•
Press the 5790A Set Ref blue softkey. (Clear any previous reference by pressing the 5790A Clear Ref blue softkey prior to setting the new reference if required.)
3.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4.
Adjust the amplitude using the Calibrator Mainframe front panel knob until the
5790A reference deviation matches the 50 kHz reference within 1000 ppm.
5.
Repeat steps 1 to 4 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the reference frequency is now 10 MHz. Continue with the high frequency calibration.
SC600 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions
6
6-40. High Frequency Calibration
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector to the power meter and power sensor as described under “Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness”.
Follow these steps to calibrate high frequency Leveled Sine Wave flatness for the amplitude being calibrated.
1.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
2.
Establish the 10 MHz reference:
•
Press the power meter SHIFT key, then FREQ key and use the arrow keys to enter the power sensor’s 10 MHz Cal Factor. Ensure that the factor is correct, then press the power meter ENTER key.
•
Allow the power meter reading to stabilize.
•
Press the Power meter REL key.
3.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4.
Press the power meter SHIFT key, then FREQ key and use the arrow keys to enter the power sensor’s Cal Factor for the frequency displayed on the Calibrator
Mainframe. Ensure that the factor is correct, then press the power meter ENTER key.
5.
Adjust the amplitude using the Calibrator Mainframe front panel knob until the power sensor reading matches the 10 MHz reference within 0.1%.
6.
Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that either the reference frequency is now 50 kHz or that the next steps calibrate pulse width.
Repeat the low frequency calibration procedure for the next amplitude unless the
Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate pulse width. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
6-41. Pulse Width Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
High Frequency Digital Storage Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with Tektronix SD-
22/26 sampling head
•
3 dB attenuator, 3.5 mm (m/f)
•
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter (2)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
• second BNC cable
Press the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “Set up to measure Pulse Width”. Then follow these steps to calibrate pulse width:
1.
Connect the BNC cable supplied with the SC600 to the Calibrator Mainframe’s
SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to one BNC(f) to 3.5
mm(m) adapter then to the DSO’s sampling head through the 3 dB attenuator.
2.
Using the second BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter and BNC cable, connect the
Calibrator Mainframe’s TRIG OUT connector to the 11801’s Trigger Input.
6-25
5520A
Service Manual
3.
Set the DSO to these parameters:
•
Main Time Base position (initial): 40 ns
•
Vertical scale:
•
Trigger:
200 mV/div, +900 mV offset source = ext; level = 0.5 V; ext atten = x10; slope = +; mode = auto
•
Measurement Function:
4.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
positive width
5.
Adjust the DSO horizontal scale and main time base position until the pulse signal spans between half and the full display. If no pulse is output, increase the pulse width using the Calibrator Mainframe front panel knob until a pulse is output.
6.
If prompted to adjust the pulse width by the Calibrator Mainframe display, adjust the pulse width to as close to 4 ns as possible using the Calibrator Mainframe front panel knob, then press the GO ON blue softkey.
7.
Allow the DSO width reading to stabilize. Enter the reading via the Calibrator
Mainframe front panel keypad, then press ENTER.
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe issues a warning when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs, recheck the setup and carefully re-enter the reading with the proper multiplier (i.e., m, u, n, p). If the warning still occurs, enter a value between the displayed pulse width and the previously entered value. Keep attempting this, moving closer and closer to the displayed pulse width, until the value is accepted. Complete the pulse width calibration procedure. The pulse width calibration procedure must now be repeated until all entered values are accepted the first time without warning.
8.
Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the Calibrator Mainframe display prompts to connect a resistor. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
The MeasZ function is calibrated using resistors and a capacitor of known values. The actual resistance and capacitance values are entered while they are being measure by the
Calibrator Mainframe.
The resistors and capacitor must make a solid connection to a BNC(f) to enable a connection to the end of the BNC cable supplied with the SC600. The resistance and capacitance values must be known at this BNC(f) connector. Fluke uses an HP 3458A
DMM to make a 4-wire ohms measurement at the BNC(f) connector to determine the actual resistance values and an HP 4192A Impedance Analyzer at 10 MHz to determine the actual capacitance value.
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Resistors of known values: 1M
Ω
and 50
Ω
nominal
• adapters to connect resistors to BNC(f) connector
• adapters and capacitor to achieve 50 pF nominal value at the end of BNC(f) connector
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-5 for setup connections.
6-26
BNC(F)
SC600 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Voltage Functions
6
5520A-SC600
5520A
CALIBRATOR
SC600
Cable
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A
SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX yg056f.eps
Figure 6-5. MeasZ Function Calibration Setup
Set the Calibrator Mainframe in Scope Cal mode at the prompt to connect a 50
Ω
resistor.
Then follow these steps to calibrate MeasZ.
1.
Connect the BNC cable to the SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the BNC(f) connector attached to the 50
Ω
resistance.
2.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
3.
Enter the actual 50
Ω
resistance.
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and carefully re-enter the actual resistance insuring proper multiplier (i.e., m, u, n, p). If the warning still occurs, repair may be necessary.
4.
When prompted by the Calibrator Mainframe, disconnect the 50
Ω
resistance and connect the 1M
Ω
resistance to the end of the BNC cable.
5.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
6.
Enter the actual 1M
Ω
resistance.
7.
When prompted for the first reference capacitor by the Calibrator Mainframe, disconnect the 1M
Ω
resistance and leave nothing attached to the end of the BNC cable.
8.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
9.
Enter 0.
10.
When prompted for the second reference capacitor by the Calibrator Mainframe, connect the 50 pF capacitance to the end of the BNC cable.
11.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
12.
Enter the actual 50 pF capacitance.
6-27
5520A
Service Manual
13.
The Calibrator Mainframe will prompt that the calibration is complete. Press the
OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
6-43. Verification
All of the Oscilloscope Calibration functions should be verified at least once per year, or each time the SC600 is calibrated. The verification procedures in this section provide traceable results; however the factory uses different procedures and instruments of higher precision than those described here. The procedures in this manual have been developed to provide users the ability to verify the SC600 at their own site if they are required to do so. Fluke strongly recommends that, if possible, you return your unit to Fluke for calibration and verification.
All equipment specified for SC600 verification must be calibrated, certified traceable if traceability is to be maintained, and operating within their normal specified operating environment. It is also important to ensure that the equipment has had sufficient time to warm up prior to its use. Refer to each equipment’s operating manual for details.
Before you begin verification, you may wish to review all of the procedures in advance to ensure you have the resources to complete them.
All of the SC600 functions are listed in Table 6-18, with the verification technique indicated.
Function
DC Voltage
AC Voltage amplitude
AC Voltage frequency
Edge amplitude
Edge frequency, duty cycle, rise time
Tunnel Diode Pulser amplitude
Leveled sine wave amplitude, frequency, harmonics, and flatness
Time marker period
Wave generator amplitude
Pulse width, period
MeasZ resistance, capacitance
Overload functionality
Table 6-18. Verification Methods for SC600 Functions
Verification Method
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual. See “Voltage and Edge Calibration and Verification” for details.
Procedures provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
Procedure provided in this manual.
6-28
SC600 Option
Verification
6
6-44. DC Voltage Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
For DC voltage verification, refer to Figure 6-3 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu on the display. Then follow these steps to verify the wave generator function.
6-45. Verification at 1 M
Ω
For the 1 M
Ω
verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the
HP 3458A input, using the cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 1 M
Ω
(The blue softkey under
Output @ toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
1.
Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
2.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage listed in Table 6-19. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
3.
Allow the HP 3458A reading to stabilize, then record the HP 3458A reading for each voltage in Table 6-19.
4.
Compare result to the tolerance column.
6-46. Verification at 50
Ω
For the 50
Ω
verification, connect the SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the cable and the 50
Ω
termination connected to the BNC to Banana Plug adapter.
Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 50
Ω
(The blue softkey under
Output @ toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
1.
Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
2.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage listed in Table 6-20. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
3.
Allow the HP 3458A reading to stabilize, then record the HP 3458A reading for each voltage in Table 6-20.
Multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Compare result to the tolerance column.
6-29
5520A
Service Manual
Table 6-19. DC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
HP 3458A Reading (V DC) Calibrator Mainframe output
305 mV
-305 mV
499 mV
-499 mV
0.50 V
-0.50 V
1.35 V
-1.35 V
2.19 V
-2.19 V
2.20 V
-2.20 V
6.60 V
-6.60 V
10.99 V
-10.99 V
11.0 V
-11.0 V
70.5 V
-70.5 V
130.0 V
-130.0 V
0 mV
1.25 mV
-1.25 mV
2.49 mV
-2.49 mV
2.5 mV
-2.5 mV
6.25 mV
-6.25 mV
9.90 mV
-9.90 mV
10.0 mV
-10.0 mV
17.5 mV
-17.5 mV
24.9 mV
-24.9 mV
25.0 mV
-25.0 mV
67.5 mV
-67.5 mV
109.9 mV
-109.9 mV
110 mV
-110 mV
Tolerance (V DC)
0.0001925 V
0.0001925 V
0.0002895 V
0.0002895 V
0.00029 V
0.00029 V
0.000715 V
0.000715 V
0.001135 V
0.001135 V
0.00114 V
0.00114 V
0.00334 V
0.00334 V
0.005535 V
0.005535 V
0.00554 V
0.00554 V
0.03529 V
0.03529 V
0.06504 V
0.06504 V
0.00004 V
4.063E-05 V
4.063E-05 V
4.125E-05 V
4.125E-05 V
4.125E-05 V
4.125E-05 V
4.313E-05 V
4.313E-05 V
4.495E-05 V
4.495E-05 V
0.000045 V
0.000045 V
4.875E-05 V
4.875E-05 V
5.245E-05 V
5.245E-05 V
0.0000525 V
0.0000525 V
7.375E-05 V
7.375E-05 V
9.495E-05 V
9.495E-05 V
0.000095 V
0.000095 V
6-30
SC600 Option
Verification
6
Table 6-20. DC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
Calibrator
Mainframe output
0 mV
2.49 mV
-2.49 mV
9.90 mV
-9.90 mV
24.9 mV
-24.9 mV
109.9 mV
-109.9 mV
499 mV
-499 mV
2.19 V
-2.19 V
6.599 V
-6.599 V
HP 3458A Rdg (V DC)
Reading x correction
Tolerance (V DC)
0.00004 V
4.623E-05 V
4.623E-05 V
6.475E-05 V
6.475E-05 V
0.0001023 V
0.0001023 V
0.0003148 V
0.0003148 V
0.0012875 V
0.0012875 V
0.005515 V
0.005515 V
0.0165375 V
0.0165375 V
6-47. AC Voltage Amplitude Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
•
BNC cable to connect the Calibrator Mainframe TRIG OUT to the HP 3458A Ext
Trig
For ac voltage amplitude verification, refer to Figure 6-2 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu on the display. Then follow these steps to verify the AC Voltage function.
6-48. Verification at 1 M
Ω
For the 1 M
Ω
verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the
HP 3458A input, using the cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter. Connect the Calibrator Mainframe TRIG OUT connector to the HP 3458A Ext Trig connector located on the rear of that instrument.
Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 1 M
Ω
. (The blue softkey under
Output @ toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
.)
6-31
5520A
Service Manual
1.
When making measurements at 1 kHz, set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01,
TRIG EXT, and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the topline of the wave form, and the DELAY to .0012 for measuring the baseline of the wave form. Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step.
2.
Enable the Calibrator Mainframe external trigger by toggling the blue softkey under
TRIG to /1.
3.
Measure the topline first, as indicated in Table 6-21. For each measurement, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A MATH functions to determine the average or mean value. See “Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave
Measurements” for more details.
4.
Measure the baseline of each output after the corresponding topline measurement, as indicated in Table 6-21. The peak-to-peak value is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements. Compare the result to the tolerance column.
5.
When making measurements at the other frequencies, set up the HP 3458A (NPLC and topline and baseline DELAY) per Table 6-16. (See “Setup for SC600 Voltage
Square Wave Measurements.”)
Table 6-21. AC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
Calibrator
Mainframe
Output
(1 kHz, or as noted)
1 mV
-1 mV
HP 3458A
Range
10 mV
-10 mV
25 mV
-25 mV
110 mV
-110 mV
500 mV
-500 mV
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
1 V dc
1 V dc
2.2 V
-2.2 V
11 V
-11 V
10 V dc
10 V dc
10 V dc
10 V dc
130 V
-130 V
1000 V dc
1000 V dc
200 mV, 100 Hz 1 V dc
200 mV, 1 kHz 1 V dc
200 mV, 5 kHz 1 V dc
200 mV, 10 kHz 1 V dc
2.2 V, 100 Hz
2.2 V, 5 kHz
2.2 V, 10 kHz
10 V dc
10 V dc
10 V dc
Topline
Reading
Baseline
Reading Peak-to-Peak Tolerance (
±
V)
0.00224
0.00224
0.01104
0.01104
0.13004
0.13004
0.00024
0.00024
0.00054
0.00054
0.00224
0.00554
0.00554
0.000041
0.000041
0.00005
0.00005
0.000065
0.000065
0.00015
0.00015
0.00054
0.00054
6-32
SC600 Option
Verification
6
6-49. Verification at 50
Ω
For the 50
Ω
verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the
HP 3458A input, using the cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe, the external 50
Ω
termination, and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter. (The 50
Ω
termination is closest to the HP 3458A input.) Connect the Calibrator Mainframe TRIG OUT connector to the HP 3458A Ext Trig connector located on the rear of that instrument. Make sure the
Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 50
Ω
. (The blue softkey under Output @ toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
). Proceed with the following steps:
1.
Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, TRIG EXT, and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the topline of the wave form, and the DELAY to .0012 for measuring the baseline of the wave form. Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step. See Table 6-22.
2.
Enable the Calibrator Mainframe external trigger by toggling the blue softkey under
TRIG to /1.
3.
Measure the topline first, as indicated in Table 6-22. For each measurement, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A MATH functions to determine the average or mean value. See “Setup for SC600 Voltage Square Wave
Measurements” for more details.
4.
Measure the baseline of each output after the corresponding topline measurement, as indicated in Table 6-22. The peak-to-peak value is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements. Compare the result to the tolerance column.
Table 6-22. AC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
Calibrator
Mainframe
Output
(1 kHz)
HP 3458A
Range
1 mV
-1 mV
10 mV
-10 mV
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
25 mV
-25 mV
100 mV dc
100 mV dc
110 mV 100 mV dc
-110 mV 100 mV dc
500 mV 1 V dc
-500 mV 1 V dc
2.2 V
-2.2 V
10 V dc
10 V dc
6.6 V
-6.6 V
10 V dc
10 V dc
Topline
Reading
Baseline
Reading
Peak-to-Peak Peak-to-Peak x
Correction
Tolerance
(
±
V)
0.000043
0.000043
0.000065
0.000065
0.000103
0.000103
0.000315
0.000315
0.00129
0.00129
0.00554
0.00554
0.01654
0.01654
6-33
5520A
Service Manual
6-50. AC Voltage Frequency Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM
9691)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
5520A-SC600
5520A CALIBRATOR SC600 Cable
PM 6680A
At 50 MHZ
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20V PK MAX
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
TC
20V PK MAX yg057f.eps
Figure 6-6. AC Voltage Frequency Verification Setup
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu on the display. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify ac voltage frequency.
1.
Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 1M
Ω
impedance, and filter off.
2.
Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to
PM 6680 channel A.
3.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 2.1 V at each frequency listed in Table
6-23.
4.
Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed in Table 6-23. Compare to the tolerance column of Table 6-23.
Calibrator Mainframe
Frequency
(output @ 2.1 V p-p)
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
Table 6-23. AC Voltage Frequency Verification
PM 6680 Reading
(Frequency) Tolerance
0.000025 Hz
0.00025 Hz
0.0025 Hz
0.025 Hz
6-34
SC600 Option
Verification
6
6-51. Edge Amplitude Verification
For the Edge Amplitude verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the cable supplied with the Calibrator
Mainframe, the external 50
Ω
termination, and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
(The 50
Ω
termination is closest to the HP 3458A input.)
1.
For measurements of a 1 kHz signal, set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01,
LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .0002 for measuring the upper part of the wave form (i.e. topline), and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the lower part of the wave form (i.e. baseline). For measurements of a 10 kHz signal, set the HP
3458A to DCV, NPLC = .001, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .00002
for measuring the topline, and the DELAY to .00007 for measuring the baseline.
2.
Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the baseline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step. Note that in the EDGE function, the topline is very near 0
V, and the baseline is a negative voltage. See Table 6-24.
3.
For each calibration step, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A
MATH functions to enter the average or mean value. See “Setup for SC600 Edge and
Wave Generator Measurements” for more details.
4.
The peak-to-peak value of the wave form is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements, correcting for the load resistance error. To make this correction, multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload)/Rload), where Rload = actual feedthrough termination resistance. Record each reading as indicated in Table 6-24.
Table 6-24. Edge Amplification Verification
Calibrator
Mainframe Edge
Output
HP 3458A
Range
100 mV, 1 kHz 100 mV dc
1.00V, 1 kHz 1 V dc
5 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
10 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
25 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
50 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
100 mV, 10 kHz 1 V dc
500 mV, 10 kHz 1 V dc
1.00 V, 10 kHz 1 V dc
2.5 V, 10 kHz 10 V dc
Topline
Reading
Baseline
Reading
Peak-to-
Peak
Peak-to-
Peak x
Correction
Tolerance
(
±
V)
0.0022
0.0202
0.0003
0.0004
0.0007
0.0012
0.0022
0.0102
0.0202
0.0502
6-52. Edge Frequency Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM
9691)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
6-35
5520A
Service Manual
Refer to Figure 6-6 for proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify Edge frequency.
1.
Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 50
Ω
impedance, and filter off.
2.
Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to
PM 6680 channel A.
3.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 2.5 V at each frequency listed in Table
6-25.
4.
Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed in Table 6-25. Compare to the tolerance column of Table 6-25.
Table 6-25. Edge Frequency Verification
Calibrator Mainframe
Frequency
(output @ 2.5 V p-p)
1 kHz
10 kHz
100 kHz
1 MHz
10 MHz
PM 6680 Reading (Frequency)
0.0025 Hz
0.025 Hz
0.25 Hz
2.5 Hz
25 Hz
Tolerance
6-53. Edge Duty Cycle Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-6 for proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify Edge duty cycle.
1.
Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure duty cycle on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 50
Ω
impedance, and filter off.
2.
Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to
PM 6680 channel A.
3.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 2.5 V at 1 MHz.
4.
Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize. Compare the duty cycle reading to 50%
±
5%.
6-54. Edge Rise Time Verification
This procedure tests the edge function’s rise time. Aberrations are also checked with the
Tektronix 11801 oscilloscope and SD-22/26 sampling head.
The following equipment is used to verify the edge rise time.
•
High Frequency Digital Storage Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with Tektronix SD-
22/26 sampling head
6-36
SC600 Option
Verification
6
•
3 dB attenuator, 3.5 mm (m/f)
•
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter (2)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
• second BNC cable
Connect the BNC cable supplied with the SC600 to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to one BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter then to the DSO’s sampling head through the 3 dB attenuator.
Using the second BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter and BNC cable, connect the Calibrator
Mainframe’s TRIG OUT connector to the 11801’s Trigger Input. Refer to Figure 6-7.
Tek 11801
With SD26 Sampling Head
5520A-SC600
5520A CALIBRATOR
SC600
Cable
3 dB Attenaator
3.5 mm (m/f)
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20V PK MAX
20A
SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
TC 20V PK MAX
BNC(F) to
3.5 mm (m)
Adapter yg058f.eps
Figure 6-7. Edge Rise Time Verification Setup
The Calibrator Mainframe should be in SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Press the softkey under TRIG to select the TRIG/1 External Trigger output. Program the Calibrator
Mainframe to output 250 mV @ 1 kHz. Set the DSO to these parameters:
Digital Storage Oscilloscope Setup
Main Time Base position (initial)
Horizontal scale
Measurement Function
40 ns
500 ps/div
Rise Time
1.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage and frequency listed in Table
6-26. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
2.
Change the vertical scale of the DSO to the value listed in the table. Adjust the main time base position and vertical offset until the edge signal is centered on the display.
Record the rise time measurement in column A of Table 6-26.
3.
Correct the rise time measurement by accounting for the SD-22/26 sampling head’s rise time. The SD-22/26 rise time is specified as < 28 ps. Column B = sqrt((Column
A)
2
- (SD-22/26 rise time)
2
).
6-37
5520A
Service Manual
4.
The edge rise time measured should be less than the time indicated in Table 6-26.
90%
Rise time measures between these two points
10% om033i.eps
Figure 6-8. Edge Rise Time
Voltage
250 mV
250 mV
500 mV
500 mV
1 V
1 V
2.5 V
2.5 V
Frequency
1 MHz
10 MHz
1 MHz
10 MHz
1 MHz
10 MHz
1 MHz
10 MHz
Table 6-26. Edge Rise Time Verification
Calibrator Mainframe Output DSO
Vertical
Axis
(mV/div)
20.0
20.0
50.0
50.0
100.0
100.0
200.0
200.0
A
11801
Reading
B
Corrected
Reading
Tolerance
< 300 ps
< 350 ps
< 300 ps
< 350 ps
< 300 ps
< 350 ps
< 300 ps
< 350 ps
6-55. Edge Abberation Verification
The following equipment is needed for this procedure:
•
Tektronix 11801 oscilloscope with SD22/26 sampling head
•
Output cable provided with the SC600
Before you begin this procedure, verify that the SC600 is in the edge mode (the Edge menu is displayed), and program it to output 1 V p-p @ 1 MHz. Press
O to activate the output.
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe to the oscilloscope refering to Figure 6-7. Set the oscilloscope vertical to 10 mV/div and horizontal to 1 ns/div. Set the oscilloscope to look at the 90% point of the edge signal; use this point as the reference level. Set the oscilloscope to look at the first 10 ns of the edge signal with the rising edge at the left edge of the oscilloscope display.
With these settings, each vertical line on the oscilloscope represents a 1% aberration.
Determine that the SC600 falls within the typical specifications shown in Table 6-27.
6-38
SC600 Option
Verification
6
0 - 2 ns
2 - 5 ns
5 - 15 ns
> 15 ns
Table 6-27. Edge Aberrations
Time from 50% of Rising Edge Typical Edge Aberrations
< 32 mV (3.2%)
< 22 mV (2.2%)
< 12 mV (1.2%)
< 7 mV (0.7%)
6-56. Tunnel Diode Pulser Drive Amplitude Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Set the Calibrator Mainframe in Scope Cal mode, Edge. Proceed with the following steps:
1.
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter. Refer to Figure 6-2 for the proper setup connections.
2.
Activate the TD Pulser output by pushing the TDPULSE blue softkey. The output should now be at 80 V peak-to-peak, 100 kHz, STANDBY.
3.
Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .001, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .00012 for measuring the topline and DELAY to .00007 for measuring the baseline. Manually range lock the HP 3458A to the 100 V dc range.
4.
Change the Calibrator Mainframe output frequency to 10 kHz. Push the operate key, and use the HP 3458A to measure the topline and baseline.
5.
The peak-to-peak value is the difference between the topline and baseline. Record these values in Table 6-28, and compare against the listed tolerance.
Table 6-28. Tunnel Diode Pulser Amplitude Verification
Calibrator
Mainframe
Edge Output
80 V, 10 kHz
HP 3458A
Range
100 V dc
Topline
Reading
Baseline
Reading
Peak-to-Peak
Tolerance
(
±
V)
1.6
6-57. Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
5790A AC Measurement Standard
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-17 for the proper setup connections.
6-39
5520A
Service Manual
Calibrator
Mainframe output
(@ 50 kHz)
0.4 V
0.8 V
1.2 V
1.3 V
3.4 V
5.5 V
5.0 mV
7.5 mV
9.9 mV
10.0 mV
25.0 mV
39.0 mV
40.0 mV
70.0 mV
99.0 mV
100.0 mV
250.0 mV
399.0 mV
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu on the display.
Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify the leveled sine wave amplitude.
1.
Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination then to the 5790A
INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2.
Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
3.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage listed in Table 6-29.
4.
Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then record the 5790A’s rms reading for each voltage listed in Table 6-29.
5.
Multiply the rms reading by the conversion factor of 2.8284 to convert it to the peakto-peak value.
6.
Multiply the peak-to-peak value by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Compare result to the tolerance column.
Table 6-29. Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification
5790A Reading
(V rms)
5790A Reading x
2.8284 (V p-p)
V p-p value x correction
Tolerance
(V p-p)
400
µ
V
450
µ
V
498
µ
V
500
µ
V
800
µ
V
1.08 mV
1.10 mV
1.70 mV
2.28 mV
2.30 mV
5.30 mV
8.28 mV
8.3 mV
16.3 mV
24.3 mV
26.3 V
68.3 mV
110.3 mV
6-40
SC600 Option
Verification
6
6-58. Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with a prescaler for the Channel C input
(Option PM 9621, PM 9624, or PM 9625) and ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM 9691)
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-6 for the proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to
SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu on the display. Then follow these steps to verify the leveled sine wave amplitude.
1.
Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, and 50
Ω
impedance.
2.
Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to the PM 6680 at the channel indicated in Table 6-30. You will need the BNC-N adapter for the connection to Channel C.
3.
Set the filter on the PM 6680 as indicated in the table.
4.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output as listed in Table 6-30. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
5.
Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed in Table 6-30.
Table 6-30. Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
Calibrator Mainframe
Frequency
(output @ 5.5 V p-p)
50 kHz
500 kHz
5 MHz
50 MHz
500 MHz
A
A
A
A
C
PM 6680 Settings
Channel Filter
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
PM 6680 Reading
(Frequency)
Tolerance
0.125 Hz
1.25 Hz
12.5 Hz
125 Hz
1250 Hz
6-41
5520A
Service Manual
6-59. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 8590A Spectrum Analyzer
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-9 for proper setup connections.
HP 8590A 5520A-SC600
5520A CALIBRATOR
BNC(F) to Type N (M)
Adapter
SC600
Cable
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A
SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX yg059f.eps
Figure 6-9. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification Setup
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu on the display.
Then follow these steps to verify the leveled sine wave harmonics.
1.
Using the BNC cable and BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to the HP 8590A.
2.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to 5.5 V p-p at each frequency listed in Table 6-
31. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
3.
Set HP 8590A start frequency to the Calibrator Mainframe output frequency. Set HP
8590A stop frequency to 10 times the Calibrator Mainframe output frequency. Set the
HP 8590A reference level at +19 dBm.
4.
Record the harmonic level reading for each frequency and harmonic listed in Table 6-
31. For harmonics 3, 4, and 5, record the highest harmonic level of the three measured. Harmonics should be below the levels listed in the tolerance column of
Table 6-31.
6-42
Table 6-31. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
Calibrator Mainframe
Output Frequency
(@ 5.5 V p-p)
4 MHz
8 MHz
8 MHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
20 MHz
20 MHz
40 MHz
40 MHz
80 MHz
80 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
200 MHz
200 MHz
400 MHz
400 MHz
600 MHz
600 MHz
50 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
100 kHz
200 kHz
200 kHz
400 kHz
400 kHz
800 kHz
800 kHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
2 MHz
2 MHz
4 MHz
Harmonic
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
HP 8590A Reading (dB) Tolerance
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-33 dB
-46 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
SC600 Option
Verification
6
6-43
5520A
Service Manual
6-60. Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification
Leveled Sine Wave flatness verification is divided into two frequency bands: 50 kHz to
10 MHz (low frequency) and > 10 MHz to 600 MHz (high frequency). The equipment setups are different for each band. Leveled Sine Wave flatness is measured relative to 50 kHz. This is determined directly in the low frequency band. The high frequency band requires a “transfer” measurement be made at 10 MHz to calculate a flatness relative to
50 kHz.
6-61. Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness
All low frequency flatness procedures use the following equipment.
•
5790A/03 AC Measurement Standard with Wideband option
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector to the 5790A WIDEBAND input with the BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter as shown in Figure 6-10. Set the 5790A to
AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi Res on.
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
HI
LO
10V PEAK
MAX
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD
INPUT1 INPUT1 INPUT1 SHUNT INPUT1
2.2 mV
6
7 mV
0
2.2 mV
22 mV
7
220 mV
8
70 mV
1
700 mV
2
2.2 V
9
3
22 V .
220 mV
+/-
4 5
1kV
ENTER
DELETE
CLEAR
AUTO MAN
UTIL
MENUS
SPEC
POWER
I
O
5520A CALIBRATOR
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
20V
RMS
MAX
LO
150V
PK
MAX
TRIG
20V
MAX
GUARD
20V PK MAX
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
PK
MAX
TC 20V PK MAX
STBY
7
4
1
+ /
OPR
8
5
2
0
EARTH SCOPE
9
6
3
•
µ m n k p
M
BOOST
SHIFT dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
ENTER
F
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
DIV
÷
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
Figure 6-10. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard
yg034f.eps
6-62. Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness
All high frequency flatness procedures use the following equipment.
•
Hewlett-Packard 437B Power Meter
•
Hewlett-Packard 8482A and 8481D Power Sensors
•
BNC(f) to Type N(f) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe
Note
When high frequencies at voltages below 63 mV p-p are verified, use the
8481D Power Sensor. Otherwise, use the 8482A Power Sensor.
6-44
SC600 Option
Verification
6
Connect the HP 437B Power Meter to either the 8482A or the 8481D Power Sensor as shown in Figure 6-11. For more information on connecting the two instruments, see the power meter and power sensor operators manuals.
Connect the power meter/power sensor combination to the SCOPE connector on the
Calibrator Mainframe, as shown in Figure 6-12.
The Hewlett-Packard 437B Power Meter must be configured by setting the parameters listed below. Zero and self-calibrate the power meter with the power sensor being used.
Refer to the Hewlett-Packard 437B operators manual for details.
•
PRESET
•
RESOLN 3
•
AUTO FILTER
•
WATTS
•
SENSOR TABLE 0 (default)
OM035f.eps
Figure 6-11. Connecting the HP 437B Power Meter to the HP 8482A or 8481D Power Sensor
5520A CALIBRATOR
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
150V
MAX
TRIG
GUARD
20A SHELLS
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX
STBY
7
4
1
+ /
OPR
8
5
EARTH SCOPE
9
6
µ n m k
BOOST dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
2 3 p
M F
0 • SHIFT ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O yg036f.eps
Figure 6-12. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the HP Power Meter and Power Sensor
6-45
5520A
Service Manual
6-63. Low Frequency Verification
This procedure provides an example of testing low frequency flatness using a 5.5 V output. Follow the same procedure for testing other amplitudes, only compare results against the flatness specification listed in Table 6-32.
1.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe for an output of 5.5 V @ 500 kHz. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
2.
Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize. The 5790A should display approximately 1.94
V rms. Enter the 5790A reading in Column A of Table 6-32.
3.
Enter 50 kHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then enter the 5790A reading in Column B of Table 6-32.
4.
Enter the next frequency listed in Table 6-32. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then enter the reading into Column A of the table.
5.
Enter 50 kHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then enter the 5790A reading in Column B of Table 6-32.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all of frequencies listed in Table 6-32. Continue until you have completed Columns A and B.
7.
When you have completed Columns A and B, press
Y to remove the Calibrator
Mainframe’s output. Complete Table 6-32 by performing the calculations for column
C. Compare Column C to the specifications listed in the final column.
Table 6-32. Low Frequency Flatness Verification at 5.5 V
Calibrator
Mainframe
Frequency
500 kHz
1 MHz
2 MHz
5 MHz
10 MHz
A B
50 kHz
Complete Columns A-C as follows:
A Enter 5790A Reading (mV) for the present frequency.
C
±
±
±
±
±
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Specification (%)
1.50
1.50
1.50
1.50
1.50
B
C
Enter 5790A Reading (mV) for 50 kHz.
Compute and enter the Calibrator Mainframe Flatness Deviation (%): 100 * ((Column A entry)-
(Column B entry))/ (Column B entry)
6-64. High Frequency Verification
This procedure provides an example of testing high frequency flatness using a 5.5 V output. Follow the same procedure for testing other amplitudes, only compare results against the flatness specification listed in Table 6-33. For this voltage range, you will use the model HP 8482A power sensor.
1.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe for an output of 5.5 V @ 30 MHz. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
2.
Allow the power meter reading to stabilize. The power meter should display approximately 75 mW. Enter the power meter’s reading in Column A of Table 6-33.
6-46
SC600 Option
Verification
6
3.
Enter 10 MHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the power meter reading to stabilize, then enter the power meter’s reading in Column B of Table 6-33.
4.
Enter the next frequency listed in Table 6-33. Allow the power meter’s reading to stabilize, then enter the reading into Column A of the table.
5.
Enter 10 MHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the power meter reading to stabilize, then enter the power meter’s reading in Column B of Table 6-33.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all of frequencies listed in Table 6-33. Continue until you have completed Columns A and B.
7.
When you have completed Columns A and B, press
Y to remove the Calibrator
Mainframe’s output. Complete Table 6-33 by performing the calculations for each column. Compare Column G to the specifications listed in the final column.
Table 6-33. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 5.5 V
360
390
400
480
570
580
590
600
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
30
70
120
290
A
B
10 MHz
Complete Columns A-G as follows:
A
B
C D E
Enter the 437B present frequency Reading (W).
Enter the 437B 10 MHz Reading (W).
C
D
E
F
G
F G
Calibrator
Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
±
1.50
±
1.50
±
2.00
±
2.00
±
4.00
±
4.00
±
4.00
±
4.00
±
4.00
±
4.00
±
4.00
±
4.00
Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry)
Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry)
Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column A entry) sqrt(Column B entry)) / sqrt(Column B entry)
Enter the 10 MHz rms Error (%) for 5.5 V from Table 6-32, Column C.
Compute and enter the Calibrator Mainframe Flatness Deviation (%): (Column E entry)
+ (Column F entry)
6-47
5520A
Service Manual
Period (s)
5
2
0.05
0.02
0.01
1e-7
5e-8
2e-8
1e-8
5e-9
2e-9
6-65. Time Marker Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with a prescaler for the Channel C input
(Option PM 9621, PM 9624, or PM 9625) and ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM 9691)
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-6 for the proper setup connections. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, and
50
Ω
impedance.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Marker menu on the display.
Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to for each period listed in Table 6-34.
1.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to the output as listed in Table 6-34.
2.
Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to the PM 6680 at the channel indicated in Table 6-34. You will need the BNC-N adapter for the connection to Channel C.
3.
Set the filter on the PM 6680 as indicated in the table. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed for the
Calibrator Mainframe.
4.
Invert the PM 6680’s frequency reading to derive the period. For example, a reading of 1.000006345 kHz has a period of:
1/1.000006345 kHz = 0.999993655 ms.
Record the period in the table and compare to the tolerance column.
Table 6-34. Time Marker Verification
Measured Value (s) Deviation (s) 1-Year Spec. (s)
0.0251 s
0.00405 s
3.75E-06s
5E-8
2.5E-8
2.5E-13
1.25E-13
5E-14
2.5E-14
1.25E-14
5E-15
6-48
SC600 Option
Verification
6
Calibrator
Mainframe
Period
5 s
2 s
50.0 ms
20.0 ms
10.0 ms
100 ns
50.0 ns
20.0 ns
10.0 ns
5.00 ns
2.00 ns
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
C
PM 6680 Settings
Channel Filter
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
PM 6680
Reading
(Frequency)
1
PM 6680 Reading
(Period)
Tolerance
0.3489454 s
0.0582996 s
3.872E-05 s
5E-08 s
2.5E-08 s
2.5E-13 s
1.25E-13 s
5E-14 s
2.5E-14 s
1.25E-14 s
5E-15 s
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
5790A AC Measurement Standard
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe
5520A-SC600
5520A CALIBRATOR
SC600
Cable
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX
TC
20V PK MAX
BNC (F) to
Double Banana
Adapter
50
Ω
Feed Through
Termination yg060f.eps
Figure 6-13. Wave Generator Verification Setup
For wave generation verification procedures, refer to Figure 6-13 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Wavegen menu on the display.
Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Set the offset to 0 mV,
6-49
5520A
Service Manual and the frequency to 1 kHz. Then follow these steps to verify the wave generator function.
6-67. Verification at 1 M
Ω
Set the Calibrator Mainframe impedance to 1 M
Ω
(The blue softkey under SCOPE Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
1.
Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double
Banana adapter.
2.
Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
3.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the wave type and voltage listed in
Table 6-35.
4.
Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then record the 5790A rms reading for each wave type and voltage in Table 6-35.
5.
Multiply the rms reading by the conversion factor listed to convert it to the peak-topeak value. Compare result to the tolerance column.
6-68. Verification at 50
Ω
Set the Calibrator Mainframe impedance to 50
Ω
(The blue softkey under SCOPE Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
1.
Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination then to the
5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2.
Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
3.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the wave type and voltage listed in
Table 6-36.
4.
Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then record the 5790A rms reading for each wave type and voltage in Table 6-36.
5.
Multiply the rms reading by the conversion factor listed to convert it to the peak-topeak value.
Multiply the peak-to-peak value by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Compare result to the tolerance column.
6-50
SC600 Option
Verification
6
Calibrator
Mainframe
Wave Type
square sine sine sine sine sine sine sine triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square
Table 6-35. Wave Generator Verification at 1 M
Ω
Calibrator
Mainframe output
(@ 10 kHz)
5790A
Reading
(V rms)
Conversion
Factor
5790A Reading x
Conversion Factor
(V p-p)
55.0 V
1.8 mV
21.9 mV
89.9 mV
219 mV
899 mV
6.59 V
55 V
1.8 mV
21.9 mV
89.9 mV
219 mV
899 mV
6.59 V
55 V
220 mV
560 mV
899 mV
0.90 V
3.75 V
6.59 V
6.6 V
30.8 V
1.8 mV
11.9 mV
21.9 mV
22.0 mV
56.0 mV
89.9 mV
90 mV
155 mV
219 mV
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
2.0000
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
Tolerance
(V p-p)
1.6501 V
0.000154 V
0.000757 V
0.002797 V
0.00667 V
0.02707 V
0.1978 V
1.6501 V
0.000154 V
0.000757 V
0.002797 V
0.00667 V
0.02707 V
0.1978 V
1.6501 V
0.000154 V
0.000457 V
0.00075 V
0.00076 V
0.00178 V
0.002797 V
0.0028 V
0.00475 V
0.00667 V
0.0067 V
0.0169 V
0.02707 V
0.0271 V
0.1126 V
0.1978 V
0.1981 V
0.9241 V
6-51
5520A
Service Manual
Calibrator
Mainframe
Wave
Type
square sine sine sine sine sine sine sine triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square
Table 6-36. Wave Generator Verification at 50
Ω
Calibrator
Mainframe output
(10 kHz)
5790A
Reading
(V rms)
Conversion
Factor
5790A Rdg x
Conversion
Factor (V p-p)
V p-p value x correction
2.50 V
1.8 mV
10.9 mV
44.9 mV
109 mV
449 mV
1.09 V
2.50 V
1.8 mV
10.9 mV
44.9 mV
109 mV
449 mV
1.09 V
2.50 V
110 mV
280 mV
449 mV
450 mV
780 mV
1.09 V
1.10 V
1.80 V
1.8 mV
6.4 mV
10.9 mV
11.0 mV
28.0 mV
44.9 mV
45 mV
78 mV
109 mV
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
2.0000
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
Tolerance
(V p-p)
0.0751 V
0.000154 V
0.000427 V
0.001447 V
0.00337 V
0.01357 V
0.0328 V
0.0751 V
0.000154 V
0.000427 V
0.001447 V
0.00337 V
0.01357 V
0.0328 V
0.0751 V
0.000154 V
0.000292 V
0.000427 V
0.00043 V
0.00094 V
0.001447 V
0.00145 V
0.00244 V
0.00337 V
0.0034 V
0.0085 V
0.01357 V
0.0136 V
0.0235 V
0.0328 V
0.0331 V
0.0541 V
6-52
SC600 Option
Verification
6
The following equipment is used to verify the pulse width.
•
High Frequency Digital Storage Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with Tektronix SD-
22/26 sampling head
•
3 dB attenuator, 3.5 mm (m/f)
•
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter (2)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
• second BNC cable
Refer to Figure 6-7 for proper setup connections.
Connect the BNC cable supplied with the SC600 to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to one BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter then to the DSO’s sampling head through the 3 dB attenuator.
Using the second BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter and BNC cable, connect the Calibrator
Mainframe’s TRIG OUT connector to the 11801’s Trigger Input. The Calibrator
Mainframe should be in SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Press the softkey under TRIG to select the TRIG/1 External Trigger output.
Set the DSO to these parameters:
Digital Storage Oscilloscope Setup
Main Time Base position (initial)
Vertical scale
40 ns
200 mV/div
Trigger source = ext; level = 0.5 V; ext atten = x10; slope = +; mode = auto
Measurement Function positive width
1.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the pulse width and period at 1 V as listed in Table 6-37.
2.
Change the horizontal scale of the DSO to the value listed in the table. Adjust the main time base position and vertical offset until the pulse signal is centered on the display. Record the width measurement. Compare to the tolerance column of Table
6-37.
Calibrator Mainframe
Output
Width Period
4.0 ns
44.9 ns
45 ns
500 ns
200 ns
200 ns
200 ns
1.25 us
Table 6-37. Pulse Width Verification
DSO Horizontal
Scale
(time/div)
1 ns
10 ns
10 ns
100 ns
11801
Reading
Tolerance
0.700 ns
2.745 ns
6.250 ns
29.0 ns
6-53
5520A
Service Manual
6-70. Pulse Period Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM
9691)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-6 for the proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to
SCOPE mode, with the Pulse menu on the display. Press
O on the Calibrator
Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify the Pulse period.
1.
Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure period on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 50
Ω
impedance, and filter off.
2.
Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to
PM 6680 channel A.
3.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the pulse width and period (at 2.5 V) as listed in Table 6-38.
4.
Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each period listed for the Calibrator Mainframe. Compare to the tolerance column of Table
6-38.
Table 6-38. Pulse Period Verification
Calibrator Mainframe
Output
Width Period
80 ns
500 ns
500 ns
200 ns
10 ms
20 ms
(Period)
PM 6680 Reading
5E-13 s
2.5E-08 s
5.0E-08 s
Tolerance
6-71. MeasZ Resistance Verification
The MeasZ resistance function is verified by measuring resistors of known values. The measurement value is then compared to the resistor actual value.
The resistors must make a solid connection to a BNC(f) to enable a connection to the end of the BNC cable supplied with the SC600. The resistance values must be known at this
BNC(f) connector. Fluke uses an HP 3458A DMM to make a 4-wire ohms measurement at the BNC(f) connector to determine the actual resistance values.
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Resistors of known values: 1.5 M
Ω
, 1 M
Ω
, 60
Ω
, 50
Ω
, 40
Ω
nominal
• adapters to connect resistors to BNC(f) connector
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-17 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the MeasZ menu on the display.
Then follow these steps to verify the MeasZ resistance function.
1.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe MeasZ resistance range as indicated in Table 6-39.
(The blue softkey under MEASURE toggles the MeasZ ranges).
6-54
SC600 Option
Verification
6
2.
Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector to the BNC(f) connector attached to the nominal resistance values indicated in Table 6-39. The 600 K
Ω nominal value can be achieved by connecting the 1.5 M
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
resistors in parallel.
3.
Allow the Calibrator Mainframe reading to stabilize, then record the Calibrator
Mainframe resistance reading for each nominal value listed in Table 6-39. Compare the Calibrator Mainframe resistance readings to the actual resistance values and the tolerance column of Table 6-39.
Calibrator
Mainframe
MeasZ
Range
res 50
Ω res 50
Ω res 50
Ω res 1M
Ω res 1M
Ω res 1M
Ω
Table 6-39. MeasZ Resistance Verification
Nominal
Resistance
Value
Calibrator
Mainframe
Resistance
Reading
Actual
Resistance
Value
40
Ω
50
Ω
60
Ω
600 k
Ω
1 M
Ω
1.5 M
Ω
0.04
Ω
0.05
Ω
0.06
Ω
600
Ω
1 k
Ω
1.5 k
Ω
Tolerance
6-72. MeasZ Capacitance Verification
The MeasZ capacitance function is verified by measuring capacitors of known values.
The measurement value is then compared to the capacitor actual value.
The capacitors must make a solid connection to a BNC(f) to enable a connection to the end of the BNC cable supplied with the SC600. Due to the small capacitance values, care must be taken to know the actual capacitance at this BNC(f) connector. The capacitance values must be determined at a 10 MHz oscillator frequency. Fluke uses an HP 4192A
Impedance Analyzer at 10 MHz to determine the actual capacitance values.
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Adapters and capacitors to achieve 5 pF, 29 pF, 49 pF nominal values at the end of
BNC(f) connector
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC600
Refer to Figure 6-17 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the MeasZ menu on the display.
Then follow these steps to verify the MeasZ capacitance function.
1.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe MeasZ capacitance range to cap. (The blue softkey under MEASURE toggles the MeasZ ranges).
2.
Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector, but do not connect any thing to the end of this cable.
3.
Allow the Calibrator Mainframe reading to stabilize, then press the SET OFFSET blue softkey to zero the capacitance reading.
4.
Connect the end of the BNC cable to the BNC(f) connector attached to the nominal capacitor values indicated in Table 6-40.
6-55
5520A
Service Manual
5.
Allow the Calibrator Mainframe reading to stabilize, then record the Calibrator
Mainframe capacitance reading for each nominal value listed in Table 6-40. Compare the Calibrator Mainframe capacitance readings to the actual capacitance values and the tolerance column of Table 6-40.
Nominal
Capacitance Value
Table 6-40. MeasZ Capacitance Verification
Calibrator
Mainframe
Capacitance
Reading
Actual Capacitance
Value
5 pF
29 pF
49 pF
6-73. Overload Function Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe
Refer to Figure 6-14 for setup connections.
Tolerance
0.75 pF
1.95 pF
2.95 pF
5520A-SC600
5520A CALIBRATOR
SC600 Cable
50
Ω
Feedthrough
Termination
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20V PK MAX
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
TC 20V PK MAX
Figure 6-14. Overload Function Verification Setup
yg061f.eps
6-56
SC600 Option
SC600 Hardware Adjustments
6
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Overload menu on the display.
Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector. Then follow these steps to verify the overload function.
1.
Connect the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination to the end of the BNC cable.
2.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe output for 5.000 V, DC (OUT VAL blue softkey), and time limit = 60 s (T LIMIT blue softkey).
3.
Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output and verify that the
OPR display timer increments.
4.
Remove the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination before 60 seconds and verify that
Calibrator Mainframe goes to STBY.
5.
Reconnect the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination to the end of the BNC cable.
6.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe output for 5.000 V, ac (OUT VAL blue softkey).
7.
Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output and verify that the
OPR display timer increments.
8.
Remove the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination before 60 seconds and verify that
Calibrator Mainframe goes to STBY.
6-74. SC600 Hardware Adjustments
Hardware adjustments must be made to the leveled sine and edge functions each time the
SC600 is repaired. In addition to the adjustment procedures, this section provides lists of the required equipment and some recommendations on models that have the capabilities required by these procedures. Equivalent models can be substituted if necessary.
The following equipment is necessary for performing the hardware adjustments described in this section. The models listed are recommended for providing accurate results.
•
Standard adjustment tool for adjusting the pots and trimmer caps
•
Extender Card
•
Oscilloscope Mainframe and Sampling Head (Tektronix 11801 with SD-22/26 or
Tektronix TDS 820 with 8 GHz bandwidth)
•
10 dB Attenuator (Weinschel 9-10 (SMA), or Weinschel 18W-10, or equivalent)
•
Cable provided with SC600
•
Spectrum Analyzer (Hewlett-Packard 8590A)
6-76. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function
There are two adjustment procedures that need to be made for the leveled sine wave function. The first procedure adjusts the balance out of the LO VCO so that the signal is balanced between the two VCOs. The second procedure adjusts the harmonics.
6-77. Equipment Setup
This procedure uses the spectrum analyzer. Before you begin this procedure, verify that the Calibrator Mainframe is in leveled sine wave mode (the Levsine menu is displayed), and program it to output 5.5 V p-p @ 600 MHz. Press
O to activate the output.
6-57
5520A
Service Manual
Refer to Figure 6-9 for setup connections and connect the Calibrator Mainframe to the
Spectrum Analyzer. Adjust the Spectrum Analyzer so that it displays one peak across its horizontal center line. The far right of the peak is fixed at the far right of the center line, as shown below.
6-78. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave VCO Balance
Once you have completed the setup described above, perform the following procedure to adjust the VCO balance for the leveled sine wave function.
1.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe for an output of 5.5 V @ 600 MHz.
2.
Set the Spectrum Analyzer to the parameters listed below.
Spectrum Analyzer Setup
Start Frequency 10 MHz
Stop Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
Video Bandwidth
800 MHz
30 kHz
3 kHz
Reference Level 20 dBm
The Spectrum Analyzer will display a spur at 153 MHz. Refer to Figure 6-15 to identify the spur.
3.
You need to adjust the wave until the spur is at a minimum. To do this, slowly rotate
R1 (shown in the diagram) counterclockwise until the spur is at a minimum. As you adjust it, the spur will move down the waveform, towards the right. As soon as the spur is minimized, stop rotating R1. If you rotate it too far, the spur will reappear.
Once you have turned R1 to the point at which the spur is at a minimum, the signal is balanced between the VCOs, and you have completed the adjustment.
R1
6-58
Figure 6-15. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Balance
6-79. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics
The following procedure adjusts the harmonics for the leveled sine wave function.
om052f.eps
SC600 Option
SC600 Hardware Adjustments
6
Note
This procedure should only be used for adjusting the leveled sine wave harmonics. Do not use this procedure as a verification test. The specifications in this procedure are not valid for verification.
1.
Set the Spectrum Analyzer to the parameters listed below.
Spectrum Analyzer Setup
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
Video Bandwidth
50 MHz
500 MHz
3 MHz
3 kHz
Reference Level 20 dBm
2.
Use your Spectrum Analyzer’s Peak Search function to find the desired reference signal. The Analyzer should show the fundamental, and second and third harmonics.
The harmonics need to be adjusted so that the second harmonic is at 40 dBc and third harmonic should typically be at 50 dBc as shown in Figure 6-16.
3.
To adjust the harmonics, adjust R8, as shown in Figure 6-16 until the peaks of the second and third harmonic are at the correct dB level. You may find that you can place the second harmonic at 40 dBc but the third harmonic is not at 50 dBc. If this is the case, continue adjusting R8. The second harmonic will fluctuate, but there is a point at which both harmonics will be at the correct decibel level.
40 dBc
50 dBc
R8
2nd harmonic
3rd harmonic
Figure 6-16. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics
6-80. Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function
Adjustments need to be made after repair to the edge function to adjust the edge aberrations.
om051f.eps
6-59
5520A
Service Manual
Note
To verify the edge aberrations back to national standards, you should send your Calibrator Mainframe to Fluke, or other facility that has established traceability for aberrations. Fluke, for example, has a reference pulse that is sent to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) for characterization. This information is then transferred to high speed sampling heads, which are used to adjust and verify the SC600.
6-81. Equipment Setup
The following equipment is needed for this procedure:
•
Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with SD22/26 input module or Tektronix TDS 820 with 8 GHz bandwidth.
•
10 dB Attenuator: Weinschel 9-10 (SMA) or Weinschel 18W-10 or equivalent
•
Output cable provided with the SC600
Before you begin this procedure, verify that the SC600 is in the edge mode (the Edge menu is displayed), and program it to output 1 V p-p @ 1 MHz. Press
O to activate the output.
Refer to Figure 6-7 for the proper setup connections and connect the Calibrator
Mainframe to the oscilloscope. Set the oscilloscope vertical to 10 mV/div and horizontal to 1 ns/div. Set the oscilloscope to look at the 90% point of the edge signal; use this point as the reference level. Set the oscilloscope to look at the first 10 ns of the edge signal with the rising edge at the left edge of the oscilloscope display.
6-82. Adjusting the Edge Aberrations
Refer to Figure 6-17 while making the following adjustments:
1.
Adjust A90R13 to set the edge signal at the right edge of oscilloscope display, at 10 ns, to the reference level set above.
2.
Adjust A90R36 so the first overshoot is the same amplitude as the next highest aberration.
3.
Adjust A90R35 so that the second and third overshoot aberrations are the same amplitude as the first aberration.
4.
Adjust A90R12 to set the edge signal occurring between 2 ns and 10 ns to the reference level set above.
5.
Readjust A90R36 and A90R35 to obtain equal amplitudes for the first, second, and third aberrations.
6.
Adjust A90R13 to set the edge signal occurring between 0 ns and 2 ns to the reference point set above. Center any aberrations so the peaks are equal above and below the reference level.
7.
Readjust A90R12 if necessary to keep the edge signal occurring between 2 ns and 10 ns at the reference level.
8.
Readjust A90R13 if necessary to keep the edge signal occurring between 0 ns and 2 ns at the reference level.
9.
Set the UUT output to 250 mV and the oscilloscope vertical to 2 mV/div. Check the aberrations.
10.
Connect the 10 dB attenuator to the oscilloscope input. Connect the UUT to the attenuator and program the UUT output to 2.5 V.
6-60
11.
Set the oscilloscope vertical to 5 mV/div. Check the aberrations.
12.
Check for rise time < 300 ps at 250 mV, 1 V, and 2.5 V outputs.
SC600 Option
SC600 Hardware Adjustments
6
1st Aberration
2nd Aberration
3rd Aberration
R36
R12
R13
R35 T
Figure 6-17. Adjusting Edge Aberrations
om050f.eps
6-61
5520A
Service Manual
6-62
Chapter 6
SC300 Option
Title Page
6-83.
6-84.
6-85.
6-86.
Voltage Function Specifications ...................................................... 6-66
6-87.
6-88.
6-89.
6-90.
Edge Function Specifications........................................................... 6-67
Leveled Sine Wave Function Specifications.................................... 6-68
Time Marker Function Specifications.............................................. 6-69
Wave Generator Specifications ........................................................ 6-69
6-91.
6-92.
Trigger Signal Specifications for the Time Marker Function .......... 6-70
Trigger Signal Specifications for the Edge Function ....................... 6-70
6-93.
6-94.
6-95.
6-96.
6-97.
6-98.
Leveled Sine Wave Mode ................................................................ 6-71
Time Marker Mode .......................................................................... 6-72
Wave Generator Mode ..................................................................... 6-72
6-99.
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification ......................... 6-74
6-101. Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions ..................... 6-77
6-102.
Overview of HP3458A Operation .................................................... 6-77
6-103.
Setup for Square Wave Measurements ............................................ 6-77
6-104.
DC Voltage Calibration.................................................................... 6-78
6-105.
AC Square Wave Voltage Calibration ............................................. 6-79
6-106.
Edge Amplitude Calibration............................................................. 6-80
6-107.
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration...................................... 6-80
6-108.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration ......................................... 6-81
6-109.
6-110.
Low Frequency Calibration ......................................................... 6-82
High Frequency Calibration......................................................... 6-82
6-112.
DC Voltage Verification .................................................................. 6-83
6-113.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-83
6-114.
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-83
6-115.
AC Voltage Amplitude Verification ................................................ 6-86
6-116.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-86
6-117.
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-88
6-63
5520A
Service Manual
6-118.
AC Voltage Frequency Verification ................................................ 6-89
6-119.
Edge Amplitude Verification ........................................................... 6-90
6-120.
Edge Frequency Verification............................................................ 6-91
6-121.
Edge Duty Cycle Verification .......................................................... 6-92
6-122.
Edge Rise Time Verification............................................................ 6-92
6-123.
Edge Abberation Verification .......................................................... 6-94
6-124.
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification .................................... 6-95
6-125.
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification .................................... 6-96
6-126.
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification.................................... 6-97
6-127.
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification ........................................ 6-99
6-128.
6-129.
Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness ............................ 6-99
Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness ........................... 6-99
6-130.
6-131.
Low Frequency Verification ........................................................ 6-101
High Frequency Verification ....................................................... 6-101
6-132.
Time Marker Verification ................................................................ 6-103
6-133.
Wave Generator Verification ........................................................... 6-104
6-134.
Verification at 1 M
Ω
.................................................................... 6-105
6-135.
Verification at 50
Ω
..................................................................... 6-105
6-137.
Equipment Required......................................................................... 6-107
6-138.
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function..................................... 6-108
6-139.
6-140.
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-108
Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics ............................. 6-108
6-141.
Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function ............................ 6-109
6-142.
Equipment Setup .......................................................................... 6-109
6-143.
Adjusting the Edge Aberrations................................................... 6-109
6-64
SC300 Option
Introduction
6
6-83. Introduction
This chapter contains the following information and service procedures for the
SC300 Oscilloscope Calibration Option functions.
•
Specifications
•
Theory of Operation
•
Calibration Procedures
•
Verification Procedures
•
Hardware Adjustments made after Repair
The calibration and verification procedures provide traceable results for all of the SC300 functions as long as they are performed using the recommended equipment. All of the required equipment along with the minimum specifications, are provided in Table 6-41 under “Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification.”
The calibration and verification procedures in this chapter are not the ones Fluke uses at the factory. These procedures have been developed to provide you with the ability to calibrate and verify the SC300 at your own site if necessary. You should review all of the procedures in advance to make sure you have the resources to complete them. It is strongly recommended that, if possible, you return your unit to Fluke for calibration and verification.
Hardware adjustments that are made after repair, at the factory or designated Fluke service centers, are provided in detail.
6-84. Maintenance
There are no maintenance techniques or diagnostic remote commands for the SC300 that are available to users. If your SC300 is not installed or not receiving power, the following error message appears on the display when you press a to access the oscilloscope calibration menus.
om030i.eps
If this message is displayed, and you have the SC300 installed in your Calibrator
Mainframe, you must return the Calibrator Mainframe to Fluke for repair. If you wish to purchase the SC300, contact your Fluke sales representative.
6-65
5520A
Service Manual
6-85. SC300 Specifications
These specifications apply only to the SC300. General specifications that apply to the
Calibrator Mainframe can be found in Chapter 1. The specifications are valid providing the Calibrator Mainframe is operated under the conditions specified in Chapter 1, and has completed a warm-up period of at least twice the length of time the calibrator was powered off, up to a maximum of 30 minutes. All SC300 specifications apply to the end of the cable (PN 945014) supplied with the Option.
6-86. Voltage Function Specifications
Amplitude Characteristics
Range
Resolution
Voltage Function
Adjustment Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
Sequence
into 50
DC Signal
Ω
into 1 M
Ω
AC Square Wave Signal into 50
Ω
into 1 M
Ω
0 V to
±
2.2 V 0 V to
±
33 V 1.8 mV to
2.2 V p-p
1.8 mV to
105 V p-p [1]
< 100 V: 4 digits or 10
µ
V, whichever is greater
≥
100 V: 5 digits
Continuous [1]
±
(0.25% of output + 100
µ
V) [2]
1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
Square Wave Frequency Characteristics
Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
10 Hz to 10 kHz [3]
±
(25 ppm of setting + 15 mHz)
Typical Aberration
within 20
µ s from leading edge < (2% of output + 100
µ
V)
[1] The square wave signal into 1 M
Ω
is a positive square wave from 1.8 mV to 55 V p-p. From 95 V to
105 V, its output is a square wave-like signal that alternates between the negative peak and the positive peak, with the centerline at –10 V. Signals between 55 V and 95 V p-p are not available.
[2] The uncertainty for 50
Ω
loads does not include the input impedance uncertainty of the oscilloscope. Square wave signals below 4.5 mV p-p have an uncertainty of
±
(0.25% of output +
200 µV). Signals from 95 to 105 V p-p have an uncertainty of 0.5% of output in the frequency range
100 Hz to 1 kHz. Typical uncertainty is 1.5% of output for 95 to 105 V p-p signals in the frequency range 10 Hz to 100 Hz, and 0.5% of output in the frequency range 1 kHz to 10 kHz.
[3] From 95 V to 105 V, the output is a square wave-type signal that alternates between the negative peak and the positive peak, with the centerline at –10 V. If the oscilloscope you are calibrating requires a fixed period for the square wave’s peak-to-peak amplitude, you may need to adjust the
Calibrator Mainframe’s frequency output to accommodate for this waveform. For example, the
Fluke ScopeMeter® has a calibration point at 1 kHz (1 ms), 100 V, peak-to-peak. To output a period of 1 ms at 100 V peak-to-peak, use a frequency of 356 Hz.
6-66
SC300 Option
SC300 Specifications
6
6-87. Edge Function Specifications
Edge Characteristics into 50
Ω
Amplitude
Range (p-p)
Resolution
Adjustment Range
Sequence
4.5 mV to 2.75 V
4 digits
±
10% around each sequence value (indicated below)
5 mV, 10 mV, 25 mV, 50 mV,
100 mV, 250 mV, 500 mV, 1 V,
2.5 V
Other Edge Characteristics
Frequency Range
Rise Time
Leading Edge Aberrations
Typical Duty Cycle
1 kHz to 1 MHz
≤
400 ps within 10 ns
10 to 30 ns after 30 ns
45% to 55%
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
±
(2% of output + 200
µ
V)
±
(25 ppm of setting + 15 mHz)
< (3 % of output + 2 mV)
< (1% of output + 2 mV)
< (0.5% of output + 2 mV)
6-67
5520A
Service Manual
6-88. Leveled Sine Wave Function Specifications
Frequency Range
Leveled Sine Wave
Characteristics into 50
Ω
50 kHz Reference 50 kHz to 100 MHz 100 to 300 MHz [1]
Amplitude Characteristics
Range (p-p)
Resolution
Adjustment Range
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
Flatness (relative to 50 kHz)
±
(2% of output
+ 200
µ
V)
5 mV to 5.5 V [1]
< 100 mV: 3 digits
≥
100 mV: 4 digits continuously adjustable
±
(3.5% of output
+ 300
µ
V)
±
(4% of output
+ 300
µ
V) not applicable
±
(1.5% of output
+ 100
µ
V)
≤
1% [2]
±
(2.0% of output
+ 100
µ
V)
Short-term Stability
Frequency Characteristics
Resolution
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
10 Hz
±
(25 ppm +
15 mHz)
±
10 kHz [3]
25 ppm [4]
±
10 kHz
25 ppm
Distortion Characteristics
2nd Harmonic
3rd and Higher Harmonics
≤
-33 dBc
≤
-38 dBc
[1] Extended frequency range to 350 MHz is provided, but flatness is not specified. Amplitude is limited to 3 V for frequencies above 250 MHz.
[2] Within one hour after reference amplitude setting, provided temperature varies no more than
±
5°C.
[3] At frequencies below 120 kHz, the resolution is 10 Hz. For frequencies between 120 kHz and
999.9 kHz, the resolution is 100 Hz.
[4]
±
(25 ppm + 15 mHz) for frequencies of 1 MHz and below.
6-68
SC300 Option
SC300 Specifications
6
6-89. Time Marker Function Specifications
Time Marker into 50
Ω
5s to 100
µ
s 50
µ
s to 2
µ
s
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
±
(25 + t*1000) ppm [1]
±
(25 + t*15,000) ppm [1]
Wave Shape
1
µ
s to 20 ns
±
25 ppm pulsed sawtooth pulsed sawtooth pulsed sawtooth
10 ns to 2 ns
±
25 ppm
Typical Output level > 1 V pk > 1 V pk > 1 V pk
Sequence
Adjustment Range
5-2-1 from 5 s to 2 ns (e.g., 500 ms, 200 ms, 100 ms)
At least
±
10% around each sequence value indicated above.
4 digits Resolution
[1] t is the time in seconds.
[2] The 2 ns time marker is typically > 0.5 V p-p.
sine
> 2V p-p [2]
6-90. Wave Generator Specifications
Wave Generator Characteristics
Square Wave, Sine Wave, and Triangle Wave into 50
Ω
or 1 M
Ω
Amplitude
Range into 1 M
Ω
: 1.8 mV to 55 V p-p into 50
Ω
: 1.8 mV to 2.2 V p-p
±
(3% of p-p output + 100 µV) 1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C,
10 Hz to 10 kHz
Sequence
Typical DC Offset Range
1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
0 to
±
(
≥
40% of p-p amplitude) [1]
Frequency
Range
Resolution
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±
5
°
C
10 Hz to 100 kHz
4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency
±
(25 ppm + 15 mHz)
[1] The dc offset plus the wave signal must not exceed 30 V rms.
6-69
5520A
Service Manual
6-91. Trigger Signal Specifications for the Time Marker Function
Time Marker
Period
5 to 50 ms
20 ms to 100 ns
50 to 10 ns
5 to 2 ns
Division Ratio [1]
off/1 off/1/10/100 off/10/100 off/100
Amplitude into
50
Ω
(p-p)
≥
1 V
≥
1 V
≥
1 V
≥
1 V
Typical Rise Time
≤
2 ns
≤
2 ns
≤
2 ns
≤
2 ns
6-92. Trigger Signal Specifications for the Edge Function
Edge Signal
Frequency
1 kHz to 1 MHz
Division Ratio
off/1
Amplitude into
50
Ω
(p-p)
≥
1 V
Typical Rise Time
≤
2 ns
6-70
SC300 Option
Theory of Operation
6
6-93. Theory of Operation
The following discussion provides a brief overview of the following SC300 operating modes: voltage, edge, leveled sine wave, time marker and wave generator. This discussion will allow you to identify which of the main plug-in boards of the Calibrator
Mainframe are defective. Figure 6-18 shows a block diagram of the SC300 Option, also referred to as the A50 board. Functions that are not depicted in the figure are generated from the DDS Assembly (A6 board). For a diagram of all Calibrator Mainframe board assemblies, refer to Figure 2-1.
All signals for the voltage function are generated from the A6 board and are passed to the A50 board via the SCOPE_HV signal line. The generated signal (ac or dc) is then passed from the A50 board to the A90, attenuator assembly, where range attenuation occurs. The signal is then passed to the SCOPE output BNC on the front panel.
The edge clock originates on the A50 board. The signal is then shaped and split to generate the fast edge and external trigger signals. The edge signal is passed from the
A50 board first to the attenuator assembly (where range attenuation occurs) and then to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel. If turned on, the trigger is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel.
6-96. Leveled Sine Wave Mode
All of the leveled sine wave signals (from 50 kHz to 350 MHz) are produced on the A50 board. The leveled sine wave signal is passed from the A50 board to the on-board attenuator assembly. The attenuator assembly provides range attenuation and also contains a power detector which maintains amplitude flatness across the frequency range. The signal is then passed to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
6-71
5520A
Service Manual
6-97. Time Marker Mode
There are several “ranges” of time marker operation: 5 s to 50 ms, 20 ms to 100 ns, 50 ns to 20 ns, 10 ns and 5 to 2 ns.
The 5 s to 50 ms markers are generated on the A6 DDS board and are passed to the A50 board. The signal path is also split to drive the external trigger circuitry on the A50 board. If turned on, the trigger is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel. The marker signal passing through the A50 board is connected up to the attenuator assembly.
The signal is then passed to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
The 20 ms to 2 ns markers are generated on the A50 board. From 20 ms to 100 ns, a 20% duty cycle square wave is produced in addition to the spike and square wave markers.
From 50 ns to 20 ns, only spike or square waves are produced. At 10 ns, the user can chose between the square wave or the leveled sine signal. The marker signal is passed from the A50 board to the attenuator assembly and then to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
The trigger signal is also generated on the A50 board. If the trigger is turned on, the signal is connected to the Trig Out BNC on the front panel.
6-98. Wave Generator Mode
All signals for the wavegen function are generated from the A6 board and are passed to the A50 board. They are then sent to the attenuator assembly, where range attenuation occurs. Wavegen signals are then sent to the SCOPE connector BNC on the front panel.
The Wave Generator Square Wave is identical to the AC Square Wave Voltage.
6-72
SC300 Option
Theory of Operation
6
LF PWB
A6
DDS
50
Ω
Time Mark
II
Analog Shaped
2
µ s - 10
µ s
Time Mark III
Pulse Shaped
20
µ s - 1
µ s
LF Mux.
Leveled Sine Wave and Time Mark
Unleveled
Leveled
PLLs
Pwr Amp.
Leveling Loop
Level
Edge
10 MHz Clock
IV
Trigger
%1,10,100,1000
Oscilloscope
Calibrator
Trigger BNC
HF Mux.
HF PWB
Step Attenuator Module
SCOPE
Output BNC
HF Mux.
8dB,20dB,20dB pp detect
Figure 6-18. SC300 Block Diagram
yg121f.eps
6-73
5520A
Service Manual
6-99. Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification
Table 6-41 lists the equipment, recommended models, and minimum specifications required for each calibration and verification procedure.
Table 6-41. SC300 Calibration and Verification Equipment
Instrument
Digital
Multimeter
Adapter
Termination
Model Minimum Use Specifications
Wave Generator, Edge Amplitude Calibration, AC Voltage Verification
HP 3458A
Voltage
1.8 mV to
±
105 V p-p Uncertainty: 0.06%
Edge 4.5 mV to 2.75 V p-p Uncertainty: 0.06%
Pomona #1269
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug
Feedthrough 50
Ω ±
1% (used with Edge Amplitude
Calibration and AC Voltage Verification)
BNC Cable
High-
Frequency
Digital Storage
Oscilloscope
Attenuator
Adapter
(supplied with SC300)
Edge Rise Time and Aberrations Verification
Frequency 2 GHz
Tektronix 11801 with
Tektronix SD-22/26 sampling head, or
Tektronix TDS 820 with
8 GHz bandwidth
Resolution 4.5 mV to 2.75 V
Weinschel 9-10 (SMA) or Weinschel 18W-10 or equivalent
10 dB, 3.5 mm (m/f)
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration and Verification
Fluke 5790A
Range 5 mV p-p to 5.5 V p-p
AC
Measurement
Standard
Adapter
Termination
BNC Cable
Pomona #1269
Frequency 50 kHz
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug
Feedthrough 50
Ω ±
1%
(supplied with SC300)
DC and AC Voltage Calibration and Verification, DC Voltage Verification
HP 3458A Digital
Multimeter
Adapter
Termination
BNC Cable
Pomona #1269
(supplied with SC300)
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug
Feedthrough 50
Ω ±
1%
6-74
SC300 Option
Equipment Required for Calibration and Verification
6
Table 6-41. SC300 Calibration and Verification Equipment (cont.)
Instrument
Frequency
Counter
Model Minimum Use Specifications
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
PM 6680 with option (PM 9621, PM 9624, or
PM 9625) and (PM 9678)
50 kHz to 350 MHz, < 1.6 ppm uncertainty
Pomona #3288 BNC(f) to Type N(m) Adapter
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Adapter
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness (Low Frequency) Calibration and Verification
AC Measurement Fluke 5790A
Standard with -03 option
Pomona #3288
Range
Frequency
5 mV p-p to 5.5 V p-p
50 kHz to 10 MHz
BNC(f) to Type N(m)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Spectrum Analyzer
Adapter
BNC Cable
Frequency Counter
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
HP 8590A
Pomona #3288 BNC(f) to Type N(m)
(supplied with SC300)
Edge Frequency, AC Voltage Frequency Verification
PM 6680 with option (PM
9678)
20 ms to 150 ns, 10 Hz to 10 MHz: < 1.6 ppm uncertainty
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
Edge Duty Cycle
Frequency Counter
BNC Cable
PM 6680
(supplied with SC300)
Leveled Sine Wave Flatness (High Frequency) Calibration and Verification
Power Meter Hewlett-Packard 437B Range
Frequency
Power Sensor Hewlett-Packard 8482A Range
Frequency
Power Sensor Hewlett-Packard 8481D Range
Frequency
30 dB
Reference
Attenuator
Adapter
Hewlett-Packard
11708A
(supplied with HP
8481D)
Hewlett-Packard
PN 1250-1474
Range
Frequency
-42 to +5.6 dBm
10 - 300 MHz
-20 to +19 dBm
10 - 300 MHz
-42 to -20 dBm
10 - 300 MHz
30 dB
50 MHz
BNC(f) to Type N(f)
BNC Cable (supplied with SC300)
6-75
5520A
Service Manual
Instrument
Frequency
Counter
Adapter
BNC Cable
AC
Measurement
Standard
Adapter
Termination
BNC Cable
Table 6-41. SC300 Calibration and Verification Equipment (cont.)
Model Minimum Use Specifications
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency, Time Marker Verification
2 ns to 5 s, 50 kHz to 500 MHz: < 1.6 ppm uncertainty PM 6680 with option
(PM 9621, PM 9624, or
PM 9625) and (PM
9678)
Pomona #3288 BNC(f) to Type N(m)
(supplied with SC300)
Wave Generator Verification
Fluke 5790A Range 1.8 mV p-p to 55 V p-p
Pomona #1269
(supplied with SC300)
Frequency 10 Hz to 100 kHz
BNC(f) to Double Banana
Feedthrough 50
Ω ±
1%.
6-100. SC300 Calibration Setup
The procedures in this manual have been developed to provide users the ability to calibrate the SC300 at their own site if they are required to do so. It is strongly recommended that, if possible, you return your unit to Fluke for calibration and verification. The unit should be returned with its cable. The Calibrator Mainframe must be fully calibrated prior to performing any of the SC300 calibration procedures.
The hardware adjustments are intended to be one-time adjustments performed in the factory, however, adjustment may be required after repair. Hardware adjustments must be performed prior to calibration. Calibration must be performed after any hardware adjustments. See “Hardware Adjustments” in this chapter.
The AC Square Wave Voltage function is dependent on the DC Voltage function.
Calibration of the AC Voltage function is required after the DC Voltage is calibrated.
The Calibrator Mainframe must complete a warm-up period and the SC300 must be enabled for at least 5 minutes prior to calibration to allow internal components to thermally stabilize. The Calibrator Mainframe warm-up period is at least twice the length of time the calibrator was powered off, up to a maximum of 30 minutes. The
SC300 is enabled by pressing the front panel a
key. The green indicator on the a
key will be illuminated when the SC300 is enabled.
Much of the SC300 can be calibrated interactively from the front panel. Enable the
SC300 and wait at least 5 minutes. Enter Scope Cal mode by pressing the front panel
S key, CAL blue softkey, second CAL blue softkey, and SCOPE CAL blue softkey. Entering Scope Cal mode prior to having the SC300 enabled for at least 5 minutes will cause a warning message to be displayed.
All equipment specified for SC300 calibration must be calibrated, certified traceable if traceability is to be maintained, and operating within their normal specified operating environment. It is also important to ensure that the equipment has had sufficient time to warm up prior to its use. Refer to each equipment’s operating manual for details.
Before you begin calibration, you may wish to review all of the procedures in advance to ensure you have the resources to complete them.
6-76
SC300 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions
6
The Calibrator Mainframe first prompts the user to calibrate the DC Voltage function. If another function is to be calibrated, alternately press the OPTIONS and NEXT
SECTION blue softkeys until the desired function is reached.
6-101. Calibration and Verification of Square Wave
Functions
The AC Voltage and Edge functions have square wave voltages that need to be calibrated and verified. The HP3458A digital multimeter can be programmed from either the front panel or over the remote interface to make these measurements.
6-102. Overview of HP3458A Operation
The Hewlett-Packard 3458A digital multimeter is setup as a digitizer to measure the peak-to-peak value of the signal. It is set to DCV, using various analog-to-digital integration times and triggering commands to measure the topline and baseline of the square wave signal.
6-103. Setup for Square Wave Measurements
By controlling the HP 3458A’s integration and sample time, it can be used to make accurate, repeatable measurements of both the topline and baseline of the square wave signals up to 10 kHz.
The HP 3458A is triggered by a change in input level. The trigger level is set to 1% of the DCV range, with ac coupling of the trigger signal. The delay after the trigger event is also changed for the of AC Voltage Square Wave and Edge functions. See Table 6-42 and Figure 6-19.
Table 6-42. AC Square Wave Voltage and Edge Settings for the HP3458A
Voltage
Input Frequency
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
1
.1
.01
.002
.001
NPLC
HP 3458A Settings
DELAY (topline)
.02 s
.002 s
.0002 s
.00004 s
.00002 s
DELAY (baseline)
.07 s
.007 s
.0007 s
.00014 s
.00007 s
Note
For this application, if making measurements of a signal > 1 kHz, the HP
3458A has been known to have .05% to .1% peaking in the 100 mV range.
For these signals, lock the HP 3458A to the 1 V range.
6-77
5520A
Service Manual
HP 3458A
SC300 Cable
5520A-SC300
5520A CALIBRATOR
6-78
BNC(F) to
Double Banana
Adapter
(50
Ω
Feedthrough
Termination as required by the calibration procedure)
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A
SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX yg122f.eps
Figure 6-19. Equipment Setup for SC300 Square Wave Measurements.
For all measurements, the HP 3458A is in DCV, manual ranging, with level triggering enabled. A convenient method to make these measurements from the HP 3458A’s front panel is to program these settings into several of the user defined keys on its front panel.
For example, to make topline measurements at 1 kHz, you would set the DMM to
“NPLC .01; LEVEL 1; DELAY .0002; TRIG LEVEL”. To find the average of multiple readings, you can program one of the keys to “MATH OFF; MATH STAT” and then use the “RMATH MEAN” function to recall the average or mean value. Refer to Figure 6-19 for the proper connections.
6-104. DC Voltage Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination (as required in the calibration procedure)
•
Shorted Dual Banana Connector
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Note
Full calibration of the Voltage Function requires both dc and ac calibration.
Refer to Figure 6-19 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe in Scope Cal mode, DC Voltage section. Follow these steps to calibrate DC Voltage:
1.
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2.
Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
3.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
SC300 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions
6
4.
Ensure the HP 3458A reading is 0.0 V DC
±
100
µ
V.
5.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
6.
Calibration voltages 33 V and greater will automatically put the Calibrator
Mainframe output in standby. When this occurs, press
O on the Calibrator
Mainframe to activate the output. Allow the HP 3458A DC voltage reading to stabilize. Enter the reading via the Calibrator Mainframe front panel keypad, then press ENTER.
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and carefully re-enter the reading insuring proper multiplier (i.e., m,
µ
, n, p). If the warning still occurs, repair may be necessary.
7.
Repeat steps 6 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate ac voltage. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
AC voltage must now be calibrated. Continue with the next section.
6-105. AC Square Wave Voltage Calibration
This procedure uses the same equipment and setup as DC Voltage calibration but requires different settings on the HP 3458A. See “Calibration and Verification of Square
Wave Functions” earlier in this section for technical details on the procedure. DC voltages are measured and entered in the Calibrator Mainframe to calibrate the AC
Voltage function.
Set up the Calibrator Mainframe to Cal ACV. Press OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “The next steps calibrate -SC300 ACV”. Then follow these steps to calibrate ac voltage:
1.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
2.
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
3.
Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .0002 for measuring the upper part of the wave form (i.e. topline), and the
DELAY to .0007 for measuring the lower part of the wave form (i.e. baseline).
Manually range lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step.
4.
For each calibration step, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A
MATH functions to retrieve the average or mean value. See “Setup for Square Wave
Measurements” earlier in this chapter for more details.
The “true amplitude” of the wave form is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements, correcting for the load resistance error. To make this correction, multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload)/Rload), where Rload = actual feedthrough termination resistance if used.
6-79
5520A
Service Manual
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and carefully re-enter the reading insuring proper multiplier (i.e., m, u, n, p). If the warning still occurs, repair may be necessary.
5.
Repeat step 4 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that WAVEGEN
CAL is the next step. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
6-106. Edge Amplitude Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
Refer to Figure 6-19 for the proper setup connections. Press the OPTIONS and NEXT
SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “Set up to measure fast edge amplitude”. Then follow these steps to calibrate edge amplitude:
1.
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the BNC cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana.
2.
Set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .0002 for measuring the upper part of the wave form (i.e. topline), and the
DELAY to .0007 for measuring the lower part of the wave form (i.e. baseline).
Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the baseline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step. Note that in the EDGE function, the topline is very near
0V, and the baseline is a negative voltage.
3.
For each calibration step, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A
MATH functions to enter the average or mean value. See “Setup for Square Wave
Measurements”, earlier in this section, for more details.
The “true amplitude” of the wave form is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements, correcting for the load resistance error. To make this correction, multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload)/Rload), where Rload = actual feedthrough termination resistance.
6-107. Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Calibration
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
5790A AC Measurement Standard
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug Adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-20 for the proper connections.
Press the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “Set up to measure leveled sine amplitude”. Then follow these steps to calibrate Leveled Sine
Wave amplitude:
6-80
SC300 Option
Calibration and Verification of Square Wave Functions
6
1.
Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination then to the
5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2.
Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
3.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4.
Press
O to activate operating mode on the Calibrator Mainframe.
5.
Allow the 5790A rms reading to stabilize. Multiply the 5790A reading by (0.5 * (50
+ Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Enter the corrected rms reading via the Calibrator
Mainframe front panel keypad, then press
E
.
Note
The Calibrator Mainframe will warn when the entered value is out of bounds. If this warning occurs recheck the setup and calculation and carefully re-enter the corrected rms reading insuring proper multiplier
(i.e., m, u, n, p). If the warning still occurs, repair may be necessary.
6.
Repeat step 5 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate Leveled Sine flatness. Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
HI
LO
10V PEAK
MAX
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD
INPUT1 INPUT1 INPUT1 SHUNT INPUT1
2.2 mV
6
7 mV
0
22 mV
7
220 mV
8
70 mV
1
700 mV
2
2.2 mV
2.2 V
9
3
22 V .
220 mV
+/-
4 5
1kV
ENTER
DELETE
CLEAR
AUTO MAN
VIEW
REF
SPEC
POWER
I
O
5520A CALIBRATOR
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
PK
MAX
TRIG
GUARD
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
MAX
20V PK MAX
TC 20V PK MAX
1
+
/
STBY
7
4
OPR
8
5
2
EARTH SCOPE
9
6
3
µ n m k p
M
BOOST dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
F
0 • SHIFT ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
Figure 6-20. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard
yg034f.eps
6-108. Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Calibration
Leveled Sine Wave flatness calibration is divided into two frequency bands: 50 kHz to
10 MHz (low frequency) and > 10 MHz to 300 MHz (high frequency). The equipment setups are different for each band. Flatness calibration of the low frequency band is made relative to 50 kHz. Flatness calibration of the high frequency band is made relative to 10 MHz.
Leveled Sine Wave flatness is calibrated at multiple amplitudes. Both low and high frequency bands are calibrated at each amplitude. Calibration begins with the low frequency band, then the high frequency band for the first amplitude, followed by the low frequency band, then the high frequency band for the second amplitude, and so on, until the flatness calibration is complete.
6-81
5520A
Service Manual
Press the OPTIONS and NEXT SECTION blue softkeys until the display reads “Set up to measure leveled sine flatness”.
6-109. Low Frequency Calibration
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector to the 5790A WIDEBAND input as described under “Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness”.
Follow these steps to calibrate low frequency Leveled Sine Wave flatness for the amplitude being calibrated:
1.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
2.
Establish the 50 kHz reference:
•
Allow the 5790A rms reading to stabilize.
•
Press the 5790A Set Ref blue softkey. (Clear any previous reference by pressing the 5790A Clear Ref blue softkey prior to setting the new reference if required.)
3.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4.
Adjust the amplitude using the Calibrator Mainframe front panel knob until the
5790A reference deviation matches the 50 kHz reference within 1000 ppm.
5.
Repeat steps 1 to 4 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the reference frequency is now 10 MHz. Continue with the high frequency calibration.
6-110. High Frequency Calibration
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector to the power meter and power sensor as described in, “Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness” earlier in this section.
Follow these steps to calibrate high frequency Leveled Sine Wave flatness for the amplitude being calibrated.
1.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
2.
Establish the 10 MHz reference:
•
Press the power meter SHIFT key, then FREQ key and use the arrow keys to enter the power sensor’s 10 MHz Cal Factor. Ensure that the factor is correct, then press the power meter ENTER key.
•
Allow the power meter reading to stabilize.
•
Press the Power meter REL key.
3.
Press the GO ON blue softkey.
4.
Press the power meter SHIFT key, then FREQ key and use the arrow keys to enter the power sensor’s Cal Factor for the frequency displayed on the Calibrator
Mainframe. Ensure that the factor is correct, then press the power meter ENTER key.
5.
Adjust the amplitude using the Calibrator Mainframe front panel knob until the power sensor reading matches the 10 MHz reference within 0.1%.
6.
Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that either the reference frequency is now 50 kHz or that the next steps calibrate pulse width.
Repeat the low frequency calibration procedure for the next amplitude unless the
Calibrator Mainframe display indicates that the next steps calibrate pulse width.
Press the OPTIONS, then STORE CONSTS blue softkeys to store the new calibration constants.
6-82
SC300 Option
Verification
6
6-111. Verification
All of the Oscilloscope Calibration functions should be verified at least once per year, or each time the SC300 is calibrated. The verification procedures in this section provide traceable results; however the factory uses different procedures and instruments of higher precision than those described here. The procedures in this manual have been developed to provide users the ability to verify the SC300 at their own site if they are required to do so. Fluke strongly recommends that, if possible, you return your unit to
Fluke for calibration and verification.
All equipment specified for SC300 verification must be calibrated, certified traceable if traceability is to be maintained, and operating within their normal specified operating environment. It is also important to ensure that the equipment has had sufficient time to warm up prior to its use. Refer to each equipment’s operating manual for details.
Before you begin verification, you may wish to review all of the procedures in advance to ensure you have the resources to complete them.
6-112. DC Voltage Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination (as required)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
For DC voltage verification, refer to Figure 6-19 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu on the display. Then use the next sections to verify the DC Voltage function.
6-113. Verification at 1 M
Ω
For the 1 M
Ω
verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the
HP 3458A input, using the cable and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 1 M
Ω
(The blue softkey under
Output Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
1.
Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
2.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage listed in Table 6-43. Press
Oon the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
3.
Allow the HP 3458A reading to stabilize, then record the HP 3458A reading for each voltage in Table 6-43.
4.
Compare result to the tolerance column.
6-114. Verification at 50
Ω
For the 50
Ω
verification, connect the SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the cable and the 50
Ω
termination connected to the BNC to Banana Plug adapter.
Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 50
Ω
(The blue softkey under
Output Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
1.
Set the HP 3458A to DCV, Auto Range, NPLC = 10, FIXEDZ = on.
6-83
5520A
Service Manual
2.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage listed in Table 6-44. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
3.
Allow the HP 3458A reading to stabilize, then record the HP 3458A reading for each voltage in Table 6-44.
Multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Compare result to the tolerance (1-year spec.) column.
Table 6-43. DC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
Measured Value (dc) Deviation (mV) Nominal Value (dc)
0.0 mV
5.0 mV
-5.0 mV
22.0 mV
-22.0 mV
25.0 mV
-25.0 mV
45.0 mV
-45.0 mV
50.0 mV
-50.0 mV
220.0 mV
-220.0 mV
250.0 mV
-250.0 mV
450.0 mV
-450.0 mV
500.0 mV
-500.0 mV
3.3 V
-3.3 V
4.0 V
-4.0 V
33.0 V
-33.0 V
1-Year Spec.
(mV)
0.10
0.11
0.11
0.15
0.21
0.23
0.23
0.65
0.15
0.16
0.16
0.21
0.65
0.72
0.72
1.22
1.22
1.35
1.35
8.35
8.35
10.10
10.10
82.60
82.60
6-84
Nominal Value (dc)
0.0 mV
5.0 mV
-5.0 mV
10.0 mV
-10.0 mV
22.0 mV
-22.0 mV
25.0 mV
-25.0 mV
55.0 mV
-55.0 mV
100.0 mV
-100.0 mV
220.0 mV
-220.0 mV
250.0 mV
-250.0 mV
550.0 mV
-550.0 mV
700.0 mV
-700.0 mV
2.2 V
-2.2 V
Table 6-44. DC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
Measured Value (dc) Deviation (mV)
SC300 Option
Verification
6
1-Year Spec.
(mV)
0.10
0.11
0.11
0.12
0.16
0.24
0.24
0.35
0.12
0.15
0.15
0.16
0.35
0.65
0.65
0.72
0.72
1.47
1.47
1.85
1.85
5.60
5.60
6-85
5520A
Service Manual
6-115. AC Voltage Amplitude Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 3458A Digital Multimeter
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination (as required)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
For ac voltage amplitude verification, refer to Figure 6-19 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu on the display. Then proceed with the next sections to verify the AC Voltage function.
6-116. Verification at 1 M
Ω
For the 1 M
Ω
verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the
HP 3458A input, using the cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter. Connect the Calibrator Mainframe TRIG OUT connector to the HP 3458A Ext Trig connector located on the rear of that instrument.
Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to 1 M
Ω
. (The blue softkey under
Output Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
.)
1.
When making measurements at 1 kHz, set the HP 3458A to the values shown in
Table 6-42. Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step.
2.
Measure the topline first. For each measurement, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A MATH functions to determine the average or mean value. See “Setup Square Wave Measurements” earlier in this section for more details.
3.
Measure the baseline of each output after the corresponding topline measurement.
The peak-to-peak value is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements. Compare the result to the tolerance (1-year spec.) column.
4.
When making measurements at the other frequencies, set up the HP 3458A (NPLC and topline and baseline DELAY) per Table 6-42.
6-86
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Table 6-45. AC Voltage Verification at 1 M
Ω
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
10 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
10 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
Nominal Value (p-p) Frequency Measured Value (p-p) Deviation (mV) 1-Year Spec. (mV)
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
0.11
0.11
0.11
0.11
5.0 V
10.0 V
20.0 V
50.0 V
50.0 V
50.0 V
50.0 V
105.0 V
105.0 V
500.0 mV
890.0 mV
890.0 mV
1.0 V
1.0 V
1.0 V
2.0 V
5.0 V
5.0 mV
10.0 mV
20.0 mV
20.0 mV
20.0 mV
50.0 mV
89.0 mV
89.0 mV
100.0 mV
200.0 mV
200.0 mV
200.0 mV
12.60
25.10
50.10
125.10
125.10
125.10
125.10
262.60
262.60
1.35
2.32
2.32
2.60
2.60
2.60
5.10
12.60
0.15
0.23
0.32
0.32
0.11
0.12
0.15
0.15
0.35
0.60
0.60
0.60
6-87
5520A
Service Manual
20.0 mV
44.9 mV
44.9 mV
50.0 mV
100.0 mV
100.0 mV
100.0 mV
200.0 mV
449.0 mV
449.0 mV
Nominal Value
(p-p)
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
5.0 mV
10.0 mV
10.0 mV
10.0 mV
6-117. Verification at 50
Ω
For the 50
Ω
verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the
HP 3458A input, using the cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe, the external 50
Ω
termination, and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter. (The 50
Ω
termination is closest to the HP 3458A input.) Make sure the Calibrator Mainframe impedance is set to
50
Ω
. (The blue softkey under Output Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1
M
Ω
). Proceed with the following steps:
1.
Set the HP 3458A to the values shown in Table 6-42. Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the topline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step.
2.
Measure the topline first, as indicated in Table 6-46. For each measurement, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A MATH functions to determine the average or mean value. See “Setup for Square Wave Measurements” for more details.
3.
Measure the baseline of each output after the corresponding topline measurement, as indicated in Table 6-46. The peak-to-peak value is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements. Multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error. Compare the result to the tolerance column.
Table 6-46. AC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
Frequency
Measured Value
(p-p)
Deviation
(mV)
10 kHz
10 Hz
10 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
10 kHz
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
1-Year Spec.
(mV)
0.11
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.11
0.11
0.11
0.11
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.60
0.15
0.21
0.21
0.23
1.22
1.22
6-88
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Nominal Value
(p-p)
500.0 mV
1.0 V
1.0 V
1.0 V
2.0 V
2.0 V
2.0 V
2.0 V
2.0 V
Table 6-46. AC Voltage Verification at 50
Ω
(cont.)
Frequency
Measured Value
(p-p)
Deviation
(mV)
10 kHz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
6-118. AC Voltage Frequency Verification
Refer to Figure 6-21 for the proper setup connections.
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an TCXO timebase (Option PM 9678 or equivalent)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
1-Year Spec.
(mV)
1.35
2.60
2.60
2.60
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
5520A-SC300
5520A CALIBRATOR
SC300 Cable
PM 6680A
At 50 MHZ
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A
SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX yg123f.eps
Figure 6-21. Frequency Verification Setup
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Volt menu on the display. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify ac voltage frequency:
6-89
5520A
Service Manual
1.
Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 1M
Ω
impedance, and filter off.
2.
Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to
PM 6680 channel A.
3.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 2.1 V at each frequency listed in Table
6-47.
4.
Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed in Table 6-47. Compare to the tolerance column of Table 6-47.
Table 6-47. AC Voltage Frequency Verification
Calibration Mainframe
Frequency
(output @ 2.1 V p-p)
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
PM 6680 Reading
(Frequency)
Tolerance
0.01525 Hz
0.0175 Hz
0.04 Hz
0.265 Hz
6-119. Edge Amplitude Verification
For the Edge Amplitude verification, connect the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector to the HP 3458A input, using the cable supplied with the Calibrator
Mainframe, the external 50
Ω
termination, and the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
(The 50
Ω
termination is closest to the HP 3458A input.)
1.
For measurements of a 1 kHz signal, set the HP 3458A to DCV, NPLC = .01,
LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .0002 for measuring the upper part of the wave form (i.e. topline), and the DELAY to .0007 for measuring the lower part of the wave form (i.e. baseline). For measurements of a 10 kHz signal, set the HP
3458A to DCV, NPLC = .001, LEVEL 1, TRIG LEVEL, and the DELAY to .00002
for measuring the topline, and the DELAY to .00007 for measuring the baseline.
2.
Manually lock the HP 3458A to the range that gives the most resolution for the baseline measurements. Use this same range for the corresponding baseline measurements at each step. Note that in the EDGE function, the topline is very near
0 V, and the baseline is a negative voltage. See Table 6-48.
3.
For each calibration step, take samples for at least two seconds, using the HP 3458A
MATH functions to enter the average or mean value. See “Setup for Square Wave
Measurements” earlier in this section for more details.
4.
The peak-to-peak value of the wave form is the difference between the topline and baseline measurements, correcting for the load resistance error. To make this correction, multiply the readings by (0.5 * (50 + Rload)/Rload), where Rload = actual feedthrough termination resistance. Record each reading as indicated in Table
6-48.
6-90
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Calibrator
Mainframe Edge
Output
HP 3458A
Range
100 mV, 1 kHz 100 mV dc
1.00V, 1 kHz 1 V dc
5 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
10 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
25 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
50 mV, 10 kHz 100 mV dc
100 mV, 10 kHz 1 V dc
500 mV, 10 kHz 1 V dc
1.00 V, 10 kHz 1 V dc
2.5 V, 10 kHz 10 V dc
Table 6-48. Edge Amplification Verification
Topline
Reading
Baseline
Reading
Peak-to-
Peak
Peak-to-
Peak x
Correction
Tolerance
(
±
V)
0.0022
0.0202
0.0003
0.0004
0.0007
0.0012
0.0022
0.0102
0.0202
0.0502
6-120. Edge Frequency Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with an ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM
9691)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-21 for proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to
SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press
O on the Calibrator
Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify Edge frequency:
1.
Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 50
Ω
impedance, and filter off.
2.
Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to
PM 6680 channel A.
3.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 2.5 V at each frequency listed in Table
6-49.
4.
Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed in Table 6-49. Compare to the tolerance column of Table 6-49.
Table 6-49. Edge Frequency Verification
Calibrator Mainframe
Frequency
(Output @ 2.5 V p-p)
1 kHz
10 kHz
100 kHz
1 MHz
PM 6680 Reading
(Frequency)
Tolerance
0.025 Hz
0.25 Hz
2.50 Hz
25.0 Hz
6-91
5520A
Service Manual
6-121. Edge Duty Cycle Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-21 for proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to
SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press
O on the Calibrator
Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify Edge duty cycle.
1.
Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure duty cycle on channel A with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, 50
Ω
impedance, and filter off.
2.
Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to
PM 6680 channel A.
3.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output 2.5 V at 1 MHz.
4.
Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize. Compare the duty cycle reading to 50%
±
5%.
6-122. Edge Rise Time Verification
This procedure tests the edge function’s rise time. Aberrations are also checked with the
Tektronix 11801 oscilloscope and SD-22/26 sampling head.
The following equipment is used to verify the edge rise time.
•
High Frequency Digital Storage Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with Tektronix SD-
22/26 sampling head
•
3 dB attenuator, 3.5 mm (m/f)
•
BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter (2)
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
• second BNC cable
Connect the BNC cable supplied with the SC300 to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to one BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter then to the DSO’s sampling head through the 3 dB attenuator.
Using the second BNC(f) to 3.5 mm(m) adapter and BNC cable, connect the Calibrator
Mainframe’s TRIG OUT connector to the 11801’s Trigger Input. Refer to Figure 6-22.
6-92
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Tek 11801
With SD26 Sampling Head
5520A-SC300
5520A CALIBRATOR
SC300
Cable
3 dB Attenaator
3.5 mm (m/f)
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A
SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX
BNC(F) to
3.5 mm (m)
Adapter yg124f.eps
Figure 6-22. Edge Rise Time Verification Setup
The Calibrator Mainframe should be in SCOPE mode, with the Edge menu on the display. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Press the softkey under TRIG to select the TRIG/1 External Trigger output. Program the Calibrator
Mainframe to output 250 mV @ 1 kHz. Set the DSO to these parameters:
Digital Storage Oscilloscope Setup
Main Time Base position (initial)
Horizontal scale
Measurement Function
40 ns
500 ps/div
Rise Time
1.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage and frequency listed in
Table 6-50. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
2.
Change the vertical scale of the DSO to the value listed in the table. Adjust the main time base position and vertical offset until the edge signal is centered on the display.
Record the rise time measurement in column A of Table 6-50. Refer to Figure 6-23.
3.
Correct the rise time measurement by accounting for the SD-22/26 sampling head’s rise time. The SD-22/26 rise time is specified as < 28 ps. Column B = sqrt((Column
2
A) - (SD-22/26 rise time)
2
).
4.
The edge rise time measured should be less than the time indicated in Table 6-50.
6-93
5520A
Service Manual
90%
Rise time measures between these two points
10% om033i.eps
Figure 6-23. Edge Rise Time
Table 6-50. Edge Rise Time Verification
Calibrator Mainframe Output
Voltage
250 mV
500 mV
1 V
2.5 V
Frequency
1 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
DSO
Vertical
Axis
(mV/div)
20.0
50.0
100.0
200.0
A
11801
Reading
B
Corrected
Reading
Tolerance
< 400 ps
< 400 ps
< 400 ps
< 400 ps
6-123. Edge Abberation Verification
The following equipment is needed for this procedure:
•
Tektronix 11801 oscilloscope with SD22/26 sampling head
•
Output cable provided with the SC300
Before you begin this procedure, verify that the 5520A-SC300 is in the edge mode (the
Edge menu is displayed), and program it to output 1 V p-p @ 1 MHz. Press
O to activate the output.
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe to the oscilloscope as in Figure 6-22. Set the oscilloscope vertical to 10 mV/div and horizontal to 1 ns/div. Set the oscilloscope to look at the 90% point of the edge signal; use this point as the reference level. Set the oscilloscope to look at the first 10 ns of the edge signal with the rising edge at the left edge of the oscilloscope display.
With these settings, each vertical line on the oscilloscope represents a 1% aberration.
Determine that the SC300 falls within the typical specifications shown in Table 6-51.
6-94
SC300 Option
Verification
6
Table 6-51. Edge Aberrations
Time from 50% of Rising Edge
0 - 10 ns
10 - 30 ns
> 30 ns
Typical Edge Aberrations
< 22 mV (2.2%)
< 12 mV (1.2%)
< 7 mV (0.7%)
6-124. Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
5790A AC Measurement Standard
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana Plug adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-20 for the proper setup connections.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu on the display.
Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to verify the leveled sine wave amplitude.
1.
Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination then to the
5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
2.
Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
3.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the voltage listed in Table 6-52.
4.
Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then record the 5790A’s rms reading for each voltage listed in Table 6-52.
5.
Multiply the rms reading by the conversion factor of 2.8284 to convert it to the peakto-peak value.
6.
Multiply the peak-to-peak value by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error.
Compare result to the tolerance column.
6-95
5520A
Service Manual
Calibrator Mainframe
Output
(@ 50 kHz)
5.0 mV
10.0 mV
20.0 mV
40.0 mV
50.0 mV
100.0 mV
200.0 mV
400.0 mV
500.0 mV
1.3 V
2.0 V
5.5 V
Table 6-52. Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude Verification
5790A Reading
(V rms)
5790A Reading x 2.8284
(V p-p)
Tolerance
(V p-p)
0.4 mV
0.5 mV
0.7 mV
1.1 mV
1.3 mV
2.3 mV
4.3 mV
8.3 mV
10.3 mV
0.0263 V
0.0403 V
0.1103 V
6-125. Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with a prescaler for the Channel C input
(Option PM 9621, PM 9624, or PM 9625) and ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM 9691)
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to 6-21 for the proper setup connections. Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu on the display. Then follow these steps to verify the leveled sine wave amplitude.
1.
Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, and 50
Ω
impedance.
2.
Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to the PM 6680 at the channel indicated in Table 6-53. You will need the BNC-N adapter for the connection to Channel C.
3.
Set the filter on the PM 6680 as indicated in the table.
4.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output as listed in Table 6-53. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
5.
Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed in Table 6-53.
6-96
Calibrator Mainframe
Frequency
(Output @ 5.5 V p-p)
50 kHz
500 kHz
5 MHz
50 MHz
500 MHz
Table 6-53. Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Verification
PM 6680 Settings
Channel Filter
PM 6680 Reading
(Frequency)
A
A
A
A
C
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Tolerance
1.25 Hz
12.5 Hz
125.0 Hz
1250 Hz
12500 Hz
6-126. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 8590A Spectrum Analyzer
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-24 for proper setup connections.
SC300 Option
Verification
6
HP 8590A 5520A-SC300
5520A CALIBRATOR
BNC(F) to Type N (M)
Adapter
SC300
Cable
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX
TC
20V PK MAX yg125f.eps
Figure 6-24. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification Setup
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Levsine menu on the display.
Then follow these steps to verify the leveled sine wave harmonics.
1.
Using the BNC cable and BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to the HP 8590A.
2.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to 5.5 V p-p at each frequency listed in Table 6-
54. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
6-97
5520A
Service Manual
3.
Set HP 8590A start frequency to the Calibrator Mainframe output frequency. Set HP
8590A stop frequency to 10 times the Calibrator Mainframe output frequency. Set the HP 8590A reference level at +19 dBm.
4.
Record the harmonic level reading for each frequency and harmonic listed in Table
6-54. For harmonics 3, 4, and 5, record the highest harmonic level of the three measured. Harmonics should be below the levels listed in the tolerance column of
Table 6-54.
Table 6-54. Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics Verification
Calibrator Mainframe
Output Frequency
(@ 5.5 V p-p)
10 MHz
10 MHz
20 MHz
20 MHz
40 MHz
40 MHz
80 MHz
80 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
200 MHz
200 MHz
250 MHz
250 MHz
50 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
100 kHz
200 kHz
200 kHz
400 kHz
400 kHz
800 kHz
800 kHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
2 MHz
2 MHz
4 MHz
4 MHz
8 MHz
8 MHz
Harmonic
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
2
3, 4, 5
HP 8590A Reading (dB) Tolerance
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
-33 dB
-38 dB
6-98
SC300 Option
Verification
6
6-127. Leveled Sine Wave Flatness Verification
Leveled Sine Wave flatness verification is divided into two frequency bands: 50 kHz to
10 MHz (low frequency) and > 10 MHz to 300 MHz (high frequency). The equipment setups are different for each band. Leveled Sine Wave flatness is measured relative to 50 kHz. This is determined directly in the low frequency band. The high frequency band requires a “transfer” measurement be made at 10 MHz to calculate a flatness relative to
50 kHz.
6-128. Equipment Setup for Low Frequency Flatness
All low frequency flatness procedures use the following equipment:
•
5790A/03 AC Measurement Standard with Wideband option
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Connect the Calibrator Mainframe SCOPE connector to the 5790A WIDEBAND input with the BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter as shown in Figure 6-25. Set the 5790A to
AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi Res on.
5790A
AC MEASUREMENT
STANDARD
INPUT 1
1000V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
WIDEBAND
7V RMS MAX
SHELL FLOATING
SHUNT
3V RMS MAX
INPUT 2
1000V RMS MAX
HI
LO
10V PEAK
MAX
10V PK
MAX
GROUND GUARD
INPUT1 INPUT1 INPUT1 SHUNT INPUT1
2.2 mV
6
22 mV
7
220 mV
8
7 mV
0
2.2 mV
70 mV
1
700 mV
2
2.2 V
9
3
22 V .
220 mV
+/-
4
5
1kV
ENTER
DELETE
CLEAR
AUTO MAN
VIEW
REF
SPEC
POWER
I
O
5520A CALIBRATOR
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
150V
MAX
TRIG
GUARD
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX
STBY
7
4
1
+
/
OPR
8
5
2
EARTH SCOPE
9
6
3
µ n m k p
M
BOOST dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
F
0 • SHIFT ENTER
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O
Figure 6-25. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the 5790A AC Measurement Standard
yg034f.eps
6-129. Equipment Setup for High Frequency Flatness
All high frequency flatness procedures use the following equipment:
•
Hewlett-Packard 437B Power Meter
•
Hewlett-Packard 8482A and 8481D Power Sensors
•
BNC(f) to Type N(f) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe
Note
When high frequencies at voltages below 63 mV p-p are verified, use the
8481D Power Sensor. Otherwise, use the 8482A Power Sensor.
6-99
5520A
Service Manual
Connect the HP 437B Power Meter to either the 8482A or the 8481D Power Sensor as shown in Figure 6-26. For more information on connecting the two instruments, see the power meter and power sensor operators manuals.
Connect the power meter/power sensor combination to the SCOPE connector on the
Calibrator Mainframe, as shown in Figure 6-27.
The Hewlett-Packard 437B Power Meter must be configured by setting the parameters listed below. Zero and self-calibrate the power meter with the power sensor being used.
Refer to the Hewlett-Packard 437B operators manual for details.
•
PRESET
•
RESOLN 3
•
AUTO FILTER
•
WATTS
•
SENSOR TABLE 0 (default)
6-100
OM035f.eps
Figure 6-26. Connecting the HP 437B Power Meter to the HP 8482A or 8481D Power Sensor
5520A CALIBRATOR
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
20V
RMS
MAX
LO
150V
PK
MAX
TRIG
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20V PK MAX
20A
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
MAX
TC
20V PK MAX
1
+
/
STBY
7
4
OPR
8
5
2
EARTH SCOPE
9
6
3
µ n m k p
M
BOOST dBm
V
W
A
PREV
MENU sec
Hz
¡F
¡C
0 • SHIFT ENTER
F
SETUP RESET
NEW
REF
MEAS
TC
MULT x
CE
TRIG
OUT
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
I
O yg036f.eps
Figure 6-27. Connecting the Calibrator Mainframe to the HP Power Meter and Power Sensor
SC300 Option
Verification
6
6-130. Low Frequency Verification
This procedure provides an example of testing low frequency flatness using a 5.5 V output. Follow the same procedure for testing other amplitudes, only compare results against the flatness specification listed in Table 6-55.
1.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe for an output of 5.5 V @ 500 kHz. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
2.
Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize. The 5790A should display approximately 1.94
V rms. Enter the 5790A reading in Column A of Table 6-55.
3.
Enter 50 kHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then enter the 5790A reading in Column B of Table 6-55.
4.
Enter the next frequency listed in Table 6-55. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then enter the reading into Column A of the table.
5.
Enter 50 kHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then enter the 5790A reading in Column B of Table 6-55.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all of frequencies listed in Table 6-55. Continue until you have completed Columns A and B.
7.
When you have completed Columns A and B, press
Y to remove the Calibrator
Mainframe’s output. Complete Table 6-55 by performing the calculations for column C. Compare Column C to the specifications listed in the final column.
Table 6-55. Low Frequency Flatness Verification at 5.5 V
Calibrator
Mainframe
Frequency
500 kHz
1 MHz
2 MHz
A
5 MHz
10 MHz
Complete Columns A-C as follows:
B
50 kHz
C
Calibrator Mainframe
Flatness Specification (%)
±
1.50 + 100
µ
V
±
1.50 + 100
µ
V
±
1.50 + 100
µ
V
±
1.50 + 100
µ
V
±
1.50 + 100
µ
V
A
B
C
Enter 5790A Reading (mV) for the present frequency.
Enter 5790A Reading (mV) for 50 kHz.
Compute and enter the Calibrator Mainframe Flatness Deviation (%): 100 * ((Column A entry)-
(Column B entry))/ (Column B entry)
6-131. High Frequency Verification
This procedure provides an example of testing high frequency flatness using a 5.5 V output. Follow the same procedure for testing other amplitudes, only compare results against the flatness specification listed in Table 6-56. For this voltage range, you will use the model HP 8482A power sensor.
1.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe for an output of 5.5 V @ 30 MHz. Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output.
2.
Allow the power meter reading to stabilize. The power meter should display approximately 75 mW. Enter the power meter’s reading in Column A of Table 6-56.
6-101
5520A
Service Manual
3.
Enter 10 MHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the power meter reading to stabilize, then enter the power meter’s reading in Column B of Table 6-56.
4.
Enter the next frequency listed in Table 6-56. Allow the power meter’s reading to stabilize, then enter the reading into Column A of the table.
5.
Enter 10 MHz into the Calibrator Mainframe. Allow the power meter reading to stabilize, then enter the power meter’s reading in Column B of Table 6-56.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all of frequencies listed in Table 6-56. Continue until you have completed Columns A and B.
7.
When you have completed Columns A and B, press
Y to remove the Calibrator
Mainframe’s output. Complete Table 6-56 by performing the calculations for each column. Compare Column G to the specifications listed in the final column.
Table 6-56. High Frequency Flatness Verification at 5.5 V
Calibrator
Mainframe
Freq. (MHz)
20
50
100
125
160
200
220
235
250
300
A
B
10 MHz
Complete Columns A-G as follows:
C D E F G
Calibrator
Mainframe
Flatness Spec. (%)
±
1.50 +100 uV
±
1.50 +100 uV
±
1.50 +100 uV
±
2.00 + 100 uV
±
2.00 + 100 uV
±
2.00 + 100 uV
±
2.00 + 100 uV
±
2.00 + 100 uV
±
2.00 + 100 uV
±
2.00 + 100 uV
C
D
A
B
E
Enter the 437B present frequency Reading (W).
Enter the 437B 10 MHz Reading (W).
Apply power sensor correction factor for present frequency (W): CF * (Column A entry)
Apply power sensor correction factor for 10 MHz (W): CF * (Column B entry)
F
G
Compute and enter Error relative to 10 MHz (%): 100 * (sqrt(Column A entry) sqrt(Column B entry)) / sqrt(Column B entry)
Enter the 10 MHz rms Error (%) for 5.5 V from Table 6-55, Column C.
Compute and enter the Calibrator Mainframe Flatness Deviation (%): (Column E entry)
+ (Column F entry)
6-102
SC300 Option
Verification
6
6-132. Time Marker Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
PM 6680 Frequency Counter with a prescaler for the Channel C input
(Option PM 9621, PM 9624, or PM 9625) and ovenized timebase (Option PM 9690 or PM 9691)
•
BNC(f) to Type N(m) adapter
•
BNC cable supplied with the SC300
Refer to Figure 6-21 for the proper setup connections. Set the PM 6680’s FUNCTION to measure frequency with auto trigger, measurement time set to 1 second or longer, and
50
Ω
impedance.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Marker menu on the display.
Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Then follow these steps to for each period listed in Table 6-57.
1.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to the output as listed in Table 6-57.
2.
Using the BNC cable, connect the SCOPE connector on the Calibrator Mainframe to the PM 6680 at the channel indicated in Table 6-57. You will need the BNC-N adapter for the connection to Channel C.
3.
Set the filter on the PM 6680 as indicated in the table. Allow the PM 6680 reading to stabilize, then record the PM 6680 reading for each frequency listed for the
Calibrator Mainframe.
4.
Invert the PM 6680’s frequency reading to derive the period. For example, a reading of 1.000006345 kHz has a period of:
1/1.000006345 kHz = 0.999993655 ms.
Record the period in the table and compare to the tolerance column.
Calibrator
Mainframe
Period
Channel
4.979 s
2.002 s
0.999 s
500 ms
200 ms
100 ms
50.0 ms
20.0 ms
10.0 ms
5.00 ms
2.00 ms
1.00 ms
500
µ s
200
µ s
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Table 6-57. Time Marker Verification
PM 6680 Settings
Impedance
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
Filter
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
PM 6680
Reading
(Frequency)
1/(PM 6680
Reading)
(Period)
Tolerance
25.12 ms
4.050 ms
1.0300 ms
262.500
µ s
45.000
µ s
12.500
µ s
3.750
µ s
900.00 ns
350.00 ns
150.00 ns
54.00 ns
26.00 ns
12.750 ns
5.040 ns
6-103
5520A
Service Manual
Table 6-57. Time Marker Verification (cont.)
Channel
A
A
C
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Calibrator
Mainframe
Period
100
µ s
50.0
µ s
20.0
µ s
10.0
µ s
5.00
µ s
2.00
µ s
1.00
µ s
500 ns
200 ns
100 ns
50.0 ns
20.0 ns
10.0 ns
5.00 ns
2.00 ns
PM 6680 Settings
Impedance
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
50
Ω
Filter
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
PM 6680
Reading
(Frequency)
1/(PM 6680
Reading)
( Period)
Tolerance
2.650 ns
1.287 ns
506.000 ps
252.000 ps
125.400 ps
50.060 ps
25.000 ps
13.000 ps
5.000 ps
2.500 ps
1.250 ps
0.5000 ps
0.2500 ps
0.1250 ps
0.0500 ps
6-133. Wave Generator Verification
This procedure uses the following equipment:
•
5790A AC Measurement Standard
•
BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter
•
50
Ω
feedthrough termination
•
BNC cable supplied with the Calibrator Mainframe
For wave generation verification procedures, refer to Figure 6-28 for the proper setup connections.
6-104
SC300 Option
Verification
6
5520A-SC300
5520A CALIBRATOR
SC300
Cable
1000V
RMS
MAX
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
1V PK
MAX
LO
20V
RMS
MAX
TRIG
150V
PK
MAX
20V
RMS
MAX
GUARD
20A SHELLS
NOT
GROUNDED
20V
PK
MAX
20V PK MAX TC 20V PK MAX
BNC (F) to
Double Banana
Adapter
50
Ω
Feed Through
Termination yg126f.eps
Figure 6-28. Wave Generator Verification Setup
Set the Calibrator Mainframe to SCOPE mode, with the Wavegen menu on the display.
Press
O on the Calibrator Mainframe to activate the output. Set the offset to 0 mV, and the frequency to 1 kHz. Then follow these steps to verify the wave generator function.
6-134. Verification at 1 M
Ω
1.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe impedance to 1 M
Ω
(The blue softkey under SCOPE Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
2.
Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double
Banana adapter.
3.
Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
4.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the wave type and voltage listed in
Table 6-58.
5.
Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then record the 5790A rms reading for each wave type and voltage in Table 6-58.
6.
Multiply the rms reading by the conversion factor listed to convert it to the peak-topeak value. Compare result to the tolerance column.
6-135. Verification at 50
Ω
1.
Set the Calibrator Mainframe impedance to 50
Ω
(The blue softkey under SCOPE Z toggles the impedance between 50
Ω
and 1 M
Ω
).
2.
Connect the BNC cable to the Calibrator Mainframe’s SCOPE connector. Connect the other end of the BNC cable to the 50
Ω
feedthrough termination then to the
5790A INPUT 2 using the BNC(f) to Double Banana adapter.
3.
Set the 5790A to AUTORANGE, digital filter mode to FAST, restart fine, and Hi
Res on.
6-105
5520A
Service Manual
Calibrator
Mainframe
Wave Type
square square square square square square square sine sine sine sine sine sine sine triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle
4.
Program the Calibrator Mainframe to output the wave type and voltage listed in
Table 6-59.
5.
Allow the 5790A reading to stabilize, then record the 5790A rms reading for each wave type and voltage in Table 6-59.
6.
Multiply the rms reading by the conversion factor listed to convert it to the peak-topeak value.
7.
Multiply the peak-to-peak value by (0.5 * (50 + Rload) / Rload), where Rload = the actual feedthrough termination resistance, to correct for the resistance error.
Compare result to the tolerance column.
Table 6-58. Wave Generator Verification at 1 M
Ω
Calibrator
Mainframe output
(@ 10 kHz)
5790A
Reading
(V rms)
Conversion
Factor
5790A Reading x
Conversion Factor
(V p-p)
5.0 mV
20.0 mV
2.0000
2.0000
89 mV
219 mV
890 mV
6.5 V
55 V
5.0 mV
20.0 mV
89 mV
219 mV
890 mV
6.5 V
55 V
5.0 mV
20.0 mV
89 mV
219 mV
890 mV
6.5 V
55 V
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
Tolerance
(V p-p)
250.00
µ
V
700.00
µ
V
2.770 mV
6.670 mV
26.8 mV
195.1 mV
1.65 V
250.00
µ
V
700.00
µ
V
2.770 mV
6.670 mV
26.8 mV
195.1 mV
1.65 V
250.00
µ
V
700.00
µ
V
2.770 mV
6.670 mV
26.8 mV
195.1 mV
1.65 V
6-106
SC300 Option
SC300 Hardware Adjustments
6 square square square square square square square sine sine sine sine sine sine sine triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle
Calibrator
Mainframe
Wave Type
Calibrator
Mainframe output
(@ 10 kHz)
Table 6-59. Wave Generator Verification at 50
Ω
5790A
Reading
(V rms)
Conversion
Factor
5790A Reading x
Conversion Factor
(V p-p)
5.0 mV
10.9 mV
2.0000
2.0000
45 mV
109 mV
0.45V
1.09V
2.20V
5.0 mV
10.9 mV
45 mV
109 mV
0.45 V
1.09 V
2.20 V
5.0 mV
10.9 mV
45 mV
109 mV
0.45 V
1.09 V
2.20 V
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.0000
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
2.8284
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
3.4641
Tolerance
(V p-p)
250.00
µ
V
430.00
µ
V
1.450 mV
3.370 mV
13.570 mV
32.500 mV
66.100 mV
250.00
µ
V
430.00
µ
V
1.450 mV
3.370 mV
13.570 mV
32.500 mV
66.100 mV
250.00
µ
V
430.00
µ
V
1.450 mV
3.370 mV
13.570 mV
32.500 mV
66.100 mV
6-136. SC300 Hardware Adjustments
Hardware adjustments must be made to the leveled sine and edge functions each time the
SC300 is repaired. In addition to the adjustment procedures, this section provides lists of the required equipment and some recommendations on models that have the capabilities required by these procedures. Equivalent models can be substituted if necessary.
6-137. Equipment Required
The following equipment is necessary for performing the hardware adjustments described in this section. The models listed are recommended for providing accurate results.
•
Standard adjustment tool for adjusting the pots and trimmer caps
•
Extender Card (pn 661865, 5800A-7006K, Extender Kit )
6-107
5520A
Service Manual
•
Oscilloscope Mainframe and Sampling Head (Tektronix 11801 with SD-22/26 or
Tektronix TDS 820 with 8 GHz bandwidth)
•
10 dB Attenuator (Weinschel 9-10 (SMA), or Weinschel 18W-10, or equivalent)
•
Cable provided with SC300
•
Spectrum Analyzer (Hewlett-Packard 8590A)
6-138. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Function
There is one adjustment procedure that need to be made for the leveled sine wave function. The procedure adjusts the harmonics.
6-139. Equipment Setup
This procedure uses the spectrum analyzer. Before you begin this procedure, verify that the Calibrator Mainframe is in leveled sine wave mode (the Levsine menu is displayed), and program it to output 5.5 V p-p @ 50 MHz. Press
O to activate the output.
Refer to Figure 6-24 for setup connections and connect the Calibrator Mainframe to the
Spectrum Analyzer. Adjust the Spectrum Analyzer so that it displays one peak across its horizontal centerline. The far right of the peak is fixed at the far right of the centerline, as shown below.
6-140. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics
Note
This procedure should only be used for adjusting the leveled sine wave harmonics. Do not use this procedure as a verification test. The specifications in this procedure are not valid for verification.
Set the Spectrum Analyzer to the parameters listed below.
Spectrum Analyzer Setup
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
50 MHz
500 MHz
3 MHz
Video Bandwidth 3 kHz
Reference Level 20 dBm
Use your Spectrum Analyzer’s Peak Search function to find the desired reference signal.
The Analyzer should show the fundamental, and second and third harmonics. The harmonics need to be adjusted so that the second harmonic is at -34 dBc and third harmonic should typically be greater than or equal to -39 dBc as shown in Figure 6-29.
To adjust the harmonics, adjust R8, as shown in Figure 6-29 until the peaks of the second and third harmonic are at the correct dB level. You may find that you can place the second harmonic at -34 dBc but the third harmonic is less than -39 dBc. If this is the case, continue adjusting R8 until the third harmonic is at –39dBc and the second harmonic is greater than or equal to –34dBc The second harmonic will fluctuate, but there is a point at which both harmonics will be at the correct decibel level.
6-108
SC300 Option
SC300 Hardware Adjustments
6
-34 dBc
-39 dBc
R8
2nd harmonic
3rd harmonic yg127f.eps
Figure 6-29. Adjusting the Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics
6-141. Adjusting the Aberrations for the Edge Function
Adjustments need to be made after repair to the edge function to adjust the edge aberrations.
6-142. Equipment Setup
The following equipment is needed for this procedure:
•
Oscilloscope: Tektronix 11801 with SD22/26 input module or Tektronix TDS 820 with 8 GHz bandwidth.
•
20 dB Attenuator: Weinschel 9-20 (SMA) or Weinschel 18W-20 or equivalent
•
Output cable provided with the SC300
Before you begin this procedure, verify that the SC300 is in the edge mode (the Edge menu is displayed), and program it to output 1 V p-p @ 1 MHz. Press
O to activate the output.
Refer to Figure 6-22 for the proper setup connections and connect the Calibrator
Mainframe to the oscilloscope. Set the oscilloscope vertical to 1 mV/div and horizontal to 1 ns/div. Set the oscilloscope to look at the first 10 ns of the edge signal with the rising edge at the left edge of the oscilloscope display.
6-143. Adjusting the Edge Aberrations
Refer to Figure 6-30 while making the following adjustments:
1.
Set the oscilloscope to display the 90% point of the edge signal. Note this voltage (or set to center of the display) as it will be used as the reference for the following adjustments.
2.
Set the oscilloscope to display the leading edge and the first 10 ns of the edge signal.
Adjust A90R13 to set the edge signal at the 10 ns point to the reference level.
3.
Adjust A90R12 to flatten out the edge signal. Readjust A90R13 if necessary to keep the edge signal at the reference level.
4.
Adjust A90R35 so the first overshoot is the same amplitude as the second aberration.
5.
Readjust A90R36 to center the first two aberrations about reference level.
6-109
5520A
Service Manual
6.
Readjust A90R13 if necessary to keep the edge signal at 10 ns to be at the reference level.
7.
Readjust A90R36 ,A90R35 or A90R12 to obtain equal amplitudes of the aberrations displayed during the first 10 ns to be equally above and below the reference level. Check the aberrations , compare with specifications. It may be necessary to slow the rise time(A90R35) to reduce the amplitude of the aberrations.
8.
Set the UUT output to 2.5 V and the oscilloscope vertical to 2 mV/div. Check the aberrations.
9.
Remove the 20 dB attenuator from the oscilloscope input. Connect the UUT to the scope input and program the UUT output to 250 mV.
10.
Set the oscilloscope vertical to 5 mV/div. Check the aberrations.
11.
Check for rise time < 950 ps
±
25 ps at 250 mV, 1 V, and 2.5 V outputs.
1st Aberration
2nd Aberration
3rd Aberration
T
R36
R12
R13
R35
Figure 6-30. Adjusting Edge Aberrations
om050f.eps
6-110
—A—
ac current
(non-sinewave) specifications, 1-29
(sinewave) extended bandwidth specifications,
(sinewave) specifications, 1-14
squarewave characteristics (typical), 1-31 trianglewave characteristics (typical), 1-31
AC Current
ac power
(45 Hz to 65 Hz) specification summary, 1-19
ac voltage
(non-sinewave) specifications, 1-26
(sinewave) extended bandwidth specifications,
(sinewave) specifications, 1-12
dc offset specifications, 1-27
squarewave characteristics, 1-28 trianglewave characteristics (typical), 1-28
AC Voltage
Verifying
AC Voltage frequency function
—C—
DC volts, 3-6, 3-8, 3-10, 3-11, 3-20
NORM volts and AUX current phase, 3-27
NORM volts and AUX volts phase, 3-26
capacitance
Capacitance
capacitance measurement
Current assembly (A7)
—D—
dc current
DC Current
dc power
dc voltage
DC Voltage function
Verification, 6-21, 6-29, 6-78, 6-83
DC Volts
DC Volts (AUX Output)
DDS assembly (A6)
Diagnostic testing
Index
1
5520A
Service Manual
—E—
Edge Duty Cycle function
Edge Frequency function
Edge function
Rise time verification, 6-36, 6-92
Theory of Operation, 6-12, 6-71
Edge Function
Encoder assembly (A2)
Equipment required for calibration and verification,
Error messages
SC Option not installed, 6-5, 6-65
MeasZ function
MeasZ Function
Capacitance Specifications, 6-11
Resistance Specifications, 6-11
MeasZ Resistance
—O—
Overload function
Overload Function
—F—
frequency
Frequency
—H—
Hardware adjustments for SC300, 6-107
Hardware adjustments for SC600, 6-57
harmonics (2nd - 50th) specifications, 1-24
—L—
Leveled Sine Wave function
adjusting the harmonics, 6-58 adjusting VCO balance, 6-58
Amplitude Verification, 6-39, 6-95
Flatness Verification
High frequency at 5.5 V, 6-46, 6-101
Low frequency at 5.5 V, 6-46, 6-101
Low frequency equipment setup, 6-40, 6-44,
Frequency Verification, 6-41, 6-96
Harmonics Verification, 6-42, 6-97
Theory of Operation, 6-12, 6-71
Leveled Sine Wave Function
—M—
Main CPU assembly (A9)
MeasZ Capacitance
—P—
Performance verification. See Verification phase
Phase Accuracy, Volts and AUX Volts
Phase Accuracy, Volts and Current
power and dual output limit specifications, 1-20
power uncertainty, calculating, 1-22
Pulse Function
Pulse Generator Function
Pulse period verification, 6-54
Pulse Width function
Calibration, 6-25 equipment setup, 6-25
Verification
Pulse width verification, 6-53
—R—
remote operation (IEEE-488), 1-4 remote operation (RS-232), 1-4
Removing
The Encoder (A2) and Display PCAs, 4-4
The Keyboard and Accessing the Output Block,
2
Index
(continued)
Required equipment for calibration and verification,
resistance
Resistance
temperature calibration (RTD), 1-18
temperature calibration (thermocouple), 1-17
Specifications
Square Wave Voltage Function
Synthesized Impedance assembly (A5)
—S—
SC300. Seealso
Error Message indicating not installed, 6-65
User’s servicing abilities, 6-65
SC600. See
Error Message indicating not installed, 6-5
User’s servicing abilities, 6-5
Scope Calibration. See SC300. See SC600
ac current (non-sinewave), 1-29
ac current (sinewave) extended bandwidth, 1-28
ac current, squarewave characteristics (typical),
ac current, trianglewave characteristics (typical),
ac power (45 Hz to 65 Hz) summary, 1-19
ac voltage
ac voltage (non-sinewave), 1-26
ac voltage (sinewave) extended bandwidth, 1-25
ac voltage, squarewave characteristics, 1-28
ac voltage, trianglewave characteristics (typical),
power and dual output limit, 1-20
—T—
temperature
calibration (RTD) specifications, 1-18
calibration (thermocouple) specifications, 1-17
Thermocouple Measurement
Thermocouple Simulation (Sourcing)
Time Marker function
Theory of Operation, 6-13, 6-72
Time Marker Function
TV Trigger Specifications, 6-11
—V—
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude, 6-95
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency, 6-96
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics, 6-97
Leveled Sine Wave Amplitude, 6-39
Leveled Sine Wave Frequency, 6-41
Leveled Sine Wave Harmonics, 6-42
Volt Function
3
5520A
Service Manual
Voltage assembly (A8)
Voltage function
Voltage Function
—W—
Wave Generator Specifications, 6-69
Wave Generator function
Wave Generator Function
—Z—
4

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Sources and measures voltage, current, resistance, and frequency
- Generates waveforms and simulates thermocouples
- Performs continuity tests
- Easy-to-use interface
- Rugged and portable design
- NIST traceable calibration